PROJECT: 11-583

PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI,

UAE

FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

TENDER DOCUMENTS

VOLUME 2 PART 3 OF 3
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Engineer:
Employer: Design Center
Mr. Fadi Ahmad Mohammad Odeh Architects & Engineers Consultants
Dubai, UAE P.O. Box: 80623, Dubai, UAE
 PROJECT: 11-583

PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL

SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE

FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

MASTER INDEX

Volume 1 : Tender and Contract Conditions

Volume 2 : Specifications
Part 1 of 3 – Civil and Architectural Specifications
Part 2 of 3 – Mechanical and Plumbing Installation Specifications
Part 3 of 3 – Electrical Installation Specifications

Volume 3 : Bill of Quantities

Volume 4 : Soil Investigation Report

Volume 5 : Drawings
Part 1 of 3 – Architectural Drawings
Part 2 of 3 – Structural Drawings
Part 3 of 3 – Plumbing, Mechanical and Electrical Drawings

Design Center
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

SECTION 17000
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
INDEX
Subsection No. Description

Sub-Section 17010 General

Sub-Section 17020 Motors and Starters
Sub-Section 17030 Main Distribution Boards
Sub-section 17040 Sub-Main Distribution Boards

Sub-Section 17050 Distribution Boards

Sub-Section 17060 Instruments and Metering
Sub-Section 17070 Capacitor Bank

Sub-Section 17080 Meters

Sub-Section 17100 Conduits and Fittings
Sub-Section 17120 Wires and Cables
Sub-Section 17130 Cable Trays
Sub-Section 17140 Lighting Fixtures
Sub-Section 17160 Emergency system self-contained with monitor
Sub-Section 17170 Wiring Devices
Sub-Section 17180 Disconnecting Switches
Sub-Section 17190 Structured Cabling System
Sub-Section 17210 Parking Barrier System
Sub-Section 17220 Intelligent Analogue Addressable Fire Detection
and Voice Evacuation System
Sub-Section 17230 CCTV System
Sub-Section 17240 SMATV System
Sub-Section 17250 Lighting Control System
Sub-Section 17260 Earthing System.
Sub-Section 17270 Intercom System.
Sub –Section 17280 Standby Generator

Sub-Section 17290 List of Electrical Vendors

Design Center Page 1 of 1 Electrical Installations / Index

 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

SUB-SECTION 17010
GENERAL

SPECIFICATION SCOPE, REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS

This section supplements Employer’s Requirements and forms part of every section of Division of
Electrical Works.
This specification covers the supply, installation and testing of all necessary equipment required for
the complete Electrical Engineering Services as described in the Contract Documents and
incorporates standard descriptions for equipment and the installation to be provided under this
Contract. The clauses shall be read in conjunction with all other Contract Documents.
Where, for special reasons, requirements differ from those included in this General Specification and
are specified in the particular detail Specification or on the associated drawings, then such special
requirements shall supersede the general requirements of this particular Specification Section.
The words as indicated, where indicated, unless otherwise indicated, refer to requirements identified
elsewhere in the documents issued in connection with the Contract, e.g. on a drawing, in the
Specification or in a schedule.
The extent of the work shall comprise the whole management, programming, labour and materials
required to form a complete installation, together with such tests, adjustments and commissioning as
prescribed in subsequent clauses and otherwise as may be required in order to provide an effective
working installation to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The words complete installation in the foregoing clause shall mean not only the major items of plant
and equipment covered by this Specification, but all the incidental sundry components that are
required for the complete execution of the works. Also for the proper operation of the installation,
together with associated labour charges, whether or not these sundry components are mentioned in
detail in the tender documents issued in connection with the Contract.

COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS

The whole of the work and materials to be supplied shall be in accordance with the following
publications as relevant, current at the date of Tender, unless otherwise stated:

All standards set out under section 16001.

BS 7671 issued by the Institute of Electrical Engineers (Incorporating all amendments up to date of
Tender)
British Standards (BS) and European Norms (BSEN) issued by the British Standards Institution.
British Standard Code of Practice (BS-CP) issued by the British Standards Institution
Requirements of the Insurance Company concerned.
Requirements of the Dubai Municipality & Civil Defense
Requirements and all Regulations of the Dubai Electricity & Water Authority (DEWA) including the
1997 Edition
Requirements of the Relevant Safety & Construction Regulations
Dubai Civil Defense
Dubai Air Traffic Control & Civil Aviation Authority (where applicable)

BRITISH STANDARDS
All installations and materials used for the works shall be carried out and provided in full compliance
with the appropriate Specification or Codes of Practice issued by the British Standards Institution and
other standards specifically noted.

The letters B.S. and C.P. shall be deemed to refer to the latest British Standard Specification and
Codes of Practice respectively.

Alternatively, elements of the installation maybe carried out to equivalent or better international
standards for installation and/or materials provided these achieve an overall enhanced installation and
are acceptable to the Engineer and Local Authority.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 1/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

QUALITY ASSURANCE
The Contractor shall, where possible, supply equipment only from manufacturers who have a Quality
Assurance scheme in accordance with BSEN ISO 9001 and/or BSEN ISO 9002. When submitting
manufacturers’ information for approval, a copy of the BSEN certification document shall be included
in the submission.
The Contractor shall also provide details of his own site Quality Assurance system together with a
copy of the BESCA certification or a statement on intent to gain certification.

DRAWINGS AND INFORMATION

TENDER DOCUMENTS AND DRAWINGS

The whole of the services at present envisaged are indicated in the tender documents and tender
drawings and listed in the schedules included in the tender documents.

This Specification has been prepared to indicate the quality of material and workmanship required. In
order to avoid mis-interpretation, any doubts as to the full intent of this specification or accompanying
drawings shall be resolved prior to the completion of the tender.

Drawings issued as part of the Contract Documents are in general diagrammatic and have been
prepared, together with the Specification, to enable Tenders to be obtained and to provide a basis for
the preparation of coordinated working drawings in conjunction with the other trades engaged on the
works.

Not with standing any dimensions which may be given on the drawings the Contractor shall check all
dimensions required for the manufacturers of any materials or products and the cost of taking such
dimensions is deemed to be included in the Tender.

PRECEDENCE BETWEEN DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATION AND OTHER DOCUMENTS

This Specification shall be read in conjunction with the Tender Drawings. If any variations between
the drawings and the Specification occur, the drawings shall take precedence and detail drawings
shall take precedence over small scale drawings. However, the Contractor shall draw to the
Engineer’s attention any significant discrepancies before assuming a particular interpretation.

If any variations occur to any regulations, statutory instruments or British Standards etc., the drawings
and then the Specifications shall take precedence. The Contractor shall however, refer any such
discrepancies to the Engineer before assuming a particular interpretation, particularly in respect of
statutory instruments, regulation or British Standards.

INSTALLATION DRAWINGS (SHOP AND WORKING DRAWINGS)

The Contractor shall prior to manufacture and installation prepare installation drawings for the whole
of the electrical services work in accordance with the requirements of the program. These shall be
computer generated using AutoCAD 2004 or 2006 software. The Contractor shall refer to Employer’s
Requirements for the complete procedures for the submission of shop drawings. This generally takes
precedence of the requirements as listed below.

Within thirty working days from the placing of a Contract, the Contractor shall produce a program
indicating his production sequence for installation drawings. The program shall be arranged so that
the installation drawings shall be submitted sequentially for approval in due time to meet the Contract
construction program.

Paper prints of each installation drawing shall be issued to the Engineer for approval purposes.
These prints shall be clearly marked For Examination. For the exact number of prints required refer
to the general conditions of Contract.

When drawings have been returned with no comment the Contractor shall issue one soft and three

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 2/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

paper prints of each drawing to the Engineer and stamped Issued for Construction.

Installation drawings will be reviewed by the Engineer and returned to the Contractor marked A, B of
C. Installation drawings noted Returned for Correction shall be corrected and re-submitted.

No equipment shall be delivered to the job site unless the manufacturer has received an A or B
graded copy of the pertinent shop drawings.

If the drawing is returned with comments, the Contractor shall amend the drawing to take account of
the comments, and resubmit for examination and issuing. The procedure for re-submittal will be
treated as an initial submittal. Each time a drawing is re-submitted for review it must be treated as a
revision.

In preparing this program for the execution of the Contract works, the Contractor shall allow twenty
working days for the design teams first examination of the installation drawings, and ten working days
for the second or subsequent examinations.

Responsibility for errors in the installation drawings irrespective of whether or not the drawings have
been examined by the Engineer shall remain with the Contractor and no additional costs whatsoever
will be payable, as a result of any error.

The Contract drawings shall not be considered to be the working drawings. Additional copies of the
Contract drawings can be provided in CD disk or floppy disk format, if required, at current CAD
drafting and materials rates if these are considered by the Contractor to represent a suitable base
from which the working drawings can be prepared.

Installation drawings shall be to an approved scale and shall also form the basis of the as installed
record drawings as detailed elsewhere in this specification. General layout drawings shall be to 1:50
scale with detailed drawings by the MEP Contractor at a large scale as necessary.

The Contractor shall consult the current Architectural, Structural, Interior Designer, Mechanical, Public
Health and other working drawings of all other divisions, during the preparation of his drawings and
ensure the installations are physically coordinated. The Contractor shall adjust his working drawings
to allow for site tolerances and discrepancies and changes in building layout where the principles and
intent of the design of the services are not affected.
Where the principles and intent of design are affected notice of the conflict shall be given to the
Engineer.
The Tender drawings show the location in principle for the various services. The detailed position
shall be determined and coordinated by the Contractor and shown on the installation drawings.

The Engineer shall have the right at all reasonable times to inspect the premises of the Contractor all
drawings for any portion of the Works.

The Contractors drawings shall be titled in an approved manner with the official title block fully
indicating the part of the works to which they apply. Drawings shall be numbered in sequences and
an approved numbering system shall be agreed.

Once reviewed drawings shall not be departed from except with the written approval of the Engineer.

The Contractor shall be responsible for correcting any discrepancies, errors or omissions in the
drawings and other particulars supplied by him, whether or not such drawings and particulars have
been examined by the Engineer.

Information contained in any of the drawings supplied by the Engineer hall not be utilised for any

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 3/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

purpose other than for the Contract Works and any such information shall not be communicated to
other parties for other purposes without the specific approval of the Engineer.

The following drawings shall form the installation drawings and shall be fully coordinated with work
schedules to be installed as part of these works or by other trades engaged on the Contract:

Finally the following copies of the Working Shop Drawings shall be provided by the Contractor for
issue to the Employer:

 Three paper prints of each drawing.

 Auto Cad 2004/2006 versions on a compact disk (CD)

WIRING DIAGRAMS FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

Electrical wiring diagrams shall be prepared for all plant requiring electrical connections. Where
manufacturers original drawings are used, they shall be specific to the relevant plant and all
references to optional features, other machines of a range, etc., shall be deleted. All wiring diagrams
shall clearly indicated that wiring which forms part of or is connected to the equipment as delivered
and shall include the following minimum information to enable the site connections and wiring to be
completed by the appropriate Contractor:
 Maximum electrical loading for each power cable.
 Cable termination facilities.
 Cable identification and all terminal numbers.
 Additional Information as detailed in 16001.

Where necessary the Contractor shall redraw manufacturer standard diagrams to comply with these
requirements, in addition all items of plant and equipment requiring electrical connections shall have
adequate wiring diagrams fixed inside panels, etc., to ensure correct wiring to the appropriate local
standard.
Detail layout drawings of all plant and equipment including wiring arrangements.

Detail plant room drawings including sections and elevations.

Drawings showing all the general distribution of the service from the plant item up to and including the
final termination point.

Any detail drawings, or manufacturers drawings, required prior to, or found necessary during erection,
manufacture or progress of the works.
Detail drawings of all fabricated steelwork, brackets, supports, gantries, ladders, platforms and all
other items of a similar nature.
Detailed plans, sections and elevations showing all required builders work, including the size and
position of all bases and plinths for equipment, holding down bolts, holes, chases, trenches etc., in
the structure or building fabric related where applicable to the column/building grid lines, to be built in
or attached to the structure.
Drawings showing all conduit routes, sizes and installation shall be provided unless these are agreed
as not necessary by the Engineer.

Drawings showing the General Lighting, Small Power and Ancillary layouts shall be provided by the
Contractor.
SETTING OUT
The Contractor shall be responsible for the true and proper setting out of the Contract Works from the
site setting out datum points on each floor level. The setting out shall be carried out by experienced
operatives with the appropriate equipment to ensure that the Contract Works are fixed correctly in

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 4/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

relation to the Building and any special features or fittings attached to it. All precautions shall be
taken to ensure that a good services coordinated appearance is achieved within the Building.

The marking out of Builders Work required by the Contractor including the supervisory attendance
and direction of all tradesmen detailed to execute Builders Work shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor.

The Contractor shall co-ordinate with the False Ceiling Sub-Contractor who will be responsible for
setting out the ceilings, and shall ensure luminaries and other ceiling mounted equipment are
correctly located.

BUILDER’S WORK
The expression Builder’s Work shall mean that work which will be carried out in connection with, or
consequent on the Electrical Services defined in this Specification unless stated otherwise indicated
in The Employer’s Requirements document and shall embrace the following:-

 The cutting and forming of holes for services through walls, floors, ceilings, partitions, roofs,
etc. and making good.

 The cutting or forming of chases, recesses, etc. in floors, walls, etc., for services and making
good.

 The building in where specified or indicated of brackets and holder fasts, ragbolts or other
form of services suspension, or plant fixing.

 Provision of sleeves and curbs for electrical services as necessary.

 The formation of concrete bases, plinths etc. for plant and equipment.

 The building of concrete and/or brick ducts, and trenches for buried mains.

 The building of manholes, pits, etc.

 The excavating of trenches for underground services etc. and the filling in after the services
are laid.

All Builders Work associated with the services installation as outlined above is deemed to be provided
by other Divisions unless stated in the scope of works for others.

Builders Work drawings shall be prepared by the MEP Contractor which co-ordinate and show all
Services Builders Work requirements. The drawings shall show in plan and elevation with sections
where necessary all holes, chases, inserts, equipment bases etc., necessary for the complete
Mechanical, Public Health and Electrical Installations. The drawing shall also include the overall
weight of all items of equipment and where necessary weight distribution of equipment.

Openings in structural concrete and brick walls have been notionally identified during the design. The
Contractor shall allow for checking that services can be installed in these openings and confirming
requirements to the Engineer prior to construction.

In general all holes through walls, floors etc. for services will be formed during construction. The
Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that builders work details are correctly dimensioned,
collated and coordinated to enable this work to be carried out at the proper stage of construction.
In addition, the marking out of, providing templates for, and supervising of all builders work required
shall be carried by the Contractor to meet the requirements of the Contract Programmed.

No additional costs as a result of errors in information supplied concerning builders work, will be

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 5/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

allowed and all costs arising from errors including incidental costs resulting from disruption to or
making good by, other trades etc., shall be included as part of this Contract.

Drilling and/or plugging of walls, floors, ceilings for heavyweight and lightweight fixings shall be
excluded from the meaning of builders work as far as is considered normal for the trade, and shall
therefore be included as part of this Contract. The Contractor shall also include for the provision of all
raw bolts and similar fixings. The type of fixing shall be approved by the Engineer before work
commences. The Contractor should note that the concrete used in the stair, floor slabs, central cores,
shear walls and columns is deemed to be high strength and due allowance should be made for this
when drilling fixings, etc.
On no account are holes to be cut in any steelwork, reinforced concrete, or precast concrete, without
the express permission in writing from the Engineer. Holes will not be cut in precast pre-stressed
concrete units under any circumstances.

Any holes in steelwork (that are approved) must be drilled; burning holes by means of welding
equipment will not be permitted unless by the Engineer’s special written approval.

Provide, locate and install conduit sleeves for cable runs and sleeves for bus bar trunking (bus duct),
sheet steel trunking and/or cable tray passing through concrete walls, beams, slabs and floors, in their
correct locations. Sleeves for cable runs shall be galvanized steel conduit. Sleeves for wire ways
and/or cable tray shall be made of 3mm galvanized steel.

Provide concrete curbs, minimum 100mm high above finished floor surrounding openings where bus
ducts, wire ways and cable trays rise through slabs above grade to prevent debris and water from
falling to floor below. Concrete curb shall have sufficient area to adequately carry bus duct support
brackets.

Provide concrete curbs, minimum 100mm high above finished floor for telephone cable risers and
other openings intended for electrical use in slabs above grade.

Extend galvanized sleeves for conduit rising through slabs 100mm minimum above finished floors.
Provide sleeves, passing through floors having a waterproof membrane, with an integral flashing
clamp.

APPROVAL OF DRAWINGS/INFORMATION
All drawings, schedules or other information provided by manufacturers, nominated suppliers or
specialist Contractors shall be approved by the Contractor and such approval shall ensure that all
requirements of the Contract documentation have been incorporated.
When this procedure has been completed, the Contractor shall forward two paper prints of the
approved drawings or two copies of the approved schedules or other information to the Engineer for
record purposes.
No order to a manufacturer, nominated supplier, or specialist
Subcontractor, to commence manufacture/installation shall be given until written acknowledgement of
receipt by the Engineer of the above information, has been received by the Contractor.
Any costs arising from failure to meet the above conditions shall be borne by the Contractor at no cost
to the Contract.
FINALIZED POSITION OF POINTS
It shall be noted that the positions of all points and equipment shown on the attached drawings are
approximate only and are for the guidance in the preparation of the tender.
The Contract shall include for the determination on site of the finalized position of all points and
equipment in collaboration with the Engineer. The Tender shall allow for the movement of all points
and equipment up to a radius of 2.0m from the positions shown on the attached drawings. No wall
mounted electrical point shall be installed back to back on a party wall that separates apartments. In
these areas, a horizontal separation of 600mm shall be provided.
Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 6/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Architectural and Interior Design drawings will be issued to the Contractor, and the positions of all
points, etc., shall be checked in relation to the positions shown on these drawings before any work is
commenced, the architectural drawings generally taking precedence. Report any discrepancies to the
Construction Manager for resolution.

The locations of switches, thermostats, outlets and control devices are shown diagrammatically only.
Mount switches, thermostats and other controls as close to door jambs and other openings as
possible, maintaining a minimum of 100mm from trims of doors except where installed in door frames
of metal partitions. Ensure that these locations meet with the approval of the Engineer. Check all
doors swings and install switches on correct side of doors as defined under Wiring Devices.

The Contractor will be held responsible for all alterations made necessary due to non-compliance with
the requirements of this clause.

TEST NOTICES
Allow for all formalities in connection with Test Notices, Agreement and Application for Supply Forms
etc. and that all such documents requiring the Employer’s signature are forwarded to the Engineer in
ample time.

Additional payments will not be made as are incurred due to reconnections, revisits etc., by Supply
Authorities or any other officials.

The Contractor shall operate a “Permit to Energize” system and no circuit shall be energized unless it
has been visually inspected, tested and signed off by the Engineer and the Contractor’s competent
Electrical Engineer.

BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
The Contract shall include the inspection of the Architectural, Interior Design and Structural drawings
by the Contractor as necessary to obtain more precise details regarding the construction and finishes
of the buildings.

INSTALLATION GENERAL

GENERAL
The Contractor shall allow in his Tender for all labour, materials, tools, plant and equipment required
to supply, deliver and erect all equipment, described in this Specification and indicated on the
drawings to form a complete working facility including tests and commissioning. This shall mean not
only the main items of plant and equipment but also all incidental sundry components with their labour
charges necessary for the complete execution of the works.

The Contractor shall ensure that his work is installed in the correct sequence.

The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all sections of the work and all materials are
compatible with one another. The Contractor shall check and ensure that all of the equipment and
works offered by him will fit into the space provided in the building(s) including the limited entry
through doorways and into ducts.
Before commencing work in a given area the Contractor shall verify that the conditions to undertake
the work are suitable. This shall entail a full health and safety check together with a physical check of
any previous works to ensure they are correct and within tolerance. Any problems shall be resolved
before work commences. The Contractor shall provide frequent reports to the Engineer to
demonstrate which phases are accessible to all trades and the above mentioned issues are resolved.

OPERATING CONDITIONS
All equipment will be required to operate successfully in the climatic conditions prevailing in the
locality. Equipment, even if normally operating in air conditioned spaces, may be required to operate

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 7/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

at times when the air conditioning system is not being used. Under such conditions all equipment
must operate satisfactorily and still have a working life comparable with that expected from top quality
equipment operating in more temperate conditions.

FOR CONDITIONS IN THE MIDDLE EAST

It is expected that the internal temperature in non-air conditioned rooms may reach 50 deg. C and it is
required that all equipment should be capable of operating at this temperature without breaking down,
although above 45 deg. C the performance may be reduced.

At the time that manufacturers drawings are submitted for approval or immediately prior to dispatch
from the manufacturers works, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a letter from the
manufacturer confirming that the equipment being supplied will be suitable for the conditions.

SPECIALIST CONTRACTORS
In the event of any specialist Contractors being employed for the design, installation, testing and
commissioning of specialized items or systems all allowances shall be made for informing Specialist
Contractors of all details of the Building structures, programming arrangements and other relevant
details at the time of Tender and during the course of the Contract.

The Specialist Contractors shall provide adequate supervision at all times work is being carried out.

The Contractor shall ensure that Specialist Contractors are aware of the requirements for, and
provide in accordance with the construction program, the specified installation and operating and
maintenance documentation.

The Contractor shall ensure that all works carried out by Specialist Contractors are physically
coordinated one with the other and with the General Contract Works, and that all builders work
requirements are allowed and coordinated in accordance with the Builders Work clause.

The Contractor shall include with his Tender a schedule of those specialist Contractors included by
him and the scope of works to be carried out by each specialist.

MANUFACTURERS
In order to achieve uniformity in the equipment supplied and to simplify the acquisition and storage of
spare parts, the Contractor shall, as far as possible, purchase similar equipment from the same
manufacturer.

The Contractor may at the Engineers discretion install the same equipment from more than one
manufacturer if due to the volume of equipment to be supplied a single manufacturer cannot provide
the total requirement in the time allotted in the construction program. In this case the Contractor shall
first obtain the Engineers written approval of his proposals before placing orders.
“Manufacturers shall be selected from the list of Approved Manufacturers”. If the Contractor wishes to
propose an alternative Manufacturer then he may do so providing the product is equal or superior to
that as the list of Manufacturers. The Engineer has no obligation to accept alternatives and alternative
will only be considered if there is a saving for the Employer.
Descriptions of the manufactured items of plant and equipment and/or standards are also included in
the attached Specifications to further indicate the quality and type of equipment required.

Subject to the conditions imposed under the Employer’s Requirements the Contractor may include in
his Tender for alternative equipment and standards to those described in the Schedules, provided
such equipment and standards can be illustrated as being of an equivalent standard or manufacturer
to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer.

Should the Contractor include for alternatives in his Tender, he shall provide outline details of such
Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 8/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

alternatives at the time of tendering and in addition, provide full supporting information, including
manufacturers technical details and illustrations etc., to the Engineer or his approval within 14 days of
being so requested.

The Contractor should also ensure that all equipment is either available locally or that the
manufacturer is represented adequately in Dubai (and spares are stocked) to ensure the equipment is
easily available and future servicing and spares can be obtained to permit continuity of maintenance.

All equipment whether base or substitute must fit into the space allocated. The cost of all additional
work or adjustments resulting from the acceptance of alternative equipment shall be borne by the
Contractor.

In the event that the Engineer considers any alternative, for whatever reason, to be unacceptable, the
Contractor must include for the equipment indicated.

ACCESS FOR MAINTENANCE

The Contractor shall ensure that all plant and equipment is easily accessible by maintenance staff
and adequate space allowed for maintenance and replacement of plant. Full standing headroom is
required over the maximum possible area with easy safe access free from obstruction given to all
equipment and instruments required for normal operation. All escape routes shall have a clear floor
space with full standing headroom.

ACCESS DOORS/PANELS
Wherever any item of electrical equipment requiring accessibility, maintenance or adjustments is
concealed, ensure adequate access, or provide an access door and arrange for its installation by the
Contractor in whose work it occurs.

Doors shall be sized to allow proper and easy access, and located to suit the concealed device. In
removable acoustic panel ceilings, no access doors are required. Use authority labeled fire-rated
access doors in all fire rated walls and ceilings which act as fire barriers and match the door type with
the ceiling type and applied finish.

Submit for the Engineers review, floor plans and shop drawings showing the size, type and exact
location of all access doors.
All access doors shall be shown on the record drawings. Notations, adjacent to each access door
shown on the drawings, shall indicate frequency of maintenance required for item or items above or
behind the doors.

PROVISION FOR HANDLING MAJOR PLANT

Suitable provisions by means of eyebolts or other methods approved by the Engineer shall be made
to facilitate handling all plant covered by this Specification. Each screwed eyebolt shall be provided
with a collar firmly bedded down on a faced seating.

HANGERS, INSERTS SLEEVES, SUPPORTS & FOUNDATION BOLTS

Provide hangers, inserts, sleeves and supports required to accommodate the equipment and
materials of this Division.

Except for plywood backboards, do not use wood to fasten outlet boxes or electrical equipment,
except where wood forms a part of the building structure at the point of installation.

Metal supports, screws, bolts and hardware shall be galvanized.

Apply cold galvanizing compound on all newly cut ferrous metal surface immediately after cutting.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 9/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Provide separate supports as required for electrical apparatus erected on or in any wall or partition.
All such supporting work shall be approved by the Engineer prior to installation.

The Contractor shall supply to approve dimensions all necessary foundation bolts, nuts, plates and
frames for the whole equipment covered by this Specification.

The Contractor shall be responsible for aligning and leveling up each item of equipment supplied
under this Contract using steel shims as necessary, and for placing the holding down bolts in the
correct position.

WORKMANSHIP & MATERIALS

Materials and workmanship generally shall be of the highest standard and the Specification shall be
closely adhered to.

Where materials or equipment are not described in detail they shall be of the best quality available
and shall comply with the appropriate BS. The Contractor shall, if required, submit drawings or
samples of such materials or equipment to the Engineer for his approval before use on the Contract
works.

SAMPLES
The Contract shall include for providing samples of the items of equipment and finishes as required
for the Engineers approval. These shall include but not be limited to the following:

 Luminaries
 Accessory cover plates including white plastic, metal clad and special finish type
 Name plates
 Access doors and panels
 Fire Alarm, Detector + Voice alarm accessories
 Labels
 Distribution boards (complete with breakers)
 Door access accessories

The samples shall be submitted to the Engineer as soon as possible after the order for the work has
been placed so that the subsequent delivery of the associated equipment will not be delayed. No
orders shall be placed until the Engineer has approved the samples.

All samples shall be correctly labeled and forwarded to the Engineers office or to the site as directed
by the Engineer. At least 14 working days shall be allowed for approval of samples by the Engineer.

Unless otherwise stated, approved samples shall be retained on site by the Engineer, who will reject
all such materials which do not correspond with the approved samples. Rejected materials shall be
removed from the site immediately.

Where the Engineer has carried out an inspection of materials before they leave the manufacturers
premises prior to being delivered to the site, the Engineer shall be at liberty to reject any such material
after delivery should he consider them to be in any way unsatisfactory notwithstanding the preliminary
inspection and tests at the manufacturers premises.

The Contractor shall include for the cost of remedial work or tests and inspections necessary due to
unsatisfactory material and/or equipment.

DISSIMILAR METALS
The Contractor shall take every precaution to ensure that no chemical or electrolytic action takes
place where dissimilar metals and/or materials are used together. This is of particular importance
where aluminum and aluminum alloys are one of the surfaces.

The Contractor shall keep the points of contact of dissimilar metals to a minimum.
Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 10/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

PROTECTION OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

In addition to requirements indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents, insofar as protection is
concerned (i.e. protection of the whole of the installation during storage and during execution of the
works) the protection of all items of plant, specialist equipment and machinery primer from damage by
other trades on site and from frost or other weather conditions up to the time the building is handed
over shall be included as part of this tender, such protection being to the following minimum
standards:

In the case of factory finished cubicle type equipment, all top and side edges shall be protected with
timber battens forming angle sections with industrial felt packing between the timber and the plant.
These protective angles shall be cross braced with further timber battens to form an open crate with
additional protection over any particular fragile section i.e. instruments, mimic panels etc. The top
surface of any such crate exceeding 0.30m 2 shall be completely boarded in. In addition a strong
transparent plastic sheet or bag of not less than 500 gauge thickness shall be arranged over or under
the protective timber to provide a dust and damp proof membrane.

In the case of electrical control panels and like equipment, allow for the provision and maintenance of
temporary internal electrical heaters and for the cost of electricity and wiring thereto, in circumstances
where the Engineer considers that such equipment would otherwise deteriorate due to damp
conditions prior to handing over.

Electric motors, starters, switchboards and the like shall be enclosed in a plastic sheet or bag, as
described above. All stainless steel equipment shall be covered with a P.V.C. wrapper until
handover. All ferrous parts shall be coated with grease.

When necessary to remove or partly remove the protection for installation, or making connections to
the plant, allow for replacing protection to the standard specified under this heading, immediately the
said operation is completed.

Allow for providing dust sheets as and where required. All parts of the plant which are liable to rust
shall be covered with tallow for protection during the progress of the work. Upon completion this
tallow shall be cleaned off and the parts polished. Accessory plates shall be protected up to the time
of handover by a suitable P.V.C. envelope.

PAINTING, PROTECTION, PREPARATION FOR PAINTING & CLEANING ON COMPLETION

All un-galvanized ferrous materials not plated shall be supplied free from rust and scale, and be
dipped or otherwise coated with a protective priming paint of a type suitable for receiving the finishing
protective or decorative paint.

All un-galvanized steel parts fabricated by the Contractor, e.g. brackets and supports, suspension
supports, flanges, screwed joints, steelwork, etc., shall be thoroughly cleaned removing all rust,
grease, oil, dirt and surface corrosion using wire brush, emery paper and degreasing media as
required after fabrication. It shall then be painted one coat of either zinc phosphate, zinc chromate or
calcium plum ate with a further coat after erection.

Where the protective paint coating has been damaged or the surfaces show signs of rust the affected
areas shall be cleaned as above prior to repainting, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Galvanized surfaces shall be inspected and the galvanizing protection repaired where damaged using
a suitable zinc paint process.

All exposed metalwork within plant rooms, tank rooms, service subways and other similar plant areas
shall be painted after preparation as detailed above with undercoats and finishing coat of a color to be
agreed with the Engineer. In all cases the actual grade of paint to be used shall be suitable for the
surface operating temperature and approved by the manufacturer as being correct for the application
concerned.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 11/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

The paint manufacturer to be used shall be approved by the Engineer.

All painting shall be carried out by skilled tradesmen.

At the completion of the Contract Works all parts of the installation shall be thoroughly cleaned. All
equipment, panels etc. shall be cleaned of all grease, dirt, metal cuttings, etc., which may have
accumulated. Any discoloration or other damage to parts of the building or its finish or furnishing due
to the failure of the Contractor to properly clean the equipment shall be the liability of the Contractor
with the necessary remedial works instructed by the Engineer.
If, on final inspection before handover, cleaning has not been carried out to the satisfaction of the
Engineer, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, clean the plant again. If, on handover, the plant is
found to be in an unclean state, the Engineer may clean or have cleaned any plant, the cost of which
shall be borne by the Contractor.

CONCEALED WORK
No work shall be concealed until inspected and tested in the presence of the Engineer and 7 days
notice shall be given to the Engineer in writing.

EXISTING SERVICES TO BE MAINTAINED

All existing services (including gas, water, electricity, soil, wastes, and rainwater) to any existing
premises are to be fully maintained during the progress of the works and additional work and
materials to maintain flow at all times is to be included in this tender and if necessary to provide any
temporary diversions and supports for the same before any operations are commenced.

All existing services disturbed by the works are to be fully reinstated in accordance with the quality
defined in the specification. Allow for making all connections to existing services out of normal
working hours where required.

ENGRAVING
The Contract shall include for engraving to switch plates, or other special plates in connection with
special lighting, night lighting, clock system and fire alarm installations etc., as detailed on the
attached drawing and/or Specification Section.

For tender purposes, all engraving shall be in a minimum of two languages, Arabic and English in
Health / Safety labels. All other labels shall be in English.

SCREWS
The screws used for fixing accessory cover plates shall be of the dome slotted raised head
countersunk type, finished to match the respective plates where metallic plates are used.

EARTHING
This Contract shall include for the installation of all earthing and bonding together of all exposed
conductive parts, equi-potential and supplementary bonding in accordance with BS7671 (IEE wiring
regulations), BS7430, Electricity Supply Regulation, and Local Electricity Supply Authority
Requirements.
All joints in networks shall be kept to an absolute minimum and have negligible impedance.

Clamps, lugs or tags are to be provided to enable connection of bonding conductors to equipment
earthing terminals/metallic service to be bonded.

PROTECTIVE CABLE TERMINATIONS: For bolted connections use crimp type lugs compressed by
automatic tool to achieve correct pressure and crimp depth. Make connections between tape and
equipment using high tensile grade brass bolts with brass nuts, washers and locking devices. Use
phosphor bronze bolts, nuts and washers where connections are liable to corrosion.
Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 12/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR WARNING NOTICES/LABELS: Provide a permanent label durably

marked in letters 4.75mm minimum height SAFETY ELECTRICAL CONNECTION - DO NOT
REMOVE, in visible position, at each bonding conductor connection to extraneous conductive parts.

Earth conductors shall be sized in accordance with the tables given in BS7671.

INSPECTION, TESTING & COMMISSIONING

GENERAL
All the works provided as part of this Contract shall be inspected, tested, set to work and
commissioned in accordance with the current Local Authority requirements, DEWA Standards,
BS7671, British Standards and as stipulated by equipment suppliers.

No inspection or testing by the Engineer nor the witnessing of satisfactory tests nor the authorizing of
dispatch to site shall in any way relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations under this Contract,
nor shall it in any way limit the right of the Engineer to reject such items after delivery to site if they
subsequently prove to be defective or unsatisfactory or unsuitable for their intended purpose.
When the Contractor has ordered equipment from a manufacturer who, in turn, has bought-in major
components from a secondary supplier, the Engineer shall have the right to elect to inspect such
components at the Works of the secondary supplier, and the Contractors shall ensure, when placing
his orders, that such rights are secured. For the purpose of this clause, inter-departmental orders
within the same organization shall be treated in the same manner as orders involving separate
organizations.

The Engineer shall have the right to waive, at his sole discretion, the requirements relating to his
inspection of materials, apparatus, and equipment at the makers' works. The exercise by the
Engineer of this right shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his obligation to carry out the
prescribed tests and to submit test certificates.
No work shall be painted or otherwise prepared for dispatch until it has been inspected by the
Engineer, or inspection has been waived and dispatch has been authorized.

When one or more of the Contractors purchase orders covers the supply of a number of like
components or items of equipment, the Engineer shall have the right to require that one item or
component of each type and rating be subjected to type tests as described in the relevant National
Standard. Other similar items may then be subjected only to routine tests.

SITE TESTS
The Contractor shall include in the Contract to carry out all necessary checks and tests to prove that
the completed installations fully comply with specified requirements. This shall include the cost for all
specialist manufacturers, suppliers and sub-Contractors where used on the project.

Upon completion of the electrical installation, or any substantial section thereof, the installation or that
section and all of the associated electrical equipment shall be subjected to the tests specified in the
relevant National Standards and in BS.7671 (IEE Wiring Regulations), and all other relevant
standards together with such other tests as may be specified in order to prove compliance with this
specification.
All of the required checks and tests shall be carried out in accordance with a programme to be agreed
with the Engineer, and facilities shall be made available for the Engineer to be present at all such
checks and tests if he so desires.

Artificial lighting tests of lumen levels shall be scheduled out, indicating average and minimum lux
levels achieved in the working place once wall and floor finishes have been applied (for reflectance’s).

Emergency lighting levels shall also be tested and scheduled out in a similar manner (to BS.5266).

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 13/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

The Contractor shall include for the cost of any repair or replacement of faulty systems or equipments,
which do not function correctly or fail any of the test procedures.

WORKS TESTS
The Contractor shall inspect and test at the makers works, during manufacture and after completion,
all or any particular manufactured material, apparatus or equipment meets the requirements of this
specification and shall notify the Engineer in advance of all such inspections and tests.

Upon completion of manufacture, or before dispatch in the case of stock items, all material, apparatus
and equipment intended for incorporation in the Works shall be subject to the tests specified in the
relevant National Standard or elsewhere in this specification together with such additional tests as
may be required in order to prove compliance with this specification. When no relevant British
Standard exists, or the appropriate National Standard fails to specify tests, the Contractor shall submit
his proposals for the tests to be employed to provide compliance with the specification.
The results of each and every test carried out in accordance with the provisions of this specification
shall be accurately and comprehensively recorded on a form of test certificate signed by the person-
in-charge of the testing procedure and countersigned by the Contractor and four copies of every such
test certificate shall be submitted to the Engineer.

Every test certificate shall include, in addition to all other requirements the date and time of the test,
and ambient conditions, a fully detailed description of the test(s) carried out, the results obtained, and
any relevant performance curves.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the Engineer is advised in writing whenever
material, apparatus or equipment is ready for inspection or test at his own or his suppliers’ premises.
At least seven days notice shall be given, and due allowance shall be made for this period of notice in
drawing up the programme of works.

In cases where the manufacturer or supplier of material, apparatus or equipment relies upon type
tests to prove, either wholly or in part, the suitability of his product(s), the Contractor shall arrange for
triplicate copies of certificates giving the results of such type tests to be submitted to the Engineer at
the time the order is placed.

No material, apparatus or equipment, from whatever source, shall be dispatched to site until the
Engineer has had the opportunity to inspect it or has given written authorization for dispatch.
Tests not carried out in the presence of the Engineer shall not be regarded as valid for the purpose of
the Contract, unless the Engineer shall have authorized the Contractor to proceed with the testing
process in his absence.
Every test certificate shall include, in addition to all other requirements, the date and time of the test,
the ambient conditions, a fully detailed description of the test(s) carried out, the results obtained, and
any relevant performance curves including test equipment calibration date and instrument make, type
and serial number.

No material, apparatus, equipment, or installation shall be covered or otherwise permanently

concealed from view until the Engineer has had the opportunity to inspect it, or given written
authorization for covering to proceed.
No work shall have a final paint finish until it has been inspected by the Engineer or painting has been
authorized, unless the final pain finish is necessary to provide the necessary climatic protection.

No apparatus, equipment, plant, or installations will be recognized as complete until all of the
specified inspections and tests have been satisfactorily carried out.
The Engineer shall have the right to waive, at his sole discretion, the requirements relating to his
inspection of materials, apparatus equipment and installations and the witnessing of tests therein.
The exercise by the Engineer of this right shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his obligations
to carry out the prescribed tests and to submit test certificates.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 14/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

COMMISSIONING
Following the satisfactory conclusion of inspections and tests on completed sections of the Works, the
Contractor shall duly commission each section of the electrical installation and leave it in full working
order. The term Commissioning shall be deemed to include:

1) The energising of electrical distribution circuits and equipments, which have previously been
inspected, tested, found to be satisfactory and capable of being energised with complete safety.

2) The setting of electrical protective devices and systems, where relevant, in accordance with the
directions of the Engineer or, failing such directions, in accordance with sound electrical
engineering practice.

3) The starting up of all electrically powered plant and equipment, including that supplied and
installed under other Contracts, as detailed in the annexed schedules.

4) The verification of the performance of all such plant and equipment by the carrying out, where
required, of further tests and the making of all necessary adjustments so as to obtain optimum
performance.

Compliance with the requirements of this section of the specification shall not, by itself, in any way
relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations under the Contract.

The Contractor shall ensure that all connections and adjustments are made correctly, and that the
installations and equipment are in completely safe and satisfactory condition.

All activities carried out by the Contractor in pursuance of the requirements of this section of the
specification shall be carried out, or continuously supervised, by a competent and experienced
commissioning engineer.

The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for ensuring that all switching operations and all work on
electrical circuits and equipment which have once been energized are carried out in a thoroughly safe
manner and shall operate, and rigidly adhere to, an approved permit-to-work system. For this
purpose, the Contractor shall appoint an authorized person as defined in the Electricity (Factories Act)
Special Regulations, and shall communicate the name of such person in writing to the Engineer.

In appropriate cases the Contractor shall nominate particular employee(s) as Switchgear Operator,
and shall ensure that all switchgear operations are carried out by the nominated person(s) and that
such person(s) are always available for this duty when required.
The Contractor shall prepare a commissioning schedule detailing the plant to be commissioned, the
operations to be carried out, the time scale, with exact dates for specific operations, details of
requirements for water and power services and attendance or provisions by others. This
commissioning schedule, in draft form, shall be submitted not less than four weeks in advance of the
date on which commissioning is to commence.

If required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall present the information from the commissioning
schedule in the form of a flow diagram or Critical Path chart.
The procedures to be followed by the Contractor for commissioning the electrical equipment and
installations shall be as directed by the Engineer or, in the absence of such directions, shall be
proposed by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer for approval.

No connection or adjustments shall be made to plant or equipment which has already been
commissioned and set to work, except with the prior consent of the Engineer.

No plant or equipment shall be charged, energized or operated without the prior agreement of the
Engineer. All applicable test certificates shall have been first submitted to the Engineer.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 15/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

All commissioning procedures shall be carried out in a safe and satisfactory manner and in
accordance with the provisions of the Factory Acts, the Health and Safety at Work, etc. Act the
Electricity Regulations and any relevant requirements of the local authority.
Following completion of commissioning, each item of equipment or, where several items of equipment
are interdependent, the complete plant shall operate continuously and satisfactorily under normal
operating conditions for a period of 72 hours without defect of any kind. In the event of any defect or
mal-operation becoming apparent during this period the Contractor shall forthwith determine the
cause and rectify it by means of repair, replacement, adjustment or modification and the reliability run
shall be re-commenced. All materials, equipment and labour required to locate and rectify any such
defect shall be provided by the Contractor at his own expense.

No plant, equipment or installation will be considered as complete until the prescribed commissioning
procedures have been satisfactorily carried out and the reliability run has been completed without
untoward incident.

The Engineer shall have power to require that the whole of the plant, equipment and installations, or
selected parts thereof, be re-inspected and, if necessary, re-tested immediately before the end of the
Contractual maintenance period, and the Contractor shall be responsible for making all necessary
arrangements with the Employer.
TESTING OF ELECTRICAL POWER INSTALLATION
Earth continuity tests on conduit and trunking shall be checked and confirmed prior to commencing
wiring.

Tests should be carried out in accordance with Part 7 of BS 7671 together with Guidance Notes,
number 3 as issued by the IEE, and should also include the following:
 Conductive parts - test conductive parts simultaneously accessible with exposed conductive
parts of extraneous conductive paths.
 Generally conductive paths are not extraneous conductive paths if separate from earth by an
impedance of greater than 50M ohms. Confirm conductive paths are bonded to equi-potential
zone earth bar by an impedance not exceeding 0.1 ohms.
 Prospective short circuit current (IP) - To determine suitability of terminal and intermediate
equipment the values of IP should be measured (unless these can be verified by alternative
means).
 Pressure tests (see below)
 Load tests to be carried out by the Engineers instruction.

During the full load test voltage and current readings at the final sub-circuit, sub-main and main intake
positions shall be taken. This test shall be carried out at the completion of works and again (at the
discretion of the Engineer) at the end of defects period.

In the event of any test failing to comply, that test and those proceeding (the results which may have
been influenced by the fault) shall be repeated after rectification of the report.
The Contractor shall include for the supply all test instruments and labour required to complete the
testing and commissioning works. Tests shall only be carried out by competent persons.

The Engineer shall be given at least seven working days notice in writing of the time when it is
proposed to carry out any test to enable him to be present during the test(s) if required.

Serial numbers of all test instruments shall be logged and noted on results sheets. All instruments
shall have a current calibration certificate.
Duplicate typewritten copies of the completed test reports shall be forwarded to the Engineer within
seven days of the date when the tests are carried out.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 16/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

The test certificate shall clearly state the following:

 Serial number of test instrument use

 Apparatus or Section under test
 Makers name, if any, or equipment installed
 Nature, duration and conditions of test
 Results of test
 Any particulars required to comply with IEE Regulations etc, together with particulars
requested elsewhere in the specification
 Name of personnel involved in test
 Date of test

No test shall be valid until the test certificates are provided.

TESTING INSTRUMENTS
The Contractor shall submit with his Tender a full list of instruments, together with relevant standards,
which he intends to use in the testing of the works. The Contractor shall include the full cost of
regular calibration test to be carried out on all instruments used and the cost of any necessary
recalibration. Certified documentation confirming current certificate calibration shall be available for
examination by the Engineer at all times. Instruments not supported by up-to-date calibration
certificates shall not be used and must be removed from site immediately by the Contractor.

All instruments necessary to conducting the test shall be provided by the Contractor including the
following minimum range:

 RCD Test Unit (240V primary with 45V secondary)

 Earth continuity tester
 Clip-on ammeter (all ranges)
 Earth loop impedance tester
 Polarity tester
 Megger test - 500 volts, 1000 volts.
 Phase sequence tester
 Sound meter
 Primary and secondary injection testers(factory test).
 Earth bridge megger
 Continuity tester
 Prospective short circuit current test unit
 IR thermometer to surface temperature measurements

Test instruments shall not be of the stop go type, but must indicate the impedance value etc directly in
ohms with means of measuring the correction for voltage variations.
TESTING
As soon as is practicable after the completion of installation and jointing of the cables specified
herein, or of any usable group of such cables, the Contractor shall carry out the tests described
below, together with such other tests and measurements to prove compliance with this specification
and with the requirements of the IEE Wiring Regulations.

An insulation resistance test, carried out with a Megger insulation tester or other similar type of testing
instrument, to measure the insulation resistance between each conductor and the remaining
conductors and between each conductor and the metallic sheath, if any and armoring metallic body.
The test voltage to be applied shall be as follows:
Low Voltage Cables - 500 Volts

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 17/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

The above test shall be carried out both before and after any voltage tests and the insulation
resistance shall not be less than the figures in BS.6346, Table 3, for all cables up to 3.3 kV.

Mineral insulated cables shall be subjected, on completion of installation and jointing, to a voltage test
in accordance with BS.6207: Part 1, Appendix C, for copper sheathed cables. The test voltage shall
have a value tabulated in the appropriate Appendix, and shall be applied for 30 seconds.

An earth continuity test shall be carried out to verify that the cable armouring and metal sheath, if any,
have been properly bonded to earth.

Phase-rotation and phase-correspondence shall be tested to prove that the cables have been
correctly connected.

Phase-rotation and phase-correspondence shall be tested to prove that switchgears/bus bars have
been correctly connected.

PRESSURE TESTING OF LV CABLES

At the Engineers discretion Pressure tests shall be carried out on all armoured cables of 25mm sq
and above with lengths exceeding 5 meters. The tests shall be made with isolators and switches in
the open position and under competent supervision to ensure the non-occurrence of accident to
persons, installation or building.

The Tenderer shall include for the application of a DC test voltage which is gradually increased to the
full value and maintained for 5 minutes between conductors and between each conductor and
armouring, the voltage to be in accordance with the following tables:

D.C. TEST VOLTAGE

CABLE VOLTAGE BETWEEN BETWEEN EACH

DESIGNATION CONDUCTORS CONDUCTOR & SHEATH

600/ 1,000 3,500 3,500

The Contractor shall prepare and submit with his tender a schedule of recommended test equipment
suitable for technician grade maintenance staff to assess whether the commissioned standards are
being maintained.

Notwithstanding the above, the tenderer shall include for simulation of fault conditions in the
installation to ensure that all alarms, controls, indicators and safety devices operate correctly and
subsequent re-setting to the correct operating conditions.
In addition, the simulation of fault conditions in the normal electricity supply system to ensure that the
emergency supply changeover contactors, sensing circuits, phase failure relays, timers etc operate
correctly and the subsequent re-setting of the network to the correct operating conditions shall also be
included.
Test equipment shall be provided with an insulated and shrouded probe with flexible lead for testing
metalwork such as switch plates, roof supports, trusses etc.

ADDITIONAL MISCELLANEOUS CHECK/TEST REQUIREMENTS TO BE VERIFIED BY THE

CONTRACTOR DURING THE INSTALLATION
The whole of the work shall be continuously checked throughout the installation period to ensure
complete safety and compliance with the specification.

Switchgear shall be checked for correct labeling, complete circuit schedules and satisfactory
operation by hand. Interlocking facilities shall also be checked for correct operation.
Clearances around switchgear for operation and maintenance shall be checked for adequacy.
Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 18/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Distribution board labels shall be checked for correctness and completion. Fuse ratings to be verified
against circuit schedules and specification. MCB boards to be checked for satisfactory operation by
hand.

The radius of all cable bends shall be checked as shall the provision of mechanical protection and
cable shrouds.

Cable trenches shall be checked for dimensions and spacing between services, the provision of
earthenware ducts, cable tiles, identification tapes and route markers.

All switches and control arrangements to be checked against drawings and for operation.

Labeling and engraving to be checked for compliance with drawings and specification.

Luminaries shall be inspected for operation and correct color and rating of lamps.

Sockets and fused spur units shall be checked to ensure:

 Compatibility with specification and drawings

 Labelling and engraving is in accordance with the specification and drawings.

Three phase power outlets shall be checked to ensure:

 Provision is in accordance with specification and drawings.

 Labelling and engraving is in accordance with the specification and drawings.

The test procedure shall also incorporate a visual inspection of the installation including equipment,
subways, walkways, crawl-ways, and false ceilings where accessible, together with the items
scheduled in BS 7671.

On completion and if necessary at the end of the defects liability period, the installation shall be
inspected by the Engineer for compliance with the Specification.

On completion of the tests and inspection the Contractor shall submit duplicate copies of the
certificates as described in Appendix 6 of BS 7671.

When carrying out work, on, or extension to an existing system the Contract shall report any defect
observed in the existing system.

TESTING OF SPECIALIST EQUIPMENT/SYSTEMS

The Contractor shall be responsible for submitting tests and commissioning proposals for the
Engineers approval/comment for all specialist equipment and system supplied under the Contract.

This shall include such items as recording sound level of fire and voice alarms etc.
During any such test all safety devices should be tested and faults simulated on the system.

In addition to the above the tenderer shall include for tests on the wiring/cabling for such services as
Fire and Voice Alarms, Intercommunication systems, General Alarms, TV and Radio Systems to be
made prior to the terminal equipment being connected but with the cable terminations completed, in
order to preclude damage to the terminal equipment and to obviate any adverse effects on the test
results.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 19/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

HANDOVER PROCEDURES & DOCUMENTATION

OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION

Conform to the requirements of The Employer’s Requirement in addition to those of this section.

To ensure that the building users’ staff retain a permanent record of the installation, the Contract shall
include for editing, printing, binding and producing operation and maintenance manuals to the
approval of the Engineer.

Prior to printing, three draft copies of each booklet shall be submitted for the Engineers approval, one
month prior to the Contract completion. The Engineer reserves the right to modify the draft copies
prior to printing without incurring additional cost to the tender price.

The manuals should be written in such a manner to convey precise information to enable that
individual installation to be satisfactorily operated and maintained by trained personnel. Completed
manuals shall be of a standard and finish equal to this specification with durable binders and properly
printed covers. The manuals shall have a comprehensive index and be compiled into sections in ring
binders for each system of the installation, i.e. L.V. Switchgear, fire alarms, etc. and include the
following:

 Familiarise and description section outlining overall philosophy of project/system.

 Method of operation, including procedures to initiate emergency shutdown and re-start the
system.
 Maintenance schedules broken down into periodic routines i.e. daily, weekly, monthly etc.
 Fault finding, routines and emergency procedures (including telephone numbers).
 Manufacturers’ catalogues as relevant to this installation, general catalogues not acceptable.
 List of relevant as installed drawings.
 Reduced scale schematics and wiring diagrams.
 Manufacturers’ drawings.
 Schedules of equipment, to include luminaries/lamp type etc.
 Manufacturers test certificates and warranties.
 Manufacturers recommended spare parts, together with manufacturer/supplier, reference
numbers, contact address/telephone number.
 Commissioning test results.

The manual should contain all necessary warnings to ensure the health and safety of the general
public together with operating and maintenance staff.

INSTRUCTION OF EMPLOYER STAFF

The Employer’s Staff shall be instructed in the operation and maintenance of all aspects of the plant.
The instruction shall be carried out by qualified personnel who shall be fully conversant with the
project. Where necessary, specialist Sub-Contractors’ staff shall be made available to enable these
instructions to be complete.

STARTING UP
Provide services of skilled technician(s) for a minimum of two consecutive full months, to start in its
proper sequence, and to thoroughly explain the operation and maintenance of each system provided
to the full satisfaction of Employer or his representative. In addition, provide specialized instructions
by the respective manufacturers as described under the appropriate clauses of this specification.
Arrange with the Employer the most suitable time for instructions to their operating and maintenance
personnel. Keep a record of dates and durations of each instruction period together with the name(s)
of person(s) to whom the instructions were given. Submit one signed copy of such record.
Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 20/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

TEMPORARY & TRIAL USAGE

Temporary and trial usage by Employer of any mechanical or electrical device, machinery, apparatus,
equipment or any other work or materials supplied before final completion and written acceptance
shall not be construed as evidence of acceptance of same by the Employer.

The Employer shall have the privilege of such temporary and trial usage, as soon as Contractor shall
claim that said work is completed and in accordance with Drawings and Specifications, for such
reasonable length of time as is deemed to be sufficient for making a complete and thorough test of
same. Claims for damage shall not be made by Contractor for the injury to or breaking of any parts of
such work which may be used, whether caused by weakness or inaccuracy of structural parts or by
effective materials or workmanship of any kind whatsoever.

SCHEDULE OF OUTSTANDING ITEMS AND DEFECTS

Until the installation is finally taken over as complete the Contractor shall be responsible for any
necessary protection and maintenance of the installation.

On completion of the Contract an inspection of the installation will be made by the Engineer, during
which a schedule of outstanding items will be prepared.

All items included in this schedule shall be attended to within fourteen days of the date of the
inspection.

RECORD DRAWINGS (FINAL OR AS BUILT OR AS INSTALLED DRAWINGS BY CONTRACTOR)

Conform to the requirements of The Employer’s Requirements, in addition to those of this section.

Within one month before completion of the works, the Contract shall include for the provision of
preliminary copies of drawings fully illustrated the work as actually installed to the scales given below.

The drawings shall comprise plans and such sections as the Engineer may consider necessary to
show all required information clearly and accurately to enable satisfactory maintenance and
installation extensions to be effected in the future.
The drawings shall clearly indicate the accurate location, size, materials and services installed,
together with cable, conduit and trunking runs including joint boxes.

In addition, detailed drawings shall be provided for all fixed plant, including alternators, transformers,
switchgear etc., as applicable.

The drawings to be provided are as follows:

 Mains and Distribution  The drawing shall be to 1:100

scale or the scale of the
 Lighting and General Purpose Power Engineer’s drawings for these
Installation services whichever is the
 Ancillary Services Installation greater.

 Schematic Diagrams of Complete  Site plan with outside lighting

Installation and all buried cable routes to
1:200 scale.
 Wiring Diagrams for all Control Panels
L.V. Switch Gear and Fire/Voice, Alarm,
Security etc.

Two paper prints of these drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for comment before the final
copies are produced and issued.

A spare set of working drawing prints shall be kept on site in order that all conduit runs, positions of
Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 21/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

points, etc., can be checked by the Engineer at any time to ensure that an accurate and
comprehensive record is maintained of the installation at all times.

Finally the following copies of the As Installed Record Drawings shall be provided by the Contractor
for issue to the Employer:

 Three paper prints of each drawing

 Auto Cad 2006 versions on a compact disk (CD)

Paper prints of manufacturers final working drawings of items of plant and equipment shall be
included with the manufacturers’ literature in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

It shall be especially noted that the Employer will not accept handover of the installation until full
information concerning the installation is in the possession of his operation and maintenance staff and
therefore a Taking Over Certificate will not be issued until the Contractor has supplied all the
information.
The final copies of the record drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer within one month of the
completion of the works.
The Contract shall include all associated costs for providing the Record Drawings. The Final
Certificate will not be issued until the drawings are received and are to the reasonable satisfaction of
the Engineer.
The Engineers comments on the presentation of the record drawings shall not relieve the Tenderer of
his obligation for the accuracy of the draft print and the final computer generated copies. It shall be
especially noted that, as a result of the Provisions of the Health and Safety at Work Act, the Employer
will not accept handover of the installation until full information concerning the installation is in the
possession of his operational and maintenance staff and therefore the Certificate of Practical
Completion cannot be issued until the Record Drawings are available.

CERTIFICATE OF PRACTICAL COMPLETION

When the Contractor has demonstrated to the Engineer and to the Engineers complete satisfaction
that the works are operating as intended within the design limits and tolerances of the manufactured
items, then the Engineer will issue a certificate of taking over, subject to the clearance of any
outstanding items or defects within 14 days of the date of the Certificate and the responsibility for the
operation of the plant will pass from the Contractor to the Employer or as otherwise agreed with the
Engineer.

This Certificate will not be authorized until all items in this clause have been cleared to the Engineers
satisfaction.

CERTIFICATE OF MAKING GOOD DEFECTS

The Contractor shall carry out a thorough detailed examination of the installations between the
eleventh and twelfth month of the defects liability period and shall put right any outstanding works or
defects that might have occurred under the Defects Liability Period in the Conditions of Contract.
On completion of such works, and agreement that the requirements of the Conditions of Contract and
Specification have been met, the Engineer will authorize a Certificate of Making Good Defects

MAINTENANCE AND GUARANTEE

The contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of all systems at his own expense for
duration of one year starting from the date of issue of the completion certificate. Maintenance shall
include replacement of parts or whole equipment that shows any manufacturing or installation defects
during operation.

The contractor shall guarantee every piece of equipment from any manufacturing or installation
defects for a period of two years, starting from the date of issue of the completion certificate.
Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 22/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

The contractor shall provide a plant preventive maintenance (PPM) schedule.

WARRANTY

The contractor shall provide appropriate warranties, where applicable in identifying the Employer
against the failure of supplied goods/ equipment within the prescribed period.

The warranty details shall be displayed on all goods equipment. These details shall include:

 Warranty start and end date

 Suppliers contact phone numbers
 Local service center

The warranty details shall be engraved on appropriate brass plates and shall be affixed to the relevant
goods/ equipment

END OF SUB-SECTION

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 23/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

SUB-SECTION 17020
MOTORS & STARTERS

1.0 GENERAL

The Contractor shall supply and install the motors and the starters under other sections when so
mentioned, as shown on the Drawings and as herein specified.

Motor starting method and corresponding furnished starter shall be concordant.

2.0 RATING OF MOTORS

Motors shall be suitable for operation on 220-240 volt single phase or 380-420 volt 3-phase, 3-wire,
50 Hz system and shall be drip-proof fan cooled to IEC 34-6 induction motor type unless otherwise
indicated or specified. All motors shall have a service factor of 1.15.

Motors of ratings smaller than 5 HP shall be single phase and those of ratings 5 HP and larger shall
be three phase, unless otherwise indicated or approved.

Motors of rating larger than five (5) horsepower and up to 50 HP shall be star-delta starting type,
unless otherwise permitted or required by the Local Authorities.

Motors of rating five (5) horse-power and smaller shall be direct on line starting type and those above
50 HP shall have auto transformer type starters unless otherwise specified or indicated on the
drawings.

Every motor shall be of sufficient capacity to operate the driven equipment under all load and
operating conditions without exceeding its rated name-plate current or power or its specified
temperature limit. The horsepower ratings for motors shown on the Drawings must be considered as
an indication only. For the use of motors other than that specified, the Contractor shall assume
the cost of, and responsibility for satisfactorily accomplishing all changes (including
engineering costs of redesign by the Engineer) in the work as indicated and specified. All derating
resulting from site conditions shall be allowed for in the design.

Motor performances shall comply with the requirements of IEC 34-1.

3.0 TYPES OF MOTORS

All motors shall be of a type approved for starting characteristics and ruggedness as may be
required under the actual conditions of operation.

All motors shall have class F insulation as a minimum requirement.

The motors shall be designed so that the maximum temperature rise at continuous run under full load
and operation conditions shall be in accordance with IEC Standards for Motors and Generators and
based on the local ambient temperature.

4.0 GENERAL DESIGN OF MOTORS

Motor windings shall be braced to withstand successfully the stresses resulting from the method of
starting. The windings shall be treated thoroughly with approved insulating compound suitable for
protection against moisture and slightly acid or alkaline conditions.

Bearings shall be of the self-lubricating type, designed to ensure proper alignment of rotor and shaft,
and to prevent leakage of lubricant.

Bearings for open motors shall be of the sleeve or ball type, as specified under respective items of
mechanical equipment.
Indoor motors located in relatively clean surrounding, free from any abrasive or conducting dust or
chemical fumes, shall be enclosed ventilated drip-proof type. Otherwise motors shall be totally
enclosed fan cooled type.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 24/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Vertical motors if any shall be provided with thrust bearings adequate for all thrusts to which they can
be subjected in operation.

Vertical motors of open type shall be provided with drip hoods of approved shape and construction.
When the drip hood is too heavy to be easily removed, provision shall be made for access for testing.

5.0 MOTOR TERMINAL BOXES AND LEADS

Motors shall be furnished with oversize conduit terminal boxes to provide for making and
housing the connections and with flexible leads of sufficient length to extend for a distance of not
less than 10 cm beyond the face of the box. The size of cable terminals and conduit terminal box
holes shall be as approved by the Engineer. An approved type of solderless lug shall be supplied.
Totally enclosed motors shall have cast iron terminal boxes.

6.0 MOTOR SHOP TESTS

Motor shop tests shall be made in accordance with IEC Test Code or approved equal.

Complete tests of each motor supplied shall be made and certified shop test data sheets shall be
submitted, unless witness shop tests are required by the Detail Specifications pertaining to the
equipment. Each motor shall be tested for efficiency and power factor at 50, 75 and 100 percent
of its rated horsepower, for temperature rise, torque, starting current and dielectric strength; and
for compliance with all specified performance requirements.

7.0 MOTOR STARTERS

Motor Starters shall be built and sized in accordance with IEC Standard 158-1,BS 5424 and
IEC 292-1&2, or approved equal. Starters shall be non-reversing, magnetic type unless otherwise
indicated or specified.

All starters shall be provided with thermal cutout devices in each phase calibrated for close
protection of the motors against overloads. These devices shall trip the starters in case of overload
and shall not allow it to be reset except manually. The thermal overload relays shall be adjustable
from 90 to 110 percent of nominal rating. A single calibration adjusts all three legs. The overload
relay shall be ambient compensated.

The starter shall be provided with auxiliary contacts for the connection of signaling,
interlocking and other circuits as required for the controls.

Unless otherwise indicated, all starters shall be provided with START-STOP pushbuttons, and
RED and GREEN pilot lights, all located on the starter front cover. An overload reset button shall
be provided inside the cover. Pushbuttons shall be momentary contact or maintained type as
applicable to the function of control.

Starters shall have horsepower ratings at least equal to ratings of motors they serve.

Voltage of control circuit shall not exceed 240 volts for starters in motor control centers or panels.
Individually mounted starters or combination starters may have their control voltage on 380-415 volts
provided local regulations or local inspectors do not forbid the use of same. The Contractor when
utilizing such voltage for control shall provide a clear warning of existence of such voltage within the
station. If 240 volts are required by the local regulations or local inspectors, a neutral conductor shall
be brought within the feeder of the starter of approved cross section, at no extra charge.

Starters shall be electrically held in, providing inherent under-voltage release.

Starters when not part of a motor control center and are located outdoors shall be encased in
an IP 55 enclosure, unless otherwise indicated.

A. Direct on line (DOL) Starters

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 25/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

DOL starters for voltages up to and including 1000V A.C. shall comply with IEC 947. They shall be
rated for intermittent periodic duty or intermittent duty class 0.3 and comply with the requirements of
utilization category AC-3.

B. Automatic Star-Delta (ASD) Starters

In all types of star-delta starters the correct phase relationship between the star and delta connections
to minimize disturbance on changeover shall be maintained. For example, if the supply phase
sequence is L1, L2, L3 and the star point is S then connections shall be as follows:

Winding 1 Winding 2 Winding 3

beginning/end beginning/end beginning/end
Connection
In STAR L1 S L2 S L3 S

Connection
In DELTA L1 L3 L2 L1 L3 L2

In all star-delta starters the star and delta contactors shall be electrically and mechanically interlocked
so that they cannot close or be closed at the same time.
Where overload relays are connected in the phase circuit, the overload relay scales shall be clearly
marked to show whether they represent line current or whether the scale must be multiplied by 1.7 to
represent line current.

C. Open Transition and Closed Transition Start-Delta Starters

Automatic changeover timers shall be adjustable from one second up to at least 20 seconds but the
transition from star to delta windings shall be achieved without any intentional delay. Closed
transition timers shall have tamper-proof factory-set adjustment.

Closed transition star-delta starters shall be arranged for Wauchope connection. The grid resistors
shall be rated for 12 seconds in any 90 seconds, for a 260 °C rise from a 40 °C ambient temperature.
Cables connecting onto the grid resistors shall be heat resisting type suitable for the above
temperature rise.

Resistance banks shall be housed in separate sections of the control panel or starter.

8.0 AUTOS-TRANSFORMER STARTERS

Shall comply with BS EN 60947-4.1 (1992). They shall be rated for intermittent duty Class 0.3 and
shall comply with the requirements of utilization category AC-3. The starters shall be arranged for
'Korndorffer' closed transition connection. The transformer shall, unless otherwise specified, have
tappings of 65%, 70% and 75% of line voltage.

A. Starters for Dual-Wound and Pole-Change Motors

Shall be electrically and mechanically interlocked so that it is impossible for both high and low speed
contactors to close or be closed at the same time. The parts of the composite starter shall comply
with the relevant specification for individual starters. Adjustable timers shall be fitted into the control
circuit so that there is a time delay between switching off the high speed contactor and switching on
the low speed contactor. When high speed is selected the motor shall run in low speed for a preset
time before changing to high speed.

B. Soft-Start/Stop Starters

Soft start/stop starters shall be supplied as a unit with an enclosure suitable for panel mounting.

Starters shall be rated for 380V A.C, 50 Hz supply an a temperature operating range of 0 to 50 °C.
Noise and impulse immunity shall be to ANSI C37-90A, IEC 225-4, IEE 472 (1974) and SEN 361503.

Soft start shall be via a range of switch selectable ramp times of between 0.5 and 60 seconds with a
ramp voltage which increases linearly with time.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 26/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Soft stop shall be via a range of switch selectable ramp times of between 1 to 120 seconds.

The control circuit shall incorporate a remote emergency stop facility. This function shall override the
normal `soft stop' of the starter.

Filters shall be provided at the inlet and outlet of such devices.

The harmonic current spectrum of each soft-start/stop starter shall be provided by the manufacturer
for the calculation and provision of suitable filtration at the electrical switchboard.

A contactor shall be provided to isolate the soft start/stop unit when the motor is not required to run.
The contactor shall be arranged to switch 'off-load'.

The maximum starter current shall be 2.0 times full load.

The control panel manufacturer shall calculate the maximum heat dissipation from all soft-start
devices and incorporate adequate ventilation methods to ensure that the internal temperature within
the control does not exceed 40 °C.

C. Frequency Drives (Inverters)

Frequency inverter drives shall be of the ABB SAMI range type or alternative, approved by the
Engineer.

The frequency drive shall employ pulse width modulation (PWM) using thyristor or transistor switches.

The rating of the frequency drive shall be sufficient for the continuous maximum rating of the motor
and not its running load.

The frequency drive unit shall have efficiency in excess of 90%.

Facilities shall be provided to allow the connection of an emergency Stop Push Button to ensure
effective direct stopping of the drive if dangerous situations arise. The means provided shall include
direct connection to an air-break, e.g. a contactor, arranged such that its opening on-load:

a) does not inhibit any in-built deceleration provided by the variable speed controller.
b) does not produce additional safety hazards
c) and does not cause damage to the controller.
Such contactors must be IEC 947 with utilization category AC-3. The frequency drive shall be capable
of switching on to a motor already rotating in either direction.

If the mains cable distance between the motor control panel (MCP) and the motor exceeds 30 meters
the inverter shall be located adjacent to the motor, otherwise the inverter shall be housed within the
MCP.

Inverter Technical Features:

The input to the frequency drive shall be of an uncontrolled bridge rectifier type, to limit harmonic
distortion.

The speed shall be smoothly adjustable, and controlled by one of the following:

Potentiometer - manual operation

and 0-10V D.C. signal - auto operation
or 4-10mA signal - auto operation

Overcurrent, short-circuit and earth fault protection of the output shall be provided within the control
system to comply with the IEE Regulations. Reset of any fault condition shall be manual.

The system shall provide protection against phase loss. If not included within the frequency drive,
then an external phase loss detection device shall be fitted.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 27/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Full rated output shall be provided continuously with an ambient temperature of 50 °C. The control
panels housing frequency drives shall be provided with suitably rated ventilation fan to ensure that
this temperature is not exceeded.

The starting arrangement shall include a ramp speed control, to achieve starting currents not
exceeding normal full load current wherever possible.

The output frequency range shall nominally be 1Hz to 50 Hz.

The frequency drives shall provide the following visual information:

- Motor Speed, Motor Overload, Motor Short Circuit, Overvoltage, Under-voltage, Equipment
heating.

- The control circuits shall be immune to interference caused by operating on normal raw mains
supply in an industrial environment.
- Where frequency drive systems might be a source of Radio Frequency Interference (RFI)
sufficient to interfere with the proposed functioning of adjacent computer based equipment, RFI
suppression at source shall be applied.

- The manufacturer shall provide details regarding the production of mains-borne interference and
harmonic. Written guarantees shall be given by the manufacturer that these levels of
interference and harmonics shall not be exceeded over the full operating speed of the drive.
- Where screening of cables between the frequency drive and motor is required, the type of cable
recommended must be indicated at the tender stage. The recommended cable must ensure that
the level of any radio interference is limited to comply with BSEN 55014:1993.

- The harmonic current spectrum of each frequency drive shall be provided by the manufacturer for
the calculation and provision of suitable filtration at the electrical switchboard.

9.0 MOTOR CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

Motor circuit protective devices are rated in accordance with IEE Wiring Regulations. Alternative
proposals based on manufacturers’ recommendations shall be subject to the Engineer's Approval.
The Contractor shall in any case be responsible to assure that the circuit protective devices
shall carry the starting current with no tripping, and if reducing trip rating results in a reduction in
frame size, the Contractor shall make sure that the new rating withstands the available short circuit
current.

10.0 APPLICABLE STANDARDS

1. Specification of Contractors : BS 5424 Part 2 (1993).

2. Specification for Motor Starters : BSEN 6094 7-4-1: 1992.
3. Radio Frequency Suppression : BSEN 55014:1993.

END OF SUB-SECTION

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 28/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

SUB-SECTION 17030
MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

1.0 Scope of work

The Contractor shall supply and install the Main Distribution Board (MDB) form four type B. The
equipment shall include bus bars, circuit breakers and/or fusible switches, and all necessary parts to
install a complete distribution board, as shown on the Drawings and as herein specified and as per
latest DEWA requirements.

2.0 GENERAL

2.1 This Specification covers the general requirements for design, manufacture, testing and
supply of Main Distribution Boards (MDB / L.V. Panel). The specific requirements and
details of the main distribution board(s) or L.V. Panel(s) required are given on the
drawings.
2.2 The Contractor shall install the Main Distribution Boards (MDB / L.V. Panel) as shown in
the drawings and in full compliance to this specification, the international standards
specified in the following section & the latest local authority regulations. In case of
difference between this specification and the specified international standards and the
local authority regulations, the more stringent requirements in compliance with local
authority regulations shall prevail.

3.0 MANUFACTURER & PANEL BUILDER / ASSEMBLER: PRE-QUALIFICATIONS

3.1 Main distribution boards shall be assembled only by a franchise of the original
manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.
3.2 Panel builder / assembler shall have a minimum experience of 15 years in the field of
switchgear assembly and 10 years of experience with the same manufacturer under the
franchisee agreement. Authorization letters and approval letters from the manufacturers
will not be considered as an alternative to the franchisee agreement.
3.3 Upon request, the franchised panel assembler shall submit the latest documents of
quality and performance assessment carried out by the original manufacturer for
Engineer’s review.
3.4 The Franchised panel builder / assembler shall design, assemble and test the main
distribution boards as per the pre-defined guidelines of the original manufacturer. Upon
request, the assembler shall obtain approval for the design drawings in writing from the
original manufacturer for the panel design prior submitting for the Engineer’s approval.
3.5 The Original manufacturer and franchised panel builder / assembler shall have a quality
management system conforming to ISO-9001 and shall be certified by an approved
certification body.
3.6 The franchised panel builder shall have all the facilities locally & in-house and shall be
fully competent and have sufficient competent staff to design, assemble & test the
required distribution boards.
3.7 The Franchised panel builder shall have all the facilities in-house to carry out all routine
tests to guarantee the satisfactory performance of the assembled distribution boards.
3.8 The Franchised panel builder shall also provide the after sales service and shall depute
their technical representative within 24hrs to the project site for any emergency service
calls.
3.9 All testing equipments and tools of the panel assembler shall be calibrated at reputed
laboratory at specified regular intervals. Certificates shall be submitted for Engineer’s
verification.
3.10 Prior to procurement, the Contractor shall submit to Engineer a detailed technical
submittal from the panel builder and shall obtain specific approvals for the main
distribution boards. The technical submittal shall include but not limited to the following:
- Company Profile and Quality management system

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 29/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

- Executed project list with details of Employer, Engineer, Project & Order value
- Franchising agreement from the original manufacturer
- Type test certificates for the main distribution board
- Compliance statement to the specifications
- Front, Side and Plan view of the main distribution board with dimensions
- Fixing details / Foundation plan with dimensions
- Detailed component arrangement of the main distribution board
- Detailed technical specification of the proposed main distribution board
- Single line diagram
- Power & Control schematics (where applicable)
- Technical write-up for the control system (if applicable)
- Component list including the model no., type, ratings, quantity and origin
- Catalogue copy of each component
- One set of original catalogue (If requested)
- Routine test & Functional test formats
- Test certificate specimen

4.0 APPLICABLE STANDARDS

4.1 Unless specified otherwise Main Distribution board / L.V. Panel shall conform in design,
material, construction and performance to the latest editions of the International
recommendations (IEC standards) and its corresponding British / European standards
(BSEN standards) and in particular to the following publications:
- Low Voltage Switchboard
IEC 60439-1
- Degree of protection IEC 60529
In addition to the above listed standards, the local authority regulations shall also be
adhered to.

4.2 SITE CONDITIONS

4.2.1 For general climatic conditions, refer and comply the specified project site conditions.
The main distribution boards shall comply and perform satisfactorily at the below listed
special design conditions as minimum:
Ambient temperature : 50ºC
Relative humidity : 100% (at 55ºC)

4.3 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

4.3.1 The main distribution boards shall be of standard, natural air cooled, well tested and
proven design which ensures maximum safety to personnel, maximum service reliability
and economic operations for a lifetime of at least 20years. Design and construction shall
be simple, well laid-out and shall provide good accessibility to components and parts.
4.3.2 Unless specified otherwise, the form of construction for the main distribution board shall
comply with Form-4, Type-6 requirements of IEC 60439-1.
4.3.3 Unless specified otherwise, the main distribution board enclosure system shall be of fully
draw-out version.
4.3.4 Main incoming switching device and outgoing switching devices up to 630A shall be
accommodated in a fully draw-out type compartment of the main distribution board and
where the main switching device rating exceeds 630A, they shall be of fully withdrawable
type switching device in fixed enclosure version.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 30/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

4.3.5 The main distribution board shall be assembled using various combinations of enclosure
such as draw-out and fixed cubicles versions (from same model of enclosure) to form a
uniform and composite panel. The general external appearance and construction of fixed
version and draw-out version enclosures shall be similar and it shall be possible to
assemble various combinations of draw-out or withdrawable type incoming switching
devices, draw-out type and/or fixed type of distribution feeders etc. easily.
4.3.6 Main distribution boards shall be rated on the basis of voltage, current, frequency and
the symmetrical breaking capacity of incorporated switching devices.
4.3.7 The electrical system for all main distribution boards shall be 415 / 380V, 50Hz 3phase
and neutral, 4-wire solidly earthed. The main distribution boards shall be suitable for
operating voltage up to 1000V.
4.3.8 Unless specified otherwise, the fault level withstand capacity of the main distribution
board busbar system rated up to 2500Amps shall be 50KA RMS for 1second as
minimum standard. The breaking capacity of the switching devices shall be 50KA as
minimum standard. The type test certificate shall be submitted for Engineer’s verification,
to prove the fault level withstand capacity of the main distribution boards. Even under
extreme conditions of short circuit or mal-operation there shall be no danger to persons
in the vicinity of the assembly.
4.3.9 All equipment and components of the main distribution boards shall be capable of
continuous operation at their full current and voltage ratings and without detriment or
malfunction at system continuous deviation of up to and including the following
percentages of the normal values.
- Voltages ± 10%
- Frequency ± 5%
All components shall be capable of withstanding the dynamic, thermal and dielectric
stresses resulting from prospective short circuit currents without damage or injury to
personnel.

5.0 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

5.1 General
5.1.1 The main distribution boards shall be assembled by an approved panel builder, who shall
pre-qualify and comply with requirements specified under panel assembler pre-
qualification of this specification. The panel builder / assembler, who do not fully comply
pre-qualification clause of this specification are not approved and cannot be accepted as
a manufacturer / assembler / supplier for main distribution boards. The main distribution
boards shall be assembled by the same panel builder / assembler, who shall also
assemble the sub-main and final distribution boards.
5.1.2 Unless specified / approved otherwise, enclosure system, the switching devices and
other components used for assembly of the main distribution boards shall be from
franchised manufacturer. Different manufacturer for the main distribution board
enclosure and switching devices will not accepted/approved.
5.1.3 Enclosure system for all main distribution boards and motor control centers rated up to
5000A to be of same model from one manufacturer. Enclosure system shall be available
as fixed & withdrawable versions and also in Form 2b / 3B / 4 as per IEC standards.
Unless specified otherwise, the main distribution board shall be of fully withdrawable
version in Form-4, Type-6 construction.
5.1.4 Type test certificates shall be available for the proposed type of enclosure and the
busbar system. The type test certificates shall be clearly state type, model and main
characteristics of the assembly, references of the standards applied for the tests, results
obtained and the observations made during & after the tests. The test report shall also
contain the documents such as records, drawings, photographs, etc.
5.1.5 Main distribution board shall fully comply with requirements of TTA equipment (Type
Tested Assemblies). PTTA equipment (Partially Type Tested Assemblies) will not be
approved for the main distribution board.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 31/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

5.1.6 Main distribution board shall restrict the internal arcs faults within the compartment to
ensure maximum safety to the operating personnel and also to minimize the down time
for replacement and repairs. Type test certificate shall be carried out to verify the arc
containment within the compartment as per AS 3439-1 standards. Certificates shall be
submitted for Engineer’s verification.
5.1.7 Design drawings, component catalogues and type test certificates shall be submitted for
Engineer’s approval prior to placement of order for the main distribution boards.
5.2 General Arrangement & Assembly
5.2.1 L.V Panel shall comprise of free standing enclosure, bus bar system, switching devices
such as ACB/MCCB, metering equipments, all necessary current transformers and the
like as required. Panel shall be assembled in a systematic manner such as Transformer
Incomer section, Generator Incomer section (if applicable), Bus coupler section (if
applicable), Incomer Metering / Indication section and Outgoing section.
5.2.2 Unless otherwise specified the panels shall be designed to accept bottom entry of cables
and shall be of rear access type. The rear access shall only be provided for access for
termination of cables, all other equipments shall be accessible / operable from the front
of panel. Where front access type is specified, the panel shall be designed completely for
front access only.
5.2.3 Each panel section (cable compartment) shall be provided with thermostatically
controlled panel heater.
5.2.4 Each section shall be arranged typically as described below and as per the details
shown in the drawings:

a Incomer section (Transformer Incoming)

Transformer Incomer panel shall be a 3compartment enclosure with Top & Bottom
compartment dedicated for metering / controls and the Middle compartment shall be
dedicated for the circuit breaker. It shall comprise of but not limited to the following:
Bottom Compartment
- Incomer supply cables
Middle Compartment
- Main Incoming circuit breakers with rating and type as per the drawing.
Top Compartment
- Any control component for Incoming circuit breaker.
- Digital power meter to indicate various electrical parameters
- Phase indication lamps (R,Y,B) wired to the line side of the circuit breaker.
- Power factor meter (If required as per local authority requirement).
- KWH energy meter (If location of KWh is approved by local authority).
b Incomer section (Generator Incoming) – (If applicable)
Generator Incomer panel shall be a 3compartment enclosure with Top & Bottom
compartment dedicated for metering / controls and the Middle compartment shall be
dedicated for the circuit breaker. It shall comprise of but not limited to the following:
Bottom Compartment
- Incomer supply cables
Middle Compartment
- Main Incoming circuit breakers with rating and type as per the drawing.
Top Compartment
- Any control component for Incoming circuit breaker.
- Digital power meter to indicate various electrical parameters

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 32/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

- Phase indication lamps (R,Y,B) wired to the line side of the circuit breaker.
- KWH energy meter (If shown in the drawings).
c Bus coupler / Bus Tie section – (If applicable)
The Bus Tie / Bus Coupler Panel shall be a 3compartment enclosure to match with the
incomer panels. The Top & Bottom compartment can be used for accommodating the
common controls of the incoming and the bus tie circuit breakers. The Middle
compartment shall be dedicated for the circuit breaker. It shall comprise of but not limited
to the following:
Notes:
- Where ACB’s are used as incoming or bus coupler, the front face of the ACB shall be
accessible for operation from the front without opening the front door.
- Where MCCB’s are used as incoming or bus coupler circuit breakers an extended
operating handle shall be provided at the front face of the panel front door for
operation. All such door handles shall be door interlocked wherever required.

d Outgoing section(s)
The outgoing section(s) enclosure shall accommodate the outgoing circuit breakers
which shall be arranged in a systematic and symmetrical manner. It shall comprise of but
not limited to the following:
Each panel shall have various fixed or draw out compartments with individual doors for
each compartment and each compartment / drawers shall accommodate the following:
-Circuit breakers with rating and type as specified in the drawings.
-Any other controls, which may be part of the outgoing circuit
breakers.
Notes:
- All circuit breakers and other controls pertaining to a feeder shall be accommodated
in its own compartment, which shall have its own lockable door. Keys for all such
door shall be common.
- Moulded case circuit breaker in each compartment shall be equipped with an
extended operating handle extended to the front face of the door for operation. All
such door handles shall be door interlocked, wherever required.
- Air circuit breaker front face shall be accessible without opening the door.
- Circuit breakers and other control components shall be fully accessible after opening
the panel door; however no live parts shall be exposed.
- All the bus bar connections / terminations to the outgoing circuit breakers shall be
taken from the rear side of the circuit breaker, which shall be shrouded properly using
metallic / poly carbonate sheets. All the mccb terminals shall be fully shrouded with
original terminal shrouds from the mccb manufacturer, in such a that way no live parts
are exposed, when the front door is opened.
- Opening of the front door shall give access to the circuit breaker for rating
adjustments etc.
- Maximum 2nos. air circuit breakers shall be installed in one enclosure, provided that
sufficient space for cable termination is provided and de-rating of circuit breaker is
carried out as per manufacturer recommendations.
- Maximum 2nos.moulded case circuit breakers, rated at 800Amps shall be installed in
one enclosure, provided that sufficient space for cable termination is provided.
- Maximum 9nos. of moulded case circuit breakers (rated less than 250Amps) shall be
installed in one enclosure, provided that sufficient cable termination is provided.
- All Partitioning and shrouding shall comply the requirements of Form-4, Type-6
construction as per IEC standards.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 33/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

5.3 Enclosure manufacturing

5.3.1 Main distribution board enclosure shall be a branded catalogue product from approved
manufacturer. Enclosure shall be made out of electro galvanized steel sheets conforming to
international specification. Zinc coating shall be provided on the sheets, which shall prevent
rust formation during storage and handling for processing, in addition to giving corrosion
protection to the finished product. The sheets have a fine surface finish, which gives good
presentation to the painted components of the enclosure.
5.3.2 The steel sheet used for enclosure manufacturing shall pass through the pretreatment
process for surface treatment. The process shall be a complete 7stage zinc phosphating
spray treatment system and shall include the following process:
- Degreasing
- Surface conditioning
- Zinc phosphating
- Passivation
- Dematerialized water rinses
- Intermediate rinses
5.3.3 The enclosure shall be powder coated to an approved color. The painting process shall
include removal of moisture on the sheet steel surface using and applying thermosetting
polyester powder using automatic guns. Polymerization of the powder shall take place when
the components are cured at about 200ºC, forming a continuous integrated coating. A fairly
uniform coating of atleast 70-80 microns shall be provided.
5.3.4 The pretreated and powder coated sheet steel components shall be atleast tested randomly
at regular intervals for coating thickness measurement, adhesion test, bend test, impact test,
hardness test, salt spray test etc.

5.4 Enclosure construction

5.4.1 Main distribution board enclosure shall be a branded catalogue product from approved
manufacturer. The assembler shall assemble the prefabricated elements of the
enclosure system, busbar system, switching devices and other equipment to complete
the main distribution board.
5.4.2 Main distribution board enclosure shall be fabricated of minimum 2mm thick electro-
galvanized sheet steel folded and welded construction. The enclosure shall be of simple
and robust construction designed for a variety of dimensions obtainable by means of
standardized basic elements. Main distribution board shall consist of several enclosures
of equal height and depth mounted side by side to form a composite board of uniform
assembly. Each section of main distribution board shall be made up of 4 distinct
functional spaces: Vertical and horizontal busbars, switchgear components, cable
connection and auxiliaries.
5.4.3 Enclosure structure composition shall be based on a supporting frame consisting of
cross members, vertical members and panels fastened one another by means of bolts
and rivets. The basic structure shall be completed by the addition of a compartment for
the connections which may be located at rear or at side depending on the access. A
single-piece base shall allow anchoring of the unit to the floor. The complete assembly
shall be rigid self-supporting structure which is deformable and unaffected by shocks.
The structure shall be completed by a metal partition made of one or more pieces
between two sections depending on the depth of the compartment. The lower part of
structure shall be closed by means of bolted plates that can be removed whenever the
assembly of cable glands is required. The switchgear components contained in sections
shall be installed on mounting plates. Each door panel shall be equipped with integral
key lock and the key shall be common for all such locks. All door hinges to be of
concealed type and it shall be possible to remove the door panel whenever required. All
doors, bold on cover, partitions, mounting plates and metallic shrouds shall be effectively
connected to earth. Flexible earth wires shall be used for removable covers and hinged
doors.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 34/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

5.4.4 The structure and the partitions shall be protected by a durable scratch resistant textured
paint finish, epoxy powder polymerized at high temperatures to an approved color.
5.4.5 Unless specified otherwise, the main distribution board shall be with ingress protection
rating of IP42 as per IEC standards as minimum.
5.4.6 Unless specified otherwise, Main distribution boards shall be designed for front access
for the purpose of operation and access to all components and shall suit front or rear
access for cable connections and top or bottom for cable entries. Wherever required,
enclosure shall be suitable for busduct entry at the top. The access and entries shall be
provided as per site requirements.
5.4.7 Adequate care shall be taken while designing the main distribution board connection
spaces for the external cables. Sufficient cable supports shall be provided for routing the
cables inside the enclosure. Wherever single core cable enters, the gland plate shall be
of aluminum material.
5.4.8 Enclosure system shall effectively dispose the heat produced by the main circuits and
shall integrate a high performance natural ventilation system which shall be aimed at
regulating the internal temperature based on the actual capacities of the components.
5.4.9 Enclosure shall be readily suitable for future extension on either side without any
modifications (after installation at site).
5.4.10 Form-4 construction assembly shall provide protection against contact with internal live
parts and components. Busbars, functional units and cable termination shall be
segregated from each other as given below:
- Busbars shall be separated from functional units;
- Functional units / switching devices shall be separated from each other;
-Cable termination and functional units / switching devices shall be separated from
each other;
-Incoming and outgoing terminals shall be separated from each other.
Busbars shall be accommodated in a separate chamber/alley with metallic shrouds and
partitions to avoid accidental external contacts.
Incoming switching device shall be located in separate section and outgoing switching
devices in other sections, wherever applicable. Each switching device shall be
segregated from each other and located in individual compartment with hinged door.
External cable termination to the switching device terminals shall be outside the
functional unit / switching device compartment. Segregation shall be made between the
switching device terminal and the switching device within its compartment by means of
rigid barriers and partitions.
All segregation shall be achieved by means of rigid metallic sheet partitions. Segregation
and partition shall ensure protection against contact with live parts and limitation of the
faults within each of the functional unit compartment.
A cable alley shall be provided either at rear or at the side of each section as per site
conditions and requirements to facilitate the switching device cable glanding. Cables
shall be glanded on the bottom plate of common cable alley/chamber. External cable
termination shall be carried out in an enclosed individual termination compartment for
each switching device, which is external to but separated from functional unit
compartment. The cable termination compartment shall be provided with cable entry
shrouds at the cable entry in to the compartments. Supports shall be provided to fasten
the power and control cables inside cable alley/chamber.
5.4.11 Withdrawable construction assembly shall accommodate each switching device in an
individual withdrawable compartment. The withdrawable compartment / drawers shall be
made up of a moving part (chassis) that supports the equipment, a fixed part bearing the
positioning elements for the moving part, disconnecting contacts for power connections (
which clip on to the busbar) and disconnecting contacts for auxiliary connections.
Withdrawable compartment / drawers shall be built in compliance with IEC standards for
the drawer extraction and locking system. The connection mechanism shall be designed

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 35/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

to allow the drawer to be set to any of the four positions stated below. The degree of
protection shall be maintained in all positions (connected, test, disconnected and drawer
removed). An interlock mechanism shall be provided in the withdrawable compartment /
drawer to interlock the breaker operating handle shaft with the drawer to prevent door
opening as long as the circuit breaker is closed (ON position). Withdrawable
compartments / drawers shall have the following four distinct positions:
-Connected position: Power and auxiliary contacts are connected.
-Test position : Power circuits are disconnected (upstream
and down stream), auxiliary circuits remain
connected.
-Disconnected position : All circuits are disconnected.
-Removed position : Drawer can be removed out.

5.5 Busbars
5.5.1 The busbar system shall be designed as per the pre-defined guidelines provided by the
original manufacturer. The busbar system shall be type tested by the manufacturer at
reputed laboratory for short circuit withstand capacity. The neutral and earth busbars
shall also be type tested for the short circuit withstand capacity. The fault level rating of
the busbar system shall be as per the drawings however the minimum short circuit
withstand capacity shall be 50KA RMS for 1second. Neutral busbar shall be able to
withstand a thermal stress of atleast 60%, corresponding to the main phase busbar rated
short circuit withstand capacity.
5.5.2 The busbars shall be high grade electrolytic tin plated copper (with 99.9% conductivity),
rectangular and rigid construction. The phase busbars and neutral busbars shall be
arranged systematically in a busbar chamber/ alley. The busbars shall be color sleeved
throughout the length for phase identification (except for the distribution busbars of the
withdrawable sections). The busbars shall be shrouded completely using metallic
partitions and/or polycarbonate shrouds as applicable. The busbar assembly shall be
shrouded (at least IP20) by shrouds so that no live parts are accessible. Phase
identification shall be done systematically. Use of bakelite sheets for shrouding will not
be permitted.
5.5.3 The busbar system shall be supported adequately at regular intervals as per
manufacturer guidelines based on the type test results on a specially designed busbar
supports. The supports shall be independently fixed to structure to strengthen the busbar
arrangement. Wherever required additional intermediate supports shall be provided
between the busbars. All vertical droppers shall also be adequately supported as per the
manufacturer guidelines and the test results. The distribution busbars shall be connected
to the main busbars by suitable sized and graded bolt & nut and contact washers. Clamp
type arrangements for connections will not be permitted. Connections to the switching
devices to the main or distribution busbars shall be carried out using rigid bars of
adequate and standard sizes. It shall be possible to replace the switching devices with
different rating with same frame sizes without changing the interconnection busbars.
5.5.4 Distance between the busbar supports for busbar system and the distance between
different phases of busbar system shall be as per manufacturer guidelines based on the
type test results.
5.5.5 The main busbars shall be accommodated on a separate busbar chamber running
horizontally at top or bottom or middle of the panel. Main busbars running behind the
functional units (the switching device mounting plates) will not be permitted. Distribution
busbars are permitted at the back of the switching device compartments only where
withdrawable versions are used.
5.5.6 The dimensioning of the busbar system shall be as per the rated current of the main
switching device, the short circuit current, the maximum rated permissible temperature at
permanent operation and the ambient temperature around the busbars. The selection of
busbars shall be supported by calculations and recommendations from the original
manufacturer. The main phase and neutral busbars shall be of same size through out the
panel irrespective of the ratings and load distribution. Earth busbars shall be half the size
of the phase busbars. Several copper bars may be used for each phase and neutral,
Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 36/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

however such parallel running bars of each phase / neutral shall be spaced evenly with a
minimum gap of 5mm between the bars. Busbar system shall be standardized with 5mm
thick main busbars, distribution busbars and interconnection busbars for better heat
dissipation.
5.5.7 The neutral busbar shall run along with the phase busbars and shall outgoing switching
devices neutral connection terminal shall be provided with in the switching device
compartment. Neutral busbar running at bottom or in the cable chamber/alley will not be
accepted in case of Form-4 construction.
5.5.8 Earth busbar shall be running throughout the panel fitted directly on to the structure for
connection of the protective conductors to provide equipotential bonding of exposed
conductive parts. Earth busbar shall be located at the bottom of the panel and in the
cable chamber/ alley to facilitate easy connection of protective conductor.
5.5.9 Hardware used for busbar connections shall be zinc plated, yellow passivated / bi-
chromated steel of 8.8grade. Tightening of busbar bolts shall be done as per
manufacturer recommendations and pre-defined guidelines using calibrated torque
wrenches.
5.6 Switching devices & Other Components

5.6.1 SELECTOR SWITCH/PUSH BUTTONS/INDICATOR LAMP

Selector switches shall be of the rotary type with lever or key operated actuators as specified in the
schedules. Push button shall be of the flush type with colors in accordance with BSEN 60073:1993.

Pushbuttons for emergency stop purpose shall be of mushroom head type, with twist to release action
or key reset facility as specified.

Contact blocks shall have double break silver plated contacts in NO or NC configuration rated at not
less than 5A resistive at 220V, 50Hz.

Indicating lamps shall be of the flush type, 22 mm diameter, with removable colored lenses to permit
replacement of lamps from the front. Colors shall be in accordance with BS 4094.

Indicating lamps on control circuits shall be equipped with completely sealed dual wound safety
isolating transformers. Lamp test facility shall be provided.

5.6.2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Circuit breakers shall be molded case type, totally front accessible and front connectable. The
breakers shall be mounted in the distribution board to permit installation, maintenance and testing
without reaching over any live side bussing.

Circuit breakers shall comply with IEC 947-2 (EN 60947-2) and short circuit category ICS.

Test certificate from independent laboratory to certify that the MCCB's comply with the IEC-947-2,
(EN 60947-2) test sequence -2 shall be submitted when required by Engineer.

All line and load side connections shall be individual to each breaker. No common mounting of
electrical bus connectors will be acceptable. Line side breaker connections shall be bolt-on type.
Breaker connections requiring leaf and coil springs which could loosen or fly apart during a fault are
not acceptable.

Frame shall be constructed from molded moldarta and/or glass polyester material.

The operating mechanism shall be toggle type quick-make, quick-break, trip-free, with three different
positions for ON, OFF & TRIP.

Circuit breakers shall incorporate an arc-extinguishing compartment such that when the contacts are
opened, the arc drawn shall induce a magnetic field in the grids, which in turn, shall draw the arc from
the contacts and into the grids, thus splitting the arc into smaller arcs and extinguish very rapidly.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 37/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

The trip element shall be a bi-metal for overload and an electromagnet for short circuit.

Molded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB) breakers shall be electronic type with adjustable, setting for
overload and short circuit. The breaker should have a facility to test the tripping circuit of the MCCB
by inducing an electrical pulse from portable unit.

Breakers shall be manually operated with store energy spring load.

Breakers shall be ambient compensated type with a built-in compensator to carry rated load at 50
degrees centigrade.

Breakers shall have 415/380 volt duty rating, and a minimum symmetrical short circuit interrupting
rating equal to 50 KA for main distribution boards associated with 1500 KVA transformers and 40 KA
for MDB's with 1000 KVA transformers.

Each breaker shall be supplied with an externally operable mechanical means to trip the circuit
breaker.

Key interlocks for circuit breakers where indicated shall incorporate a plunger that blocks the breaker
in the open position. Key removal shall be possible in such a way to achieve the desired interlocking
system.

Where required, breakers shall be suitable for busway connection.

Main breaker shall be insulated case type provided with interchangeable trip units, current
transformers, flux-transfer short trip and solid state circuiting.

5.6.3 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Air circuit breakers shall be totally withdrawable type completely self-contained in an enclosed
housing to be mounted in a switchboard cubicle without additional screening. It shall occupy a
complete section, completely segregated from all other parts of the switchboard. Vent holes shall be
provided in the side of the circuit breaker housing to provide thermal ventilation and also to permit
easy air flow through the arc chutes when interrupting a short circuit. The circuit breaker shall be
installed in an enclosure greater than twice the breaker volume.

Air circuit breakers shall be equipped with solid state microprocessor based protection unit.

** The protection unit shall not require any external power supply. It shall have adjustable settings for
overload, short circuit and earth fault and non-delayed instantaneous short circuit protection for the
incoming air circuit breakers. The outgoing air circuit breakers shall have, adjustable setting for
overload and short circuit indication as well as a non-delayed instantaneous short circuit protection
only. The protection unit shall have magnetic trip indicator and shall be adjustable for ambient
temperature up to 70 degree C.

Operating mechanism shall be of the trip free spring assisted hand closing type. It shall include a
slow close feature for checking contact operation and adjustment. A flag type indicator shall indicate
the ON or OFF position.

Air circuit breakers shall be of the triple pole or four-pole as specified in the schedules or as indicated
on the drawings. Where four pole breakers are called for, one pole shall be a full sized switched
neutral.

The air circuit breaker shall be closed and opened by a stored energy spring charged operated,
mechanism. The operating mechanism shall be designed in such away that the excess energy at the
end of a closing cycle is used to partially recharge the closing spring.

Also the opening springs shall be automatically charged during the closing operation. Remotely
controlled air circuit breakers shall be with motor driven operating mechanism.
The air circuit breaker shall in addition have adjustable short time delay in both current and time
directions, and adjustable instantaneous trip in the current direction.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 38/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

All contacts subject to arcing shall be tipped with arc resistant material and shall require
minimum maintenance after short circuit interruption. The main contacts shall be silver faced to
ensure complete reliability in service under onerous current loading or ambient conditions.

The arc chutes shall be of special design employing steel splitter plates. The plates shall be
arranged so that the arc is rapidly de-ionized while it is contained within the chute structure and
the plate spacing shall be such that back pressure is minimized. The complete chute assembly
shall be easily removed for routine inspection of the chute and contacts.

Isolating contacts shall be multi-finger spring loaded type which shall be silver plated and shall require
no attention.

A front operated racking mechanism shall cause withdrawal of breaker. Access shall be via a lower
cover. Safety shutters of insulation material shall be provided to prevent access to live connections in
the inspection position or when the breaker is complete withdrawn.

Interlocks shall be provided to prevent being isolated unless it is in the OFF position and also to
prevent the breaker being racked into the service position unless it is in OFF position. Interlocks shall
also prevent the breaker being accidentally pulled completely off the guide rail and prevent the in-
dependent manual operated breaker being "slow closed" in the service position. Provision shall be
made for padlocking the safety shutters when the breaker is completely withdrawn.

Locks shall be provided to prevent access to the time lag dashpots and racking mechanism,
preventing unauthorized adjustment of the trip setting, also enabling the circuit breaker to be
locked in the isolated position thus disconnecting the supply.
Breakers shall be ambient compensated type with a built in compensator to carry rated load at 50o C.

Air circuit breakers shall conform to IEC-947-2 (EN 60947-2).

An earth terminal shall be provided at the rear of the withdrawable breaker housing connected to a
plug and socket contact, to provide an earth connection to the moving breaker portion. Contacts shall
be maintained in the breaker isolated portion.

Short circuit performance shall comply with IEC-947-2 (EN 60947-2), including make-break tests at up
to 50 KA rms and 100 KA peak with minimum recovery voltages of 550 volts.

Mechanical endurance shall ensure over 30,000 operations with only minor maintenance.

A non resettable number of operation counter shall be provided.

Suitable cable glands shall be provided for the support of the incoming supply cables.

8.0 CURRENT LIMITING CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Current limiting circuit breakers shall have a maximum interrupting rating of 100 KA rms symmetrical
amperes. All circuit breakers shall be UL listed and meet NEMA Standard No. AB1-1975, and
Federal Specification W-C-375B/GEN where applicable.

Current limiting circuit breakers shall be supplied in unit molded case construction and shall consist of
a common trip, thermal magnetic circuit breaker with an independently operating limiter section in
series with each pole.

The conventional breaker section shall have an over center, trip-free toggle-type mechanism with
quick make, quick break action and positive handle indication. A button shall be provided on the
cover for mechanically tripping the circuit breaker. The current limiting breaker shall have permanent
trip units containing individual thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. The thermal trip
element shall be calibrated for 50oC ambient temperature.

The limiter section shall consist of three current limiting elements electrically coordinated with the
conventional circuit breaker trip elements. The contacts of the limiter section shall be
electromagnetically and electro dynamically opened and hold open until interruption is complete. The

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 39/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

unit shall not contain replaceable elements and the limiter shall automatically reset after circuit
interruption.

On high level fault currents the limiter portion of the circuit breaker shall operate to limit the rise of
fault current. Integral resistance shall be introduced into faulted circuit to dissipate and limit let -
through energy and to provide a voltage transient-free interruption at rear unity power factor.

The current limiting circuit breaker shall have front removable lugs. Lugs shall be UL listed for copper
conductors.

5.6.4 BRANCH CIRCUIT BREAKERS FOR CHILLERS

Breakers protecting chillers shall also incorporate the following protections:

- Phase failure relay
- Reverse phase relay
- Under voltage relay
- Over current relay

All these relays shall be connected to the shunt trip circuit of the breaker.

5.7 Labeling

The main distribution board shall be labeled systematically in English to describe the designation of
the incoming and outgoing switching devices as referenced in the drawings. A main label shall be
fixed to the front face of the main distribution board. The label shall be of special white pvc material
front engraved for the desired text. The text shall be black in color. The label shall be fixed to the door
using a special pvc rivets.
Each metallic and polycarbonate(pc) shrouds shall be provided with engraved warning labels
indicating ‘ Danger – 415V Live Bus Inside – Isolate Main Supply Before Opening This Cover’ at the
front face. All such warning labels shall be riveted to the shroud plates.
The line side of the incoming circuit breaker and its bus bar shall be shrouded separately with
removable metallic front plates to prevent accidental access to bus bars. Such shrouds shall be
provided with engraved warning labels indicating ‘Danger – 415V Live Bus Inside – Isolate Supply
Else Where Before Opening This Cover’ at the front face. All such warning labels shall be riveted to
the shroud plates.
Permanent labels shall be provided inside the main distribution board for phase identification of the
incoming and outgoing switching devices. Identification labels shall be provided for neutral and earth
connections.
A drawing pouch / pocket shall be provided inside each main distribution board and approved load
schedule (laminated) and the as-built drawings for the motor control centre shall be provided.

5.8 Testing

5.8.1 Type test

The main distribution board and the components as applicable shall be type tested in accordance with
the IEC standards to verify the specified fault level withstand capacity from a reputed and approved
type testing laboratory and certified by an competent authority.
The following 7 type tests as specified in IEC 60439-1standards to comply with requirements of TTA
equipment shall be carried out at recognized test laboratories and certificates from approved test
witnessing authority shall be provided for each type test:
1. Verification of temperature-rise limits (IEC Clause 8.2.1);
2. Verification of the dielectric properties (IEC Clause 8.2.2);
3. Verification of short-circuit withstand strength (IEC Clause 8.2.3);
4. Verification of the effectiveness of the protective circuit (IEC Clause 8.2.4);

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 40/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

5. Verification of clearances and creepage distances (IEC Clause 8.2.5);

6. Verification of mechanical operation (IEC Clause 8.2.6);
7. Verification of the degree of protection (IEC Clause 8.2.7).

Type test certificates shall be submitted to the Engineer for verification.

5.8.2 Routine test

The panel assembler shall perform the routine test and provide the test certificates as defined in IEC
standards. The routine test shall include but not limited to the following:
1. Inspection of the assembly including inspection of wiring and electrical operational test (IEC
Clause 8.3.1);
2. Dielectric test & Insulation resistance test (IEC Clause 8.3.2 & 8.3.4);
3. Checking of protective measures and of the electrical continuity of the protective circuits (IEC
Clause 8.3.3)
4. Functional test as per the approved test procedure.
Routine test certificates and test readings shall be submitted to the Engineer for verification.

6.0 MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARDS SCHEDULES

6.1 SCHEDULE NO. 1 - COLOR CODES FOR CABLES

Voltage Cable Color Remarks

230V A.C. (Single Ph. circuits) Red
400 V A.C. (Three Ph. circuits) Red, Yellow, Blue
Neutral Black
Earth Green/Yellow
230V/120V/24V A.C.
Black
(auxiliary circuits)
12V/24V D.C. Positive Brown
12V/24V D.C. Negative Brown
Instrumenty Earth Green/Yellow
Analog Signal Grey
Thermocouples As defined in BS 1843

6.2 SCHEDULE NO. 2 - PUSHBUTTON COLORS

Remarks
Color Application
Red Stop or off
Emergency stop-with mushroom head,
twist to reset and with yellow color.
Green Start or On
Light Blue Reset of overload devices

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 41/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

6.3 SCHEDULE NO. 3 - INDICATION LAMPS

Color Application Remarks

Red 1) Main circuit breaker closed
2) Equipment tripped by protective device
3) Parameter outside safe limit
Yellow 1) Parameter outside normal limit
Green 1) Circuit breaker open
2) Normal function of equipment
White 1) Supply available
Blue 1) Specified indication as labeled

6.4 SCHEDULE NO. 4 - MDB REFERENCE

No Contract Specification Item Tender To be Remarks

Completed
Information
by Tenderer
i No. of Phases 3 ----
ii Rated Voltage 400V ---- V
iii Rated frequency 50 Hz ---- Hz
iv Rated current -----------Amp ----- Amp
v Prospective short circuit current (min.)
vi Rated short time with stand current 50 KA -------KA
(RMS) --------- KA for --------- KA
vii Rated peak withstand current ------seconds ----- seconds
viii Type of earthing ------------KA ----------- KA

ix Main busbar dimension TNC - S ---------------

x Dropper busbar dimension -------------- ------- bars x

(---- x ----)
xi Earth bar dimension -------------- mm
----------- mm2
xii Main busbar arrangement --------------
----------- mm2
xiii Earth bar location --------------
Top/Bottom
xiv Main protective device --------------
Top/Bottom
xv Cable entry ACB/MCCB
----------------
xvi Cable access Bottom/Top
----------------
xvii Mounting arrangement Rear
Front/Rear
xviii Degree of protection Floor
Floor/wall
xix Dimension IP 41
IP --------------
xx Location H 2400 mm (max)
L-------- mm (max) H ---------- mm
D 1000 mm L ---------- mm
(max) D ---------- mm

In doors

END OF SUB-SECTION

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 42/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

SUB-SECTION 17040
SUB-MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

1.0 GENERAL

The contractor shall supply, install, test and commission Sub-main Distribution Boards complete
shown on the Drawings and as herein specified and as per latest DEWA requirement.
.

Sub-main Distribution Board shall have voltmeters, ammeters and instrument transformers where
required and as indicated in the schematic diagrams.

Sub-main Distribution Board shall be equipped with thermal magnetic type molded case circuit
breakers of frame size and trip ratings as indicated on the drawings.
The bus bar structure and the main breaker shall have current ratings as shown on the drawings. The
main incomer shall be either an automatic or non-automatic molded case circuit breaker as indicated
on the drawings.

Sub-main Distribution Board shall have, 400 V or 415 V, 3-phase, 50 Hz duty rating and shall have
short circuit interrupting capacity equal to or greater than the integrated equipment rating shown on
the drawings.

Sub-main Distribution Board shall conform to BSEN 60439-1:1994.

2.0 CABINETS AND FRONTS

Distribution board assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. Cabinet shall be of sufficient size to
provide a minimum gutter space of 10 cm on all sides. The thickness of the sheet steel shall be
minimum 1.5 mm.

Fronts shall include doors and have flush, brushed stainless steel cylinder tumbler - type locks with
catches and spring loaded door pulls. The flush lock shall not protrude beyond the front of the
adjustable indicating trim clamps which shall be completely concealed when the doors are closed.
Fronts shall have approved directories with name of panel, number of phases, wires and voltage writ-
ten on them. Doors shall be mounted by completely concealed steel hinges. Fronts shall not be
removable with door in the locked position. A circuit directory card shall provide a space of at least
0.5cm high x 7cm long or equivalent for each circuit.

The directory shall be typed to identify the load fed by each circuit.

Fronts shall be of code gauge, full finished steel with rust-inhibiting primer and baked enamel finish.
Color shall be gray to BS 381C or approved equal.

Joints shall be welded, galvanized and reinforced where necessary and galvanized after fabrication.

3.0 DISTRIBUTION BOARD BUS ASSEMBLY

Bus for connections to the branch circuit breakers shall be the "Distributed Phase" or "Phase
Sequence" Type.

Three-phase, four-wire bussing shall be such that any three adjacent single-pole breakers are
individually connected to each of the three different phases in such a manner that two or three pole
breakers can be installed at any location. All current carrying parts of the bus assembly shall be
plated.

Main and neutral buses shall be minimum 98% conductivity rectangular copper bars, provided with
bolted-type lugs as necessary.

Buses shall be rigidly supported and insulated and be so designed that branch circuits can be
removed without disturbing adjacent units or changed without additional machining, drilling or tapping.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 43/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Necessary bussing, drilling and blank plates shall be provided for installation of future circuits when so
indicated in the Schedules on the Drawings.

All screws and bolts used for making copper connections shall be equipped with lock washers.
Riveted connections will not be acceptable.

Mains shall be equipped with solderless pressure indent type connectors and have means to prevent
swiveling of connector.

Neutral busbars shall be full size and shall incorporate one neutral terminal for each single pole and
neutral way.

Aluminum shall not be used for any interior panelboard parts.

Back pan or mounting on which buses and branches are mounted shall be rigid to properly support
the component parts.
Reinforcing of back pan shall be by flanging or addition of angle iron.
Buses, connectors and terminals shall be silver plated to a minimum thickness of 0.1 mm.

4.0 EARTHING

An acceptable terminal bar for equipment earthing conductors shall be provided with minimum
number of cable terminations equal to the single pole number of ways of the panel board.
Cabinets shall be provided with an earth connector welded to it.

5.0 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Molded case circuit breakers shall have trip settings, and number of poles, as indicated on the
Drawings. All circuit breakers shall have their ampere trip rating clearly marked and visible.
Breakers shall have quick-make, quick-break, toggle mechanisms; and shall provide positive trip-free
operation on abnormal overloads. Stationary and movable contacts shall be adequately protected with
effective and rapid arc interruption. Each pole of the breaker shall be equipped with an inverse time
delay thermal overcurrent trip element and magnetic instantaneous overcurrent trip elements for com-
mon tripping of all poles for multiple breakers. Multiple pole breakers shall have a single handle
mechanism. Automatic tripping shall be indicated by the breaker handle assuming a clearly distinctive
position from the manual ON and OFF position.
Circuit breakers shall have minimum RMS symmetrical interrupting capacities at 415 V equal to the
values indicated below for molded case circuit breakers unless otherwise indicated, and shall in no
case be less than the busbar short circuit bracing of the distribution board:
25kA up to 150A frame size
34kA for 225A frame size and above
Molded case circuit breakers shall comply to IEC-439-1 (EN 60439-1).

6.0 CURRENT LIMITING CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Current limiting circuit breakers shall have a maximum interrupting rating of 100 KA rms symmetrical
amperes. All circuit breakers shall be UL listed and meet NEMA Standard No. AB1-1975 and Federal
Specification W-C-375B/GEN, where applicable.

Current limiting circuit breakers shall be supplied in unit molded case construction and shall consist of
a common trip, thermal magnetic circuit breaker with an independently operating limiter section in
series with each pole.

The conventional breaker section shall have an over center, trip-free toggle-type mechanism with
quick make, quick break action and positive handle indication. A button shall be provided on the cover
for mechanically tripping the circuit breaker. The current limiting breaker shall have permanent trip
units containing individual thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. The thermal trip element
shall be calibrated for 50oC ambient temperature.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 44/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

The limiter section shall consist of three current limiting elements electrically coordinated with the
conventional circuit breaker trip elements. The contacts of the limiter section shall be
electromagnetically and electro dynamically opened and held open until interruption is complete.
The unit shall not contain replaceable elements and the limiter shall automatically reset after circuit
interruption.

On high level fault currents the limiter portion of the circuit breaker shall operate to limit the rise of
fault current. Integral resistance shall be introduced into faulted circuit to dissipate and limit let-
through energy and to provide a voltage transient-free interruption at rear unity power factor.

The current limiting circuit breaker shall have front removable lugs. Lugs shall be UL listed for copper
conductors.

7.0 DISTRIBUTION BOARD INSTALLATION

Distribution board shall be aligned, leveled and securely fastened to the building.

Connecting conduits shall not be used to support the distribution board.

All unused openings in distribution board cabinets shall be properly closed.

Distribution board interiors shall not be installed in cabinets until all conduit connections to the cabinet
have been completed.

Trim shall be installed plumb and square to finish painting.

Trim for flush mounted cabinets shall be installed in plaster frame, flush with finished wall.

Concealed surfaces of cabinets shall be given on site a heavy application of emulsified asphalt prior
to installation.

Free standing distribution boards when installed in electrical closets, or rooms with depressed floors
shall be provided with galvanized steel support structures to raise the level of the pane to 10 cm
above the original floor level.

END OF SUB-SECTION

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 45/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

SUB-SECTION 17050
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

1.0 GENERAL

The Contractor shall supply and install the distribution boards (DB, EDB) as indicated in the
Schedules, where is shown on the Drawings and as herein specified and as per latest DEWA
requirement.
They shall include bus assembly, cabinet and front, circuit breakers and all necessary parts to install
complete distribution boards.

Distribution boards shall be factory assembled.

Distribution boards shall be of a dead-front safety type, equipped with protective devices as shown on
the Schedules.

Distribution boards shall have 415/400 V volt duty rating, with other ratings as shown on the Drawings.

Distribution boards circuit numbering shall be such that, starting at the top, odd number shall be used
in sequence down the left-hand side and even numbers shall be used in sequence down the right-
hand side.

Distribution boards shall conform to BSEN 60439-1:1994 and EN 60898.

Distribution boards shall incorporate plug-in type miniature circuit breakers of tripping characteristics
B, C or D for lighting, miscellaneous power or motor loads as necessary complete as specified and as
shown on the drawings and to the approval of Engineer.

Main breakers of all main breaker type distribution boards shall be plug in type miniature circuit
breaker or bolt-on molded case type circuit breaker as shown on the drawings.

2.0 CABINETS AND FRONTS

The distribution board bus assembly shall be enclosed in a galvanized sheet steel cabinet. Cabinet
shall be of sufficient size to provide a minimum gutter space of 10 cm on all sides. The thickness of the
sheet steel shall be minimum 1.5 mm.

Fronts shall include doors and have flush, brushed stainless steel cylinder tumbler-type locks with
catches and spring loaded door pulls. The flush lock shall not protrude beyond the front of the door.
All distribution board locks shall be keyed alike. Fronts shall have adjustable indicating trim clamps
which shall be completely concealed when the doors are closed. Fronts shall have approved
directories with name of panel, number of phases, wires and voltage written on them.

Doors shall be mounted by completely concealed steel hinges. Fronts shall not be removable with
door in the locked position. A circuit directory card shall provide a space at least 0.5 cm high x 7 cm
long or equivalent for each circuit.

The directory shall be typed to identify the load fed by each circuit.

Fronts shall be of code gauge, full finished steel with rust-inhibiting primer and baked enamel finish.
Color shall be gray to ANSI No. 61, BS 381 C or approved equal.

Joints shall be welded, galvanized and reinforced where necessary and galvanized after fabrication.

3.0 DISTRIBUTION BOARD BUS ASSEMBLY

Bus for connections to the branch circuit breakers shall be the "Distributed Phase" or "Phase
Sequence" Type.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 46/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Three-phase, four-wire bussing shall be such that any three adjacent single-pole breakers are
individually connected to each of the three different phases in such a manner that two or three pole
breakers can be installed at any location. All current carrying parts of the bus assembly shall be
plated.
Main and neutral buses shall be minimum 98 percent purity, rectangular copper bars, provided with
bolted-type lugs as necessary.

Buses of miniature circuit breaker distribution boards shall be suitably braced for a minimum short
circuit duty equal to 10,000 Amps unless otherwise indicated.

Buses shall be rigidly supported and insulated and be so designed that branch circuits can be
removed without disturbing adjacent units or changed without additional machining, drilling or tapping.

Necessary bussing, drilling and blank plates shall be provided for installation of future circuits when so
indicated in the Schedules on the Drawings.

All screws and bolts used for making copper connections shall be equipped with lock washers.
Rivetted connections will not be acceptable.

Mains shall be equipped with solderless pressure indent type connectors and have means to prevent
swiveling of connector.

Neutral terminal strip shall be full size and shall incorporate one neutral terminal for each single pole
and neutral way.

Aluminum shall not be used for any interior parts of the distribution board.
Back pan or mounting on which buses and branches are mounted shall be rigid to properly support the
component parts.

Reinforcing of back pan shall be by flanging or addition of angle iron.

Buses, connectors, and terminals shall be silver plated to a minimum thickness of 0.1 mm.

4.0 SPLIT BUS DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

Split bus distribution board shall incorporate a main switch or circuit breaker for the entire distribution
board and two or more sub-main earth leakage circuit breakers that shall protect each section of the
distribution board circuits against earth leakage.

The wiring of circuits consisting of wire sizes 10mm 2 and larger shall be of the bolted pressure type,
with a pre-insulated sleeve.

Connectors shall be manufactured from high conductivity copper, electro tin-plated.

5.0 EARTHING

An acceptable terminal bar for equipment earthing conductors shall be provided with a
minimum number of cable terminations equal to the single pole number of ways of the distribution
board.
A cable connection shall be made from the earth bar to the cable gland of the incoming feeder as
applicable.

Cabinet shall be provided with an earth connector welded to it.

6.0 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

All plug-in type and bolt-on molded case circuit breakers shall have trip settings, and number of poles,
as indicated on the Drawings. All circuit breakers shall have their ampere trip rating clearly marked
and visible.

Breakers shall have quick-make, quick-break, toggle mechanisms; and shall provide positive trip-
free operation on abnormal overloads. Stationary and movable contacts shall be adequately

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 47/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

protected with effective and rapid arc interruption. Each pole of the breaker shall be equipped with
an inverse time delay thermal overcurrent trip element and magnetic instantaneous overcurrent trip
elements for common tripping of all poles for multiple breakers. Multiple pole breakers shall have
single handle mechanism. Automatic tripping shall be indicated by the breaker handle assuming a
clearly distinctive position from the manual ON and OFF position.
Miniature circuit breakers shall provide tripping characteristics in accordance with EN 60898 in an
ambient temperature of 40 °C. in accordance with the latest amendment.

Circuit breakers shall have minimum RMS symmetrical interrupting capacities equal to 10,000 Amps at
400 V for miniature circuit breakers and capacities equal to the values indicated in the drawings for
molded case circuit breakers, and shall in no case be less than the busbar short circuit bracing of the
distribution board:

Molded case circuit breakers shall have frame sizes equal to or greater than their trip ratings unless
otherwise indicated and shall be suitable for operation at an ambient temperature of 50 °C.

7.0 CURRENT LIMITING CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Current limiting circuit breakers shall have a maximum interrupting rating of 100 KA rms symmetrical
amperes. All circuit breakers shall be UL listed and meet NEMA Standard No. AB1-1975, and Federal
Specification W-C-375B/GEN where applicable.

Current limiting circuit breakers shall be supplied in unit molded case construction and shall consist of
a common trip, thermal magnetic circuit breaker with an independently operating limiter section in
series with each pole.

The conventional breaker section shall have an over center, trip-free toggle-type mechanism with
quick make, quick break action and positive handle indication. A button shall be provided on the cover
for mechanically tripping the circuit breaker. The current limiting breaker shall have permanent trip
units containing individual thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. The thermal trip element
shall be calibrated for 50oC ambient temperature.

The limiter section shall consist of three current limiting elements electrically coordinated with the
conventional circuit breaker trip elements. The contacts of the limiter section shall be
electromagnetically and electro-dynamically opened and held open until interruption is complete. The
unit shall not contain replaceable elements and the limiter shall automatically reset after circuit
interruption.

On high level fault currents the limiter portion of the circuit breaker shall operate to limit the rise of fault
current. Integral resistance shall be introduced into faulted circuit to dissipate and limit let-through
energy and to provide a voltage transient-free interruption at rear unity power factor.

The current limiting circuit breaker shall have front removable lugs. Lugs shall be UL listed for copper
conductors.

8.0 EARTH LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Each leakage circuit breakers shall be current operated type providing protection against overloads,
short circuit, and low level earth faults of 30 mA, 100 mA or 300 mA as applicable or as shown on the
drawings.

It shall fit in standard distribution boards.

A push-to-test mechanism shall be provided to ensure proper operation.

Enclosure shall be glass reinforced.

Breaker shall have 6000A interrupting capacity unless otherwise indicated.

Breaker shall otherwise be similar to miniature circuit breakers.

9.0 DISTRIBUTION BOARD INSTALLATION

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 48/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Distribution board shall be aligned, leveled and securely fastened to the building.
Connecting conduits shall not be used to support the distribution board.

All unused openings in distribution board cabinets shall be properly closed.

Distribution board interiors shall not be installed in cabinets until all conduit connections to the cabinet
have been completed.

Trim for flush mounted cabinets shall be installed in plaster frame, flush with finished wall.

Trim shall be installed plumb and square to finish painting.

Concealed surfaces of cabinets shall be given on site a heavy application of emulsified asphalt prior to
installation.

10.0 SHOP DRAWINGS

The Contractor shall submit shop drawings for the switchboards including schematic diagrams with all
protective devices, control, instruments and instrument transformers details, dimensions of the
assembly, etc. A copy of these approved shop drawings shall also be submitted to the local power
authorities for final approval. Any modification required by the Engineer or the local power authorities
to allow the equipment to comply with the codes, standards and specifications called of herein before
shall be carried out without additional charges.

11.0 APPLICABLE STANDARDS

1. Requirements for type tested or - BSEN 60439-1 1994

partially type tested assemblies - EN 60898

2. Specification for color identification- BS 381 C: 1988

END OF SUB-SECTION

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 49/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

SUB-SECTION 17060
INSTRUMENTS AND METERING

1.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

All Electrical indicating instruments shall comply with BS 89 and shall have an accuracy class index
as follows:

Function Accuracy Class Index

Switchboard Indicating Instrument 1.0

Ammeters and Voltmeters on Motor Control Panels 2.5

2.0 SELECTOR SWITCHES

Ammeter selector switch shall have four operating positions marked "R", "Y", "B", "N" and an "OFF"
position on a 3 phase, 4 wire supply system. The selector switch shall enable to read the current in
each phase and neutral in sequence.

On, 3 wire system, ammeter selector switch shall have these operating positions marked "R", "Y", "B"
and an "OFF" position. Ammeter selector switch shall have make-before-break cutouts and shall be
connected so that associated current transformers are short circuited where they are not connected to
ammeters.

Voltmeters selector switches, operating on 3 phase 4 wire system. Shall have six operating positions
marked "R-Y", "Y-B", "B-R", "R-N", "Y-N", "B-N" and an "OFF" position. Voltmeter switches shall have
"break-before-make" cutouts.

All labeling shall be in English and Arabic.

3.0 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

All current transformers shall comply with all relevant requirements defined in BS 3938 and
shall have an accuracy class designation according to the following table:

Function
. Accuracy Class Designation

Tariff metering 0.5

Non Tariff metering 1.0

Switchboard indicating instruments 1.0

Motor starter ammeters 3.0

Current transformers designed for measurement circuits or for protection circuits shall not be used
dual purpose role serving both measuring instruments and protection gear.
All CT's shall be of the ring type. Wound primary CT's shall only be accepted where the rated primary
current is so low as to make ring type CT's impracticable.

One side of the secondary of each CT shall be connected to earth at one point via a bolted removable
link.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 50/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

For metering circuits a front panel CT test block or a "shortening" terminal within the panel shall be
provided for test purposes.
All CT's included for use at voltage exceeding 1000 volts shall be epoxy resin encapsulated.

Dual ratio CT's shall have two separate secondary windings capable of being connected in series or
in parallel to give the designed ratio.

Magnetization curves and/or type test certificate shall be provided for all CT's associated with
protective devices.

Each CT shall have a rated burden 50 percent greater that the total burden of the instruments, relays,
etc. which they serve.

All CT's shall have a rating plate bearing the information as stipulated in BS 7626.1993.

4.0 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER

Voltage transformer shall be of the type, rating and voltage ratios as specified in the schedules or as
indicated in the drawings.
All voltage transformers shall have an accuracy class designation according to the following table:

Function Accuracy Class Designation

Metering 1.0
.
Switchboard indicating instruments 1.0

Motor starter ammeters 3.0

.

Voltage transformers shall comply with all relevant requirements of BS 7625: 1993 and shall be
suitable for use in the specified service condition.

Voltage transformers designed for primary voltage less than 4000 volts shall be air insulated type with
winding encapsulated in epoxy resin or other suitable synthetic material.

Each voltage transformer shall have a rated burden at least 50 percent higher that the total burden of
the apparatus or instruments it serves.

The insulation resistances of each voltage transformer shall be indelibly marked on the
shipping/dispatch label.

1306E Meters

All single phase and 3-phase integrating meters like watt-hour meter, Kwh meter, maximum demand
meter. KVARh meter shall comply with all relevant requirements of DEWA.

Polyphase meters registering maximum demand in kilowatts or (MW) shall comply with BSEN
60521:1995 as applicable. They shall operate on the basis of 30 minutes demand integration period.
Provision for transmission of data to external devices shall be made for the following:
1) Kilowatt - hour consumption.
2) Kilowatt - maximum demand
3) Time reset pulse for maximum demand.

All meters covered in the preceding clauses shall have an accuracy class designation of 2.5 or better.
All Three phase meters shall be suitable for operation on a 4-wire system with unbalanced load.

6.0 TERMINALS

Cable terminals shall be suitable for the specified cable sizes. Adequate space shall be provided for
cable terminations.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 51/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Terminal blocks shall be made of thermosetting melamine or polyamide material with good flame
resistance. Terminal blocks shall withstand a temperature rise of 90o C above the ambient tem-
perature. Cable terminals shall have permanent label fitted to each terminal, for indication of its
purpose. The terminal marking shall be in accordance with BS 5472 (EN 50005).

Termination of standard cables shall be done by using copper or copper alloy ferrules of sizes
suitable for accommodating all strands of the cable.

All auxiliary wiring except screened cables shall be connected to incoming/outgoing cables via
insulated terminal blocks, screw/screw type, clipped on DIN rails. Sufficient spare space shall be
allowed on the DIN rails for addition of terminal blocks in the future.

Termination of screened cables shall be done by using plugs and fixed sockets.

All terminal blocks shall be mounted at minimum 20cms above the base of floor mounted assemblies.

1306G Applicable Standards

1) Specification for Electrical measuring instruments - BS 89 :1990.

2) Specification for Voltage Transformers - BS 7625 : 1993.
3) Specification for Current Transformer - BS 7626 : 1993.
4) Specification for Watthour Meters - BSEN 60521 : 1995.
5) Specification for Terminals - BS 5472, EN 50005.

END OF SUB-SECTION

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 52/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

SUB-SECTION 17070
CAPACITOR BANK

1.0 GENERAL

The contractor shall supply, install and connect a complete Capacitor Bank with control equipment for
automatically controlling the connection and disconnection of capacitances in response to changes in
the load power factor. The bank shall be free standing individual unit or part of the switchboard as
indicated on the Drawings. The bank shall provide a complete automatic regulation of the connected
capacitor power at peak and off peak times.

The bank shall be fully assembled and internally connected. All equipment shall be suitable for
continuous operation within the specified ambient conditions.

The bank shall be fully complying with DEWA requirements.

The capacitor banks shall comprise one cubicle for protection and control equipment and steel racks
for the capacitor units.

A discharge resistor shall be fitted in the terminal box of each capacitor unit.

The set of equipment for one capacitor 'step' shall comprise one triple pole contactor and a three
phase fuse unit with fuses.

The cubicle shall contain busbars for the main supply cable, terminal blocks for leads for the current
transformer, control lead fuses. A reactive power regulator, together with capacitor step indicator
lamps shall be mounted on the door of the cubicle.

The equipment ratings shall be selected to give a generous margin to withstand the high capacitor
currents due to harmonics on the system voltage.

The equipment shall comply with BSEN 55014:1993 with respect to electro- magnetic radio
interference.

2.0 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS

Capacitors shall be of proven and established design. Capacitors shall conform to IEC-831-1, 2 and
amendment 2.

Capacitor elements shall comprise a winding of metalized film dielectric and incorporate an internal
fuse link. All resin encapsulated and mounted in plastic container. All capacitors shall be self healing.

Capacitors shall be low loss type. Losses shall be less than 0.5 watts per KVAR.

Capacitors shall have a dielectric voltage rating of 480 V 3 phase, 50 HZ.

Capacitor units shall comprise of a sheet steel enclosure incorporating a number of capacitor
elements. The enclosure shall be filled with granules or suitable proven alternative to absorb the
energy of any major element failure.
Unit of equal capacitance shall be interchangeable.

Every capacitor shall be capable of operating for prolonged periods, without damage, at voltage 10
percent higher than the rated voltage.

All capacitors shall be capable of operating without damage under conditions in which the current
through it has an R.M.S. value exceeding by 15 percent the current corresponding to the rated
(sinusoidal) voltage and frequency.

Each capacitor shall be labeled to warn of possible voltage damages.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 53/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

3.0 PROTECTION

The capacitor banks shall be equipped with dust-tight, hose-proof terminal boxes, to IP55.
The surface treatment of the capacitor units and the cubicles shall be suitable for outdoor installation.
The sheet-metal surface shall be treated with primer and finished in two-component baked enamel.

The control equipment cubicle shall be provided with ventilation openings if used in door only. Each
cubicle and all of the equipment within it shall be so arranged that every item of apparatus is readily
accessible of adjustment, where this may be necessary and for maintenance.

4.0 POWER FACTOR REGULATOR

The power factor regulator shall be microprocessor based and shall be programmable at site. The
Power Factor Regulator program shall permit different switching circuits depending upon the targeted
phase angle. Regulator operation shall be insensitive to harmonics and shall have an automatic no-
volt release suitable for operation in temperature up to 70deg. C.

The power factor regulator shall have "AUTOMATIC" or "MANUAL" control facility. The desired
power factor shall be adjustable from 0.9 capacitive to 0.7 inductive. Capacitor switching time shall
be adjustable from 1 to 99 seconds.

The regulator shall be flush mounted in the adjustable door and shall have built in digital power factor
meter and fault indicator. LED indications shall be provided to indicate Number of steps switched on,
Capacitive or Inductive load.

The power factor regulator shall have means to adapt itself to network phase rotation and reversal of
current transformer terminals.

5.0 PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

The power factor regulator shall continuously sense (The reactive power) of the circuit being
considered for power factor correction. If the computed power factor differs from the targeted factor
for more than 10 seconds, the regulator shall switch a contactor to switch into or out of the circuit.
Contactors shall be opened or closed as required to bring the circuit power factor closer to the
targeted one.

Only one capacitor shall be switched at a time.

6.0 CONTACTORS

Contactors used in capacitor bank circuits shall be suitable for capacitor switching duty and shall
withstand large transient current peaks at high frequency. The contactors shall have a life time of
minimum 100,000 operations under capacitor switching conditions. Contactors shall be rated for
1.5times the normal rated current of the capacitors. The contactors shall conform to IEC 947-4-1.

7.0 FUSES

Three phase high rupture capacity fuses shall be provided for each capacitor step. Fuses shall be
modern industrial design, current limiting type with a breaking capacity exceeding 100 KA.

Fuses shall be confirmed to the requirement of IEC 269.

The utilization category of the fuses shall be gG. They shall be plug-in type with proper fuse handle to
ensure the safety of operating personnel.

8.0 CAPACITOR BANK SCHEDULE

1. Equipment Reference :

2. Location :

3. Arrangement :

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 54/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

4. Total output KVAr

- Each step size (Max). :

- Number of steps :

5. Harmonics in system

- Estimated percentage :

6. Main protective device

- Type :
- Rating (in Amps) :
7. Current transformer
- Ratio :
- Location :

8. Enclosure :
- Mounting arrangement :
- IP rating :
- Colour :

9.0 APPLICABLE STANDARDS

- Radio frequency interference suppression as BSEN 55014:1993.

END OF SUB-SECTION

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 55/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

SUB-SECTION 17080
METERS

1.0 GENERAL

The contractor shall provide all provisions required for installation of Kilowatt-hour meters and
intelligent metering system as per Latest DEWA requirements.

The Contractor shall provide as required herein. All necessary supports shall be provided to the
approval of the Engineer.

2.0 RATINGS

Direct connected ampere rating shall be as shown on the Drawings with high overload capacity and
long range capability.

3.0 PHASE ROTATION & ACCURACIES

Phase sequence reversal shall have negligible effect on the accuracy of the kWh meters described;
Meters shall be approved by the Local Electrical Authorities and shall comply with British Standard BS
5685: Part 1 and other relevant parts of this standard as indicated below:

kWh meters Part 4 (IEC 43)

Maximum demand meters Part 5 (IEC 211)

4.0 HOUSE SERVICE CASE

The case shall be formed from high impact black phenolic resin moldings; base and terminal block
moldings from a single unit. The cover shall be secured to the base by three captive screws while a
cord gasket of large section shall ensure a dust-tight joint. The standard terminal cover shall fit
flush with the terminal block, alternatively an extended cover shall be available which shall shroud
the service cables. Both cover and terminal cover screws shall have facility for sealing.

Meter terminal shall be loose inserts fitted from inside the meter into cavities in the terminal block;
molded barriers between terminals shall provide adequate anti-creep surfaces. Terminal shall be
made of brass and shall be heavily plated to inhibit corrosion. Terminal holes shall be minimum 8mm
diameter up to 50 amperes rating and 12.7 mm diameter for the 100 ampere rating. The 100 ampere
rating shall be specially designed to cope with high current flow through combination of the use
of copper, machine finished terminations and heavy duty plated brass inserts in the terminal block.
Terminal blocks shall have connection facilities for a wide range of tariff metering. A diagram of
connections shall be fixed inside the terminal cover.

5.0 SWITCHBOARD CASE

The switchboard draw-out pattern case shall be supplied for either flush or projection mounted as
approved. The meter main frame element shall be secured to a cradle that can be withdrawn from the
case to allow the meter to be inspected or serviced. A high pressure shall be maintained between the
case and cradle contacts to ensure negligible contact resistance.

Terminals connected to current transformer secondaries shall have shorting switches which
automatically close as the cradle is withdrawn from its case.

A diagram of internal connections shall be fixed inside the meter case.

6.0 FRAME AND ELEMENTS

A rigid die casting of high quality silicon aluminum alloy shall form the main frame to which the meter
elements shall be secured. Each element shall have a torque balance, a low load and an inductive
load calibration adjuster: these shall be all linear in effect and shall be readily accessible. Protection
against corrosion shall be given by electro-painting the frame and elements to produce a durable
synthetic resin coating.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 56/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

7.0 METER COILS

The voltage and current coils shall be encapsulated in polypropylene (except for 100A current coils
where epoxy resin shall be used). Encapsulation shall protect the meter against high voltage surges
resulting from electrical storms and system transients, in addition to rendering the coils waterproof.
Voltage coils shall be machine wound in a polyurethane coated wire. Current coils shall be wound
from large section copper strip designed to provide a wide load range by withstanding continuous
overloads.

8.0 BEARINGS

The weight of the rotor shall be supported by a symmetrical magnetic field set up by fixed and moving
high coercively permanent magnets, leaving only small transverse forces to be contained by fixed pin
and guide bearings at each end of the rotor shaft.

Guide pins shall be of polished stainless steel running in guide precision molded from specially
selected low friction material.

Temperature compensation for the magnets shall be provided over a temperature range of - 20 °C to
+ 60 ° C.

9.0 ROTOR SYSTEM

The rotor disc shall be light and rigid and shall be die-cast or molded to an aluminum alloy shaft. For
stroboscopic calibration 500 serrations shall cut in the edge of the disc and for testing purposes the
upper surface shall have 100 and 240 division concentric circles marked in black round the periphery.
Two anti-creep holes in the disc shall prevent rotation on voltage alone. A non-reverse device shall
be fitted to the rotor shaft to prevent the meter from registering under reverse power flow conditions.
A highly polished worm cut in the rotor shaft shall form the register drive.

10.0 BRAKE MAGNET

A bi-polar brake magnet unit mounted in die-cast aluminum alloy housing shall be provided. Two
Alcomax bar magnets shall be employed, producing a uniform field which shall be symmetrical about
the centre line of the disc gap, thus minimizing the effect of disc height variations.

11.0 REGISTERS

Three types of interchangeable register shall be possible to be fitted to polyphase meters, the final
choice being left to the Engineer:

a) Large jumping figure cyclometer.

b) Continuously driven cyclometer.
c) Pointer pattern.

All forms of register shall have precision molded lightweight gears which shall give strength with
extremely low frictional effects. Gear wheels and pinions shall be molded on to hard drawn and
polished stainless steel shafts.

Mouldings shall extend along the shafts to provide end shake shoulders and low friction surfaces
against the metal support plates. Register dials shall be clearly marked in the appropriate units.

12.0 MAXIMUM DEMAND INDICATOR (APPLICABLE TO MAX. DEMAND METERS)

The Merz pattern maximum demand indicator shall give an accurate reading of average demand
over the chosen integration period. A small red pointer geared to the rotor shall drive a large black
indicating pointer up scale. At the end of each period a built-in electromagnetic actuator shall be de-
energized to allow the driving pointer to return to zero. The demand indicator pointer, held at its
highest reading by a light ratchet spring shall be possible to be reset zero by the push button mounted
in the cover. The integration period may be 5, 10, 15, 20 or 30 minutes as controlled by an
external or synchronous internal time switch. An alternative to the electromagnetic actuator shall be
available in the form of a self contained mechanical release to the approval of the Engineer. The

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 57/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

complete demand indicator mechanism shall be possible to be removed without disturbing the units
register.

13.0 METER ADJUSTMENTS

A self locking micrometer full load adjuster screw shall be fitted to the brake magnet unit. Total range
of adjustment shall be 6%.

Each element shall have a special resistor with a sliding adjuster clamp for inductive load adjustment.
Total range of adjustment shall be 5% at 0.5 lagging power factor.

Adjustment for torque balance shall be made by moving two magnetic diverts across the voltage core
leakage gap of each element (The self voltage core leakage gap of each element). The self locking
adjuster locking adjuster gives a total adjustment of 10% change in speed of the element

Adjustment for low load shall be made by moving a conductive vane across the electromagnet gap
using the self locking adjuster screw. Total range of adjustment shall be 20% at 5% of marked
balanced load.

14.0 ATTACHMENTS

The Kwh meters shall accept without increase in case size any or all of the following attachments:

1. Non-reverse device preventing reversal of rotation with direction of power flow.

2. Transmitting unit providing a pulse or switched output to a summator, data processing unit, etc.

3. Two rate register with two sets of continuously driven number wheels to register units consumed
during peak and off-peak periods.

4. Maximum demand indicator Merz pattern with 30cm long scale giving an accurate reading of
average demand over a chosen integration period. Reset by self-contained or external timing
device.

5. Maximum demand alarm unit

A maximum demand indicator (4) fitted with adjustable alarm contacts to initiate an alarm or trip
off non-essential load when a predetermined value is reached.
1309N Applicable Standards

- Specification for Electricity meters - BS 5685.

END OF SUB-SECTION

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 58/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

SUB-SECTION 17100
CONDUITS AND FITTINGS

1.0 GENERAL

The Contractor shall supply and install a complete conduit system for all electric and low current
systems as shown on the Drawings and as herein specified. The system shall include conduits,
fittings (couplings, bends, boxes, cover plates, reducers, adaptors, etc.) and all necessary parts to
install a complete conduit system.

Conduits and fittings shall be distinctively marked as manufactured for electrical purposes.

Conduit runs are shown diagrammatically to outline the general routing of the system. The installation
shall be made to avoid interfering with pipes, ducts, structural members, or other equipment. Should
structural or other interferences prevent the installation of the conduits, or setting of boxes, cabinets,
or other electrical equipment, as indicated on the Drawings, deviations must be approved by the
Engineer, and after approval, shall be made without additional charges. The number of conduits shall
not be less than that indicated on the Drawings.

Conduits and conduit fittings shall be so designed and constructed that they ensure reliable
mechanical protection to the cables contained therein, and shall withstand the stresses likely to occur
during transport, storage and installation. They shall be marked with the marker's name or trade mark.
Marking shall be indelible and easily legible.

Conduits shall have a minimum 20 mm (outer diameter) size and shall be adequate for proper and
easy wire pulls, and in no case shall the wires occupy a cross-sectional area of more than 30% of
the inner conduit cross-section.

The inside and outside surfaces of conduits shall be smooth and free from burrs, flash, and similar
defects. Thickness of wall shall be uniform.

The interior and ends of conduit fittings shall have no sharp edges; surface and corners over which
the cables are likely to be drawn shall be smooth and well rounded.

Conduits and fittings shall have adequate mechanical strength. Conduit when bent or compressed,
or exposed to impact or extreme temperatures, either during or after installation, shall show no
cracks and shall not be deformed to such an extent that introduction of the cables are likely to be
damaged while being drawn in.

Conduit entries of fittings shall be so designed that a reliable joint can be made between the conduit
and the fittings.

Conduits and fittings shall be BS tested or approved equal.

All accessories and fittings such as bends, straps, double straps, junction boxes, bushes, etc. shall be
provided as required.

2.0 CONDUITS - METALLIC

Conduits shall be constructed from solid drawn mild steel, outside and inside galvanized and shall
comply with BS 4568 Part 1 & 2.

The galvanized coat of zinc shall be of uniform thickness applied to outside and inside including the
threads.

Each conduit shall be straight, free from blisters and other defects, cut square and taper reamed,
furnished with coupling in standard lengths, threaded each end.

Couplings shall be applied at one end of each conduit and color coded plastic threaded protectors to
the other end. The interior threaded surface of each coupling shall be galvanized to ensure 100%
galvanic protection on all surfaces.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 59/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

The galvanized coating shall be of such quality and uniformity that a sample of the galvanized
conduit will not show a fixed deposit of copper after four immersions of dips in a standard copper
sulphate solution.

The galvanized coating on the conduit shall be sufficiently elastic to prevent cracking or flaking when
a sample of finished conduit is bent 90 degrees at a minimum temperature of 15 degrees centigrade.

3.0 CONDUITS AND FITTINGS-NON-METALLIC

Non-metallic conduits shall be heavy gauge, high impact rigid PVC Type A (Metric) or Type AH
(Imperial) unless otherwise indicated, having a maximum continuous service temperature of 70
degree C or more. Conduits and fittings shall comply with BS EN 61386-21:

4.0 CONDUITS - FLEXIBLE

Flexible conduit shall be constructed by square locked galvanized steel with a PVC outer covering.

5.0 BOXES - METALLIC

Boxes shall be constructed of cast metal as specified hereinafter.

Boxes used for hanging fixtures shall be suitable for ceiling roses. Boxes for installation in concrete
shall be concrete tight. Shallow boxes shall not be used unless building construction is such that it is
impossible to use standard depth boxes.

Boxes shall be constructed of feraloy cad/zinc electroplated with aluminum cellulose lacquered.

Blank covers shall be constructed of sheet steel with gasket and stainless steel screws except for
damp and wet locations.

In damp and wet locations blank covers shall be constructed from cast feraloy with gasket and
stainless steel screws.

Floor boxes shall be water tight one piece cast iron color-coated inside and out for additional
corrosion resistance. Treaded steel cover shall be electro-galvanized. Boxes shall have adjusting
screws.

6.0 BOXES - NON-METALLIC

Boxes shall be standard PVC as specified under Conduits & Fittings or phenolic material except for
recess lighting outlets which shall be High Degree type.

High Degree type boxes shall be manufactured from Noryl, a thermoplastic with a higher
softening temperature. Boxes shall withstand 10kg load directly suspended at 100 C for 24 hours.

Boxes shall incorporate pillars with threaded steel inserts.

All boxes shall be provided with earth terminals.

7.0 INSTALLATION OF CONDUITS

Conduits embedded in ceiling slab, in walls and under floor shall be non-metallic type.

Conduits exposed above false ceiling shall be non metallic type.

Exposed conduits other than above false ceiling shall be rigid steel type.

All conduit work and plastering shall be complete before wires are pulled in unless otherwise
permitted by the Engineer. Conduit shall be plugged with cork and boxes covered appropriately to
avoid filling with plaster.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 60/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Conduit runs between outlets shall not contain more than three quarter bends or equivalent.
The maximum run between two outlets shall not exceed 25 meters for straight runs and 10 meters
for runs with one or more bends. Pull (draw in) boxes shall be provided otherwise whether so
indicated on the Drawings or not. Location of pull boxes shall be approved by the Engineer.

Conduits shall be installed without causing any damage to the structural members.

All bends shall be carefully made to prevent distortion of the circular cross-section. Bends made on
site in conduits shall have an inside radius of not less than nine diameters.

Where bends of less than nine diameters are necessary, standard factory elbows shall be used:
however the conduit size chosen shall be such as to permit a cable-bending radius within the
factory elbow of at least eight times the cable diameter.

Conduits in slabs shall be placed parallel to the main reinforcement steel in the slab.
Conduits in slabs shall be installed as close to the middle of the concrete slabs as practicable without
disturbing the reinforcement. The outside diameter shall not exceed one third of the slab
thickness, otherwise the Contractor shall install the cable exposed on the concrete slab by approved
method according to site conditions. Conduits shall be placed not closer than three diameters on
centers.

Top of any conduit in slabs shall be at least 2 cm below the finishes floor surface, unless otherwise
indicated or authorized.

Conduits in slabs running parallel to beam axis shall not run above beams.

8.0 EXPOSED CONDUITS

Exposed conduits shall be installed parallel or at right angles to walls and ceiling beams. All changes
in direction shall be made as far as possible with approved bends, elbows, and pull boxes. The
spacing between parallel runs shall be uniform throughout. Unless otherwise indicated conduits
shall be held securely in place by standard factory spacer bar saddles, spaced not more than
1.5, 2.0 and 2.4 meters for 20mm, 25mm and 32mm and larger conduit sizes respectively for
metallic conduits and at 1 meter for non-metallic conduits.

Unless otherwise indicated, raceways exposed above false ceilings shall be supported from the
slab above the ceiling in the same manner as exposed raceways. Raceways shall not be supported
from false ceiling supports.

Couplings, expansion couplings, strap saddles, spacer bar saddles, spring clip saddles, conduit
clips, adaptors, etc. shall all be standard factory conduit accessories.

Flexible metallic conduits shall be used only for connections to motors, or to other equipment
subject to vibration or adjustment. Each connection shall contain at least one quarter bend so
that no vibration can be transmitted behind the flexible connection. Flexible PVC conduits shall be
used to make connections to lighting fixtures in false ceiling.

In damp and wet locations all couplings, expansion coupling, strap saddles, spacer bar saddles,
spring clip saddles, conduits clips, screws, adaptors shall be corrosion proof, approved for use in
damp and wet locations.

In damp and wet locations flexible conduits shall be liquid tight.

In damp and wet locations the entire conduiting system, including boxes, fittings, distribution
boards etc. shall be mounted so that there is at least 7 mm air space between it and the wall
supporting surface.

All conduits shall be carefully cleaned before and after installation. All ends shall be reamed free from
burrs, and inside surfaces shall be free from all imperfections likely to injure the cable.

After installations of each complete new conduit run, the run shall be snaked with a band to
which shall be attached an approved tube cleaner equipped with an approved cylindrical mandrel of

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 61/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

a diameter not less than 85 percent of the nominal diameter of the conduit. All conduits
through which the mandrel will not pass shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his own
expense.

All field cuts in conduits shall be square, and cut ends shall be filed and shall have burrs removed. An
insulating bushing shall be installed on each end of conduit, unless the connector is designed to
prevent contact with the cut end. All connections shall be mechanically strong and tight, and
made up properly with approved connectors. No running threads shall be permitted.

Conduits for TV system shall have at least 10 cm bending radius. Two bends might be necessary for
the transition from floor to wall.

9.0 INSTALLATION OF BOXES

Boxes of ample capacity shall be provided at every junction of conduit system and as required by the
Specifications.

All boxes shall be securely fastened.

Blank plates shall be installed on outlet boxes in which no apparatus is installed, or the apparatus
installed does not provide suitable cover for box.

Device boxes shall be used for all wiring devices.

Non-metallic boxes shall be used only for concealed conduit work, and for conduit work above false
ceiling.

Exposed boxes for switches, socket outlets and other devices shall be cast metal boxes.

Cast metal boxes shall be installed in such a manner that the conduit connections and the gasketed
cover are dust tight. All unused openings shall be closed with pipe plugs and compound.

Boxes for similar equipment shall be mounted at uniform height within the same or similar area.
Mounting shall be as shown on the Drawings.

Device box shapes and sizes shall be determined by the type and size of wiring devices for which
they serve.

Boxes fixed inside false ceiling shall be provided with mounting brackets for rigid fixing to
structure members or other means of support.

10.0 SLEEVES

Sleeves shall be provided for exposed conduit or cables passing through interior floor slabs and walls.
All openings shall be sealed with mastic compound. The compound shall not cause any corrosion or
harmful effects to the conduit. Sleeves passing through floor slabs shall be flush with the bottom of
the slab, extend approximately 3cm above the surface of the floor and be watertight between sleeves
and floor slab.

Sleeves passing through exterior walls and slabs shall be wall entrance seals of watertight
construction. They shall be watertight between slab and sleeve, and between sleeve and conduit and
cable. These wall entrance seals shall be of malleable iron with black paint finish and PVC sleeve,
with a watertight sealing gland.

Sealing gland design shall be such that they may be tightened any time after installation. Wall
entrance seals shall have oversized sleeves of proper length to position the sealing-gland housing
with the wall faces.

After the cable has been pulled through the duct, a seal shall be made round it, within the duct with a
bituminous mastic compound, making the seal watertight.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 62/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

11.0 ADHESIVES AND JOINTS

Conduits shall be jointed and terminated utilizing the appropriate components as supplied by the
conduit manufacturer.

Permanent adhesives to produce a rigid watertight joint shall be used with standard couplers and
accessories.

A flexible (non-hardening) adhesive shall be used where expansion facilities are required.

12.0 EXPANSION JOINTS

Expansion coupling shall be provided at every 6 meter run of exposed conduit work, at expansion
joints or as required to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction of both exposed and
embedded conduits.

1310N Applicable Standards

- Specification for Metallic Conduits BS 4568 Part 1 & 2.
- Specification for Non-metallic Rigid Conduits BS 4607 Part 2:1991.

END OF SUB-SECTION

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 63/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

SUB-SECTION 17120
WIRES AND CABLES

1.0 GENERAL

The Contractor shall supply, install and connect all wires and cables necessary for complete electrical
system, as indicated on the drawings, as required and as specified herein.

Current ratings for calculating the size of the underground cables shall be those contained in the
relevant tables of ERA report No. 69-30, part I, II, III or IV, as may be appropriate to the type of cable
being used. The ratings shall be and adjusted where necessary to comply with the recommendations
of ERA report No. F/T186.

2.0 SINGLE CORE AND MULTI-CORE ARMORED CABLES

Cables shall be single or multi-core as described in the schedules or indicated on the drawings.

Cables shall be armored and PVC sheathed. Multi-core cables shall be steel tape or single wire
armored and single core cables shall be aluminum strip armored.

The core insulation of armored cables shall be colored as follows:

Cable Color
- Single core Black
- 2 core One black and one red
- 3 core Red, Yellow, blue
- 3 ½” core or 4 core Red, yellow, blue, black

Conductors shall be either plain or annealed tinned copper complying with BS 6360.

The insulation of the cable shall be PVC, polythene, XLPE, EPR or LSF materials as described in the
schedules or indicated on the drawings.

Armor shall consist of a single layer galvanized steel wire complying with BS 1442 or aluminum strip
complying with BS 2897.

3.0 WIRES & CABLES - LIGHTING & POWER

Conductors shall be of high conductivity annealed copper with concentric stranding for stranded
conductors, to BS 6360, or approved equal.
Minimum conductor size used shall not be less than 2.5 mm2.

All wires for lighting and power systems pulled inside conduits shall be single core, insulated with
PVC compound, of grade not less than 450/750 volts, to BS 6004.

Wires in boiler rooms (if any) shall be MICC Cables to BS 6207.

Armored cables shall be multi-core unless otherwise indicated, PVC sheathed, galvanized steel
wire or double tape armored and overall PVC extruded sheathed, of grade not less than 600/1000
volts to BS 6346.

Single core armored cable where used shall have a hard drawn aluminum wired armoring.

Conductors shall be solid-stranded.

Flexible cords for connection of fixtures to circuit-wiring shall have finely stranded copper Conductor
with PVC insulation, type NYFAF, 380 V grade.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 64/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

4.0 FLEXIBLE CORDS

Cords used for water heater connections shall be of high conductivity tinned copper wires, (2.5
mm2 unless otherwise indicated) insulated with ethylene propylene rubber, three cores twisted
together, filled and sheathed with chlorosulphonated polyethylene (EPR CSP), 300/500 V rated,
and shall withstand an operating temperature of 85 C, to BS 6500.

Cords used for pendant lighting points and between lighting outlet above false ceiling to lighting
fixture shall be circular three core (1.5 mm2) silicon rubber insulated, glass fiber braided 300/300
V rated, shall withstand an operating temperature of 150 C, to BS 6500.

Cords used for extract fans shall be of plain annealed copper conductor (1.5 mm2), PVC
insulated, circular three cores twisted together, PVC overall sheeted 300/500 V rated, shall
withstand an operating temperature of 70 C, to BS 6500.

Cords shall be manufactured by BICC (England), AEI (England) Pirelli (England), or approved equal.

5.0 WIRES AND CABLES - TELEPHONE

Wires and cables shall be supplied and installed to the approval of Local Telephone Company
(ETISALAT). The Contractor shall attend and afford all facilities to the Telephone Company and shall
take prior written approval of the adequacy of the proposed conduits for the telephone system before
installation of the conduit system.

6.0 CABLES - CENTRAL ANTENNA SYSTEM

Cables shall be coaxial type with inner conductor of solid accurately dimensioned electrolytic
copper, insulation of high grade solid polyethylene, outer conductor of a longitudinally
overlapping copper foil tightly enclosed in a copper-wire braiding, outer sheath of a pliable PVC.

Characteristic impedance shall be 75 ohms.

Inner conductor shall have a minimum of 0.7 mm diameter.
Overall diameter of cable shall not be less than 7 mm.
Cable shall have a tensile strength on outer conductor of 20 kgf for one minute.

7.0 CABLES - FIRE ALARM

Cables of fire alarm system shall be of the mineral insulated, metal sheeted type. Cable shall have a
highly compressed refractory mineral insulation (magnesium oxide) enclosed in a seamless copper
sheath, overall covered with PVC and shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and incompliance with BS 6387 Cat. SWX.

Alternatively "FP200" cables as manufactured by Pirelli (UK) or equal are also approved.
Cables shall have a minimum fire resistance complying with BS 6387 category Z.

Cable shall be supported at not more than 75 times the cable outer diameter intervals by means of
approved staples, straps, hangers or other fittings to building structure or to specially designed
brackets.

At termination points cable shall be provided with an approved seal immediately after stripping to
prevent entrance of moisture into the mineral insulation. When cable is connected to outlet boxes,
panels or fire alarm equipment, fittings shall be of the threaded-gland type with seals filled with an
insulating compound approved for the atmospheric and service conditions in which the cable is
used. Stripping of cable ends, installation of fittings, application of insulating compound, and
terminations shall be made according to manufacturer's instructions. Cables shall be embedded in
plaster where other conduit work is concealed.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 65/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

8.0 CONTROL CABLES

Control cables where used underground direct burial shall comprise stranded annealed copper
conductor of minimum 2 mm2 cross-section insulated with high dielectric polyvinyl chloride, nylon
sheathed with a tape binder applied over the assembly, overall PVC jacketed.
Number of conductors shall be equal to the maximum number of functions plus 20% spare.
Cable shall be 300/500V insulation grade.
Junction boxes shall include all necessary terminal connector boards with proper labels.

Contractor shall make sure that the cross-sectional area of the conductors are sufficient to
cater for the voltage drop due to the long runs involved.

Control cables where used in ducts underground or in conduits above ground shall comprise
stranded annealed copper conductor of minimum 2mm2 cross-section for cables in ducts and
0.75mm2 for cables in conduits insulated with high dielectric polyvinyl chloride, and PVC
sheathed.

9.0 INSTALLATION OF WIRES & CABLES

All wires shall be installed in accordance with the applicable provisions of the approved codes and as
indicated on the Drawings.

The number of wires and sizes of conduits indicated on the Drawings are a guide only and are not
necessarily the correct number and sizes necessary for the actual equipment installed. The
Contractor shall install as many wires and conduits as required and necessary for a complete
electrical system, and shall provide adequately for the equipment actually to be installed.

Where more than one conductor is used per phase, each phase, neutral if any and ground wires shall
be run in each metallic or non metallic conduit.

Conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and no splices shall be made except within outlet
or junction boxes.

At every outlet and pull box, wires and cables passing through, shall be left slack by an amount
equivalent to 15 cm of cable length to allow inspection and connection to be made therein.

No cable bend shall have a radius of less than eight times its diameter.

The Contractor shall not change any circuit number, especially from a phase to a different phase. If
such a change is necessary due to modification on site, the Contractor shall bring this matter to the
attention of the engineer.

All conductors to be contained within a single conduit shall be drawn in at the same time.

A wire pulling compound shall be applied to conductors being drawn through conduit. Pulling
compound shall be soap tone or other approved material.

Only cables forming part of a lift installation if any may be run in a lift shaft.

Wires and cables for feeders, sub-feeders, control, and branch circuit wiring shall be color coded as
follows:

Color Phase
Red A or 1
Yellow B or 2
Blue C or 3
Black Neutral
Green Equipment grounding

Wire and cable sizes shall be as indicated on the Drawings; however in no case shall their size be
smaller than required by the approved Code.
Unless otherwise indicated, no conductor for lighting and power wires shall be smaller than 2.5 mm2.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 66/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

All branch circuits for lighting and appliances shall be single conductor cables run inside conduits,
unless otherwise indicated.

Feeders and sub-feeders shall be either single conductor wires pulled inside conduits or multi-
conductor cables run exposed on walls or in trenches as shown on the Drawings.
Single cables shall be fixed directly to walls or ceilings. Where 2 or more cables are run in parallel,
they shall be fixed on galvanized steel perforated trays or on other approved special cable
supporting and protecting arrangement.

Cables shall be fixed to supporting structures with approved galvanized cast steel clamps at distances
not exceeding 20 diameters.

Armored cables used in vertical shafts shall be the steel wire armored and not the tape type.

No joints or splices shall be accepted on main feeders.

10.0 IDENTIFICATION OF WIRES & CABLES

Individual conductor or circuit identification shall be carried throughout, with circuit numbers or
other identification clearly stamped on terminal boards and printed on directory cards in
distribution cabinets and panel boards.

In junction boxes, cabinets, and terminal boxes where the total number of control, indicating, and
metering wires is three or fewer and no terminal board is provided, each wire including all
power wires, shall be properly identified by means of a plastic-coated, self-adhesive, wire marker.

Wires including motor leads and other power wires too large for connection to the terminal boards
shall be identified by wire markers as specified above.

In manholes, handholes, pull boxes, junction boxes and at both terminals each wire and cable
shall be properly identified by a laminated plastic tag located so as to be easily seen. Wires and
cables shall be identified by cable number indicated on the Drawings.

11.0 CONNECTORS AND TERMINAL BLOCKS

For the wiring of circuits consisting of wire sizes 6mm 2 and smaller such as for lighting branch circuits,
self-insulated pressure type connectors shall be utilized for all splices or joints.

For the wiring of circuits consisting of wire sizes 10mm 2 and larger shall be of the bolted pressure
type, with a pre-insulated sleeve.

Connectors shall be manufactured from high conductivity copper, electro tin-plated.

Connector bodies shall be manufactured from Polyamide.

12.0 CABLE LADDERS

Cable ladders shall be manufactured from 14 Swg Mild steel, with hot-dip galvanized finish.

All parts like flat elbows, offset reducers, straight reducers, cross pieces, tee pieces, drop outs, etc. as
well as accessories shall be furnished as to function, and to the manufacturers standards.

13.0 CABLE GLANDS

Cable glands shall be provided at the termination of armored cables at the enclosure of a distribution
board or any other equipment.

Whether installed indoors or outdoors, all cable glands shall provide protection to IP 55 as a
minimum.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 67/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Glands for armored cables shall be made of brass and incorporate an armor clamp and compression
type neoprene rubber seal over the inner sheath. For cable glands which may be exposed to rain or
spraying water (e.g. due to hosing down) an additional neoprene compression seal over the outer
sheath shall be also provided.

LSF0H WIRE AND CABLES.

CABLE STRUCTURE 1.0

CONDUCTORS A conductor is the metallic part of cables that is carrying the electric current.
Conductor materials are: 1.1 Plain annealed or tin coated copper conductor (to BS EN 1977, ASTM
B3, ASTM B49 & ASTM B 33) The conductor structure is complying to the requirements of BS EN
60228 (IEC 60228) class 2 stranded, non Compacted, compacted or compacted sector shaped
conductors. The shape codes are: re, round solid rm, round stranded rmc, round compacted stranded
sm, sectoral stranded 2 INSULATION 2.1 Each core conductor is insulated by extruded plastic
material as will follow; the insulation thickness is selected based on the designated voltage rate
complying with BS7211 for 450/750KV and IEC 60502-1 & BS 6724 suitable for 0.6/1.0 KV. 2.2 The
insulation integrity is controlled online by an AC spark tester with test methods specified in BS EN
62230 and using test voltage specified in BS 5099. 2.3 Insulation Material : Insulation material is
selected to match the desired customer requirements and customer specification. 2.3.1 Low Smoke
Zero Halogen, Cross Linked flame retardant type EI 5 conforming to BS 7655-5.1 2.3.2 Low Smoke
Zero Halogen, Cross Linked XLPE complying with IEC 60502, and to the requirements of GP-8 type
as specified in BS 7655-1.3 2.3.3 stranded insulation color codes are described in Table-1 (i.e. used
in the products of this catalogue), meanwhile the color code as per BS 6724 is offered to our
customers upon their request. Table 1: Insulated Core Color Codes Number of Cores Colors to IEC
60502-1 Colors to BS 6724 (A:2008) 1 Red or Black Brown or Blue 2 Red & Black Brown & Blue 3
Red, Yellow and Blue Brown, Black and Grey 4 Red, Yellow, Blue and Black Blue, Brown, Black and
Grey 5 Red, Yellow, Blue, Black and Green / Yellow Green / Yellow, Blue, Brown, Black and Grey.

CABLE ASSEMBLY.
The Insulated cores are laid up together to form the laid up cable cores. Extruded suitable polymer
compound or non-hygroscopic polypropylene filler is applied (when required) between laid up cores
to provide a circular shape to the cable. Suitable polymeric tape(s) is used as a barrier tape over the
laid up cores. Such tape(s) will bind the cores together and prevents them from opening out, acts as
a separator between different polymers used in a cable and works as a heat barrier between the
cores and the extruded bedding.

4.0 BEDDING It could be also called inner sheath, which serves as a bedding under cable armouring
to protect the laid up cores and as a separation sheath. Suitable low smoke and fume zero halogen
material is used as bedding material.

5.0 ARMOURING The cable intended for tray application is protected enough and does not require
an armour in general, while it is recommended to have an armour for the cable intended for Direct
Burial applicable. The armour provides mechanical protection against crushing forces. Armour also
can serve as an Earth Continuity Conductor (ECC). The armouring type could be:

5.1 One layer of Galvanized Round Steel Wire to BS EN 10257 is applied helically over the bedding.

5.2 Aluminum wire armouring for a single Core Cable acts as non magnetic armour.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 68/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

6.0 OUTERSHEATH (OUTERJACKET)

It is the outer protection part of the cable against the surrounding environment. Halogen Free Flame
Retardant (HFFR) compounds complying with ST8 to IEC 60502-1 or Types LTS 1 & LTS 4 to BS 7655:
section 6 with low smoke, low fume and low toxic gas emitting in case of fire. The standard sheath
color is Black, meanwhile other colors such as Red and Light Blue can also be provided as per
customer request and in this case suitable UV proved additive is added to the Master batch to
ensure resistance to sunlight.

PERFORMANCE AND SPECIFICATION STANDARDS .

Low smoke and fume, zero halogen cables are manufactured and tested to different standards,

1. Smoke Density Test - ICE 61034 .

2. Testing the Content of Acidic Halogen Gases- ICE 60754-1.
3. Testing Acidity and Conductivity for the burned Halogens -IEC 60754-2.
4. Flame retardant test for a single Cable (IEC-60332-1).
5. Flame retardant test for bunched Cables (IEC-60332-3).

14.0 APPLICABLE STANDARDS

1. Specification for Conductors in

Insulated Cables & Cords - BS 6360: 1991
2. Specification for Galvanized Steel
Armoring of Cables - BS 1442: 1986
3. Specification for Aluminum Strip - BS 2897: 1985
4. Specification for Gases evolved in
combustion of Cables - BS 6425:Part 1:1990
5. Specification for PVC insulated non-
armored cables - BS 6004: 1995
6. Specification for armored Cables - BS 6346:1989
7. Specification for Mineral Insulated Cables - BS 6207: 1995
8. Specification for Insulated Flexible Cords - BS 6500:1994
9. Specification for Cables Required to
maintain circuit Integrity under fire
conditions - BS 6387:1994.

END OF SUB-SECTION

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 69/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

SUB-SECTION 17130
CABLE TRAYS

1.0 GENERAL

The Contractor shall supply and install a complete cable tray and trunking system for all electric and
low current systems as shown on the Drawings and as herein specified.

Cable trays shall be manufactured from cold rolled mild steel to comply with BS 5750/BSEN
10130/BSEN10131/BSEN10051as applicable. Cable trays shall have a perforated construction. All
accessories used such as bends, intersections, risers, reducers, etc, used in cable tray installation
shall be of the same manufacturer as that of the cable tray.

2.0 CONSTRUCTION

The thickness of cable tray for normal application shall comply with the following requirements:

Width of Tray Min. thickness

Up to and including 229 mm 1.0 mm
Above 229 mm up to and including 305 m 1.2 mm
Above 305 mm up to and including 457mm 1.5 mm
Above 457 mm up to and including 914mm 2.0 mm

For heavy duty application or in applications where the span between supports and loading of cables
necessitates, heavy duty cable trays shall be used. The thickness of heavy duty cable try and its
accessories shall comply with the following requirements:-

Width of Tray Min. thickness

Up to and including 457 mm 1.5 mm
Above 457 mm up to and including 914mm 2.0 mm

Heavy duty cable trays shall be manufactured with plain return flanges.

Unless otherwise specified, the contractor shall be responsible for selection of the correct grade of
cable tray to meet the site conditions and the requirements of these specifications and as per DEWA
requirements.

Joining of various sections of the cable tray and its accessories shall be done in accordance with the
recommendations of the manufacturer, or alternatively by using rustproof mushroom head roofing
bolts, nuts and washers.

Cable tray and its accessories shall have a hot-dip galvanized finish to BS 729. Any damage caused
to the tray during installation and/or storage, shall be repaired by using zinc rich epoxy primer or equal
alternative, followed by a generous existing metal coating. The joining bolts, nuts and washer shall be
of galvanized steel. Brass shall not be used.

Where necessary, the cutting line of the cable tray shall be through continuous metal parts and not
through the perforations. Burrs or sharp edges shall be removed prior to installation of tray sections
and accessories.

Fixing and supports shall be installed at regular intervals of 1200 mm and not more than 150 mm from
all bends, tees, intersections and risers. Midspan joints between cable tray sections shall be avoided.
Joints shall be positioned as close as practicable to the cable tray supports.
A minimum clear space of 25 mm shall be kept behind all installed runs of cable tray. Cables shall be
installed on the trays in a single layer leaving 25 percent spare space on the tray for future use.
Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 70/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Cable trays shall provide direct support to the cables without cleats or saddles wherever practicable.
Purpose made straps, cleats or saddles shall however be used to maintain a neat or regular
disposition of cables. In vertical tray installation or where trays do not directly support the cables, load
bearing cable cleats or saddles shall be employed and securely fixed to the tray. Manufacturers
recommendations shall be followed in selection of cable cleats or saddles, on the basis of individual
application.

Electromechanical continuity shall be maintained throughout the run of cable trays. Trays carrying LV
cables shall be bonded to earth with green/yellow PVC insulated single core stranded copper cable.
Trays carrying HV cables shall be bonded to earth with copper strip.

HV and LV cables shall be installed on separate cable trays.

Unserved MIC cables shall not be installed on galvanized cable tray.

3.0 APPLICABLE STANDARD

1. Specification for cable trays - BSEN 10130, BSEN 10131 and BSEN
10151 as appropriate.

2. Specification for Hot Dip Galvanization - BS 729.

END OF SUB-SECTION

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 71/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

SUB-SECTION 17140
LIGHTING FIXTURES

1. GENERAL

1.1. Reference

The products and works shall comply generally with the relevant contract drawings and
specifications, international standards and local authority requirements/codes.

It shall also comply with general requirements detailed as part of these electrical
specifications.

1.2. Description of Works

The contractor and supplier together shall design, supply, install, inspect, test and
commission the product/system and complete works as detailed in contract drawings and
specification and other contract documents.

The contractor shall include all necessary builder’s works and mechanical works to
complete electrical works. The contractor shall coordinate with other disciplines to
complete the electrical works.

The product shall fully comply with the specification as detailed in “PRODUCTS” section
and work shall be executed as defined in “EXECUTION” section and to the
CONSULTANT’s approval.

1.3. Quality Control/Assurance

Product/System shall comply with relevant codes and standards as indicated elsewhere in
this specification.

Product/System manufacturer shall have ISO Certification for their manufacturing process.

The equipment and installation supervision furnished under this specification is to be

provided by a representative or by a certified distributor of the manufacturer.

1.4. Submittals

Material submittals shall include the following as minimum:

a) Name/Details of the Vendor/Manufacturer/Country of Origin & Name/Details of the

Local Agent/Supplier.
b) Profile of the Manufacturer/Local Agent including their Quality Assurance Program
and ISO Certification.
c) Detailed dimensional drawing including elevation, side/plan views, etc. (wherever
applicable).
d) Detailed drawing for foundation/mounting arrangements (if applicable).
e) Detailed power and schematic diagrams (if applicable).
f) Material schedules (including manufacturer name, origin, specifications, etc.) and
copies of catalogues (duly highlighting the selected models) for the proposed item.
g) Compliance statement to this specification.

Shop drawings shall include the following as minimum:

a) Detailed schematic diagram for the system.
b) Equipment layout drawing including cable route, conduit details etc.
Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 72/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

2. PRODUCT
Lamps shall be supplied and installed in all lighting fixtures listed in the Schedule of Lighting
Fixtures on the Drawings. Lamps used for temporary lighting services shall not be used in the
final lamping of fixture units. Lamps shall be wattage and type as shown in the Schedule of
Lighting Fixtures. Lamps for permanent installation shall not be places in the fixture until so
directed by the Engineer, and the Employer shall accomplish this directly before the building
areas are ready for occupancy.
Lighting poles.

Lighting poles shall be of hot dip internally and externally galvanized steel to a uniform
level of 100microns, straight, 6metre in height, square in cross section of 12x12cm min.,
wall thickness of 4mm and square base plate of approximately 30x30cm and 20mm
thickness.
Pole shall be designed and constructed to a wind speed of 160Km/Hr. and to the
minimum allowable deflection as per standards.
Pole shall be coated with ultraviolet stabilized polyester smooth powder coat finish and
the color should be as per Consultant Architecture approval.
The base plate shall have a provision to allow the cables to pass through it.
Pole top shall be shall be weld closed / capped with the same pole material.
Pole assembly shall be water proof and shall in no way allow any water to pass through.
Pole shall have suitable provision / bracket to hold and wire the specified lighting fixture
as per manufacturer standard.
Pole shall be provided with access opening / service door for fuse cut out installation at
60cm (approx.) from base plate level. The access opening shall be provided with water
tight removable cover locked and unlocked by special lock / key. All such key / lock shall
be common for all poles of similar type, however it shall be different from any other
different type of poles installed in the same site. Three nos. of tool / key shall be provided
for each type of pole.
Poles shall be reinforced at the door section to restore the same strength of the entire pole.
Pole shall be provided with Earthing boss with bolt and nut accessible from the service
door.
Pole shall be provided with a fuse cut out.
Pole base plate shall be provided with a removable, sliding, folded square cover for
protecting the bolts and base plate. The cover shall be manufactured to the same
specification and colour of the pole.
Fuse cutout box for lighting poles
Fuse cut out box shall be of water proof (IP54), metallic corrosion resistant or aluminum
construction.
The fuse box shall have adequate glanding area at bottom and top side to gland atleast
two armoured cables at bottom side and cables as required for the fixtures.
Fuse cut out box shall be equipped with suitably rated Fuse / MCB (10KA min.).
Fuse cut out box shall be provided with earthing bolt / terminal arrangement.
Where poles are located in hazardous areas, fuse cut out box shall be of explosion proof
MCB cut out type.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 73/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

2.1 LED Lighting – Internal

All internal LED lighting shall fully comply with the following specifications:
a. The following International or Approved Standards shall be complied:

1) Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA)

2) LM-79-08, IESNA Approved method for the Electrical and Photometric
measurement of Solid State Lighting (SSL) Products
3) LM-80-08, IESNA Approved method of measuring Lumen Maintenance of
LED Light Sources
4) TM-21, IESNA Approved life estimation test method
5) Joint Electron Device Engineering Council (JEDEC) JESD22-A108C
6) RP-20-98, Recommended practice for Lighting Facilities
7) ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377-2008 – American National Standard for
Chromaticity of SSL Products
8) Joint Electron Device Engineering Council (JEDEC) JESD22-A108C
9) ENERGY STAR® qualified
10) FCC part 15 guidelines for radiated and conducted emissions
11) UL /CE certified or equivalent

b. Light Source

The light source shall be Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) arranged to provide the
required lighting output. The LEDs shall be from a reputed manufacturer of LEDs
with proven past performance. LED shall be manufactured by specialized LED
manufacturers in USA, Western Europe or Japan and shall be of reputable
make/brand.
The CRI shall be greater than 80. Required color temperature shall be produced by
utilizing a mixture of blue shifted yellow LED and red LEDs. Active color
management system shall maintain color consistency over time and temperature.
The drive current for the LEDs shall generally not exceed 330mA.
LED Troffer Delivered Efficacy shall be greater than 90 LPW @ 4000K CCT & LED
Downlight Delivered Efficacy shall be greater than 65LPW @ 4000K CCT.
The CCT tolerance of LED should be within the parameters: 3000K ± 50K, 3500K ±
100K , 4000K ± 100K.

Factory test reports shall be provided from the LED manufacturer duly complying to
JEDEC JESD22-A108C for Operating Life Tests.

c. General Construction of LED Fitting:

LED Troffer Construction

Fixture shall be constructed from durable corrosion proof metallic or aluminum

housing with standard troffer access plate for electrical installation and shall be
equipped with field replaceable light engine which integrates LEDs, driver, power
supply, thermal management, and optical mixing components. Fitting shall have one-
piece lower reflector finished with a textured or anti glare high reflectance white
polyester powder coating to create a comfortable visual transition from the lens to the
ceiling plane. Thermal management system shall be designed to maximize cooling
effectiveness by integrating a heat sink into the diffusing lens. Suitable clips and
holes shall be provided for mounting support wires to enable recessed or suspended
installation.

LED Down light Construction

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 74/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Fixture shall be made from durable engineered polycarbonate / die-cast aluminum

housing as specified in the lighting schedule with support cup to protect LEDs and
optical lens. Suitable integral spring clips that resist heat while providing retention for
flush ceiling fit shall be provided. Driver shall be either integral with the fitting or
supplied for remote installation. Remote driver shall be enclosed in an aluminum or
engineered polycarbonate enclosure to protect driver electronics, power supply and
provided with connection terminal blocks. An effective thermal management system
using extruded aluminum heat sink to conduct heat away from LEDs and transfer it to
the plenum space for optimal performance shall be provided for the fitting. LED
junction temperatures shall always stay below allowed maximum limits. Fitting shall
be with one-piece anodized aluminum reflector to conduct heat away from LEDs and
to create a comfortable visual transition from the lens to the ceiling plane.

Optical System of the light fitting:

All fixtures shall have a unique combination of reflective and refractive optical
components to achieve a uniform, comfortable appearance while eliminating
pixelation and color fringing which shall ensure that smooth light patterns are
projected with no hot spots and minimal striations. All components shall work
together to optimize distribution, balancing the delivery of high illuminance levels on
horizontal surfaces with an ideal amount of light on walls and vertical surfaces to
increase the perception of spaciousness. Diffusing lens shields to direct view of LEDs
while lower reflector balances brightness of lens with the ceiling and to create a low-
glare high angle sharp appearance.

Electrical System:

Unless specified otherwise, input Voltage for LED Down light shall be 220V - 240V,
50/60Hz and Input Voltage for LED Troffer shall be 120V-277V, 50/60Hz. Driver
shall have a nominal power factor > 0.9.

Guarantees to be provided:

Performance warranty of minimum five (5) years shall be provided for all the LED
fittings against all defects and failures. Upon a request from the CONSULTANT, all
defective product or failed product(s) that failed to deliver the expected performance
shall be replaced un-conditionally and immediately by the Contractor/Supplier. All
cost toward replacement including supply and installation shall be fully borne by the
supplier/contractor.

Technical Data to be submitted for LED Lighting Fixtures (for approval by

CONSULTANT):

The following Technical Data shall be specifically submitted for all LED lighting
Fixtures:

 Physical Description of the Lighting Fixture including details of fitting material,

construction details, dimensions and mounting arrangements
 Manufacturer’s quality certification complying to applicable ISO standards for
quality.
 Independent Photometric Reports for the luminaire complying to IESNA LM-79-
08 showing Laboratory name, Contact details, date of testing, model number and
report number.
 ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377-2008 – American National Standard for
Chromaticity of SSL Products Test report indicating the CCT & CRI of the LED
fixture.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 75/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

 Simplified L80 Threshold tests for lumen depreciation of < 4% of initial lumen
output at > than 6000 Hrs in the appropriate UL UL1598/153 environment.
 LM-80-08, IESNA Approved method of measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED
Light Sources report for the LED used in the LED fixture.
 TM-21, IESNA Approved life estimation test method report for the LEDs used in
the LED fixture.
 The estimated L80 for the LED troffer fixture @ 350C ≥ 50,000 hrs & the
estimated L80 for the LED Down Light fixture @ 350C ≥ 50,000 hrs. This has to
be clearly validated and mentioned in the technical datasheet of the product
proposed.
 UL / Other Internationally recognized safety laboratories certification including
file number.
 Energy Star Qualification for the LED Down lights proposed.
 Luminaire manufacturer shall submit reliability testing reports from chip
manufacturer for test conducted in accordance to JEDEC JESD22-A108C
standards as follows:
o High Temperature Operating Life (HTOL)
o Room Temperature Operating Life (RTOL)
o Wet High Temperature Operating Life (WHTOL)
o Thermal Shock
o Mechanical Shock
o LED Chip data sheets and manufacturers information.

2.2 LED Lighting – External

All external LED lighting shall fully comply with the following specifications:
a. The following International or Approved Standards shall be complied:

1) Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA)

2) LM-69-95 (R2002); Interpretation of Roadway Luminaire Photometric Reports
3) LM-79-08, IESNA Approved method for the Electrical and Photometric
measurement of Solid State Lighting (SSL) Products at 50 0C
4) LM-80-08, IESNA Approved method of measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED
Light Sources at 50 0C
5) TM-21, IESNA Approved life estimation test method at 50 0C
6) TM-15-07 (Revised), Luminaire Classification System for Outdoor Luminaires
7) RP-20-98, Recommended practice for Lighting Facilities
8) IEC 60529; Degree of Protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
9) ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377-2008 – American National Standard for
Chromaticity of SSL Products
10) JEDEC JESD22-A108C Joint Electron Device Engineering Council
11) ASTM B117-97 – Standard practice for operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus for
5000 hours at 50 0C and humidity 90%

b. General Construction of LED Fitting:

LED Arrangement within Luminaire

The light source shall be atleast 1W rated super bright white Light Emitting Diodes
(LEDs) with individual minimum efficacy of at least 100lm/W arranged modularly to
provide the required lighting output. The LEDs shall be from a reputed manufacturer
of LEDs with proven past performance. Factory test reports shall be provided from
the LED manufacturer duly complying to JEDEC JESD22-A108C for Operating Life
Tests at 500C Ambient temperature and also for humidity and salt atmosphere
corrosion tests. CRI shall be ≥ 80. Each module shall not exceed 30 LEDs and the
LED lanterns shall contain enough modularly arranged LEDs to meet the Lighting
Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 76/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

requirement. The drive current for the LEDs shall not exceed 700mA. The LED
modules shall be removable / replaceable on site without any possible risk to
maintaining luminaire photometry and without the need to demount the fixtures for
sake of future up-gradation / maintenance. The modules shall be rated IP66.

Incase, single fitting module is proposed then the life time of the fitting shall not be
less than 10Years.

Optical Control

Each individual LED shall be fitted with its own refractor optic, thus providing a
controlled efficient and even light output as required for the application. Independent
Laboratory Certified and published photometric test reports shall be submitted for the
photometric files used in the lighting calculations for verification and approval. The
testing shall confirm to IESNA LM-79 standards.

Thermal Management:

The LED modules shall be mounted on heavy duty heat sinks to ensure excellent heat
dissipation. The design of the primary heat sinks shall be such that there is a direct
thermal path from the led junctions to the atmosphere thus providing a thermal
chimney effect through the life of the luminaire. The heat sinks shall be propriety and
designed by the lighting manufacturer to enable the luminaires to work efficiently in
UAE climatic conditions. The primary heat sinks shall be provided with a ventilation
arrangement allowing heat to be dissipated to the atmosphere but preventing
collection of debris on the heat sinks.

LED Drivers:

LED Drivers shall have a minimum efficiency of >85% and shall have operating
temperature shall be upto 80 Deg C. Drivers shall accept an input voltage of 120-
277V 50 Hz AC and shall be autosensing. Power supplies shall be UL class I output
with PF > .90. Drivers shall have a Total Harmonic Distortion of ≤ 20% and have
Overload and Short Circuit protection. Drivers shall also have overheat thermal
protection for temperatures in excess of
80 Deg C. In such cases the driver shall reduce the drive current to ensure against
failure.

Guarantees to be provided:

Performance warranty of minimum five (5) years shall be provided for all the LED
fittings against all defects and failure. Upon a request from the CONSULTANT, all
defective product or failed product(s) that failed to deliver the expected performance
shall be replaced un-conditionally and immediately by the Contractor/Supplier. All
cost toward replacement including supply and installation shall be fully borne by the
supplier/contractor.

Additional five (5) years warranty shall be provided against deterioration of the
hosuing finish such as blistering, chalking, cracking, peeling or fading.

Technical Data to be submitted for LED Lighting Fixtures (for CONSULTANT

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 77/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

approval):
The following Technical Data shall be specifically submitted for all LED lighting
Fixtures:

1) Physical Description of the Lighting Fixture including details of fitting material,

construction details, dimensions and mounting arrangements
2) Data sheet to include data on initial delivered lumen outputs, wattages for
standard numbers of scalable modules at 240V 50 Hz operation Data sheet to
include the Backlight, Uplight and Glare (BUG) classification as per IESNA.
3) Manufacturer’s quality certification complying to applicable ISO standards for
quality.
4) Luminaire Independent Photometric Reports complying to IESNA LM-79-08
showing Laboratory name, Contact details, date of testing, model number and
report number
5) ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377-2008 – American National Standard for
Chromaticity of SSL Products Test report indicating the CCT & CRI of the LED
fixture proposed.
6) The luminaire manufacturer shall be listed as approved by the International Dark
Sky Association (IDA) for compliance to light pollution reduction norms.
7) Simplified L80 Threshold tests for lumen depreciation of < 4% of initial lumen
output at > than 6000 Hrs in the appropriate UL UL1598/153 environment.
8) Lumen Depreciation chart showing standard exponential decay curves for
various operating ambient temperatures derived through testing procedures as
specified by LM-80-08 test procedures. Test reports and procedures to be
submitted along with the chart.
9) TM-21, IESNA Approved life estimation test method report
10) The estimated L80 @ 250C ≥ 50,000 hrs for the proposed LED luminaire. This
has to be clearly validated and mentioned in the technical datasheet of the
product proposed.
11) UL / Other Internationally recognized safety laboratories certification including
file number.
12) Reliability testing reports from chip manufacturer for test conducted in
accordance to JEDEC JESD22-A108C standards.
13) Independent Laboratory test report for IP66 certification of LED modules.
14) LED Chip data sheets and manufacturers information.
15) Independent ASTM B117-97 – Standard practice for operating Salt Spray (Fog)
Apparatus Test report for 5000 hours
16) Driver data sheets
Binning Number for whit LED between MAC adam elips step ¾

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 78/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

SUB-SECTION 17160
SELF CONTAINED EMERGENCY LIGHTS CONNECTED TO MONITORING SYSTEM

1.0 GENERAL

The Contractor shall supply, install and connect self-contained emergency lights safety luminaires.
The system shall include emergency supply panels, microprocessor controlled central control unit,
safety luminaires ,exit light fittings, emergency light fittings etc. complete with all necessary
accessories, conduits, wires, etc, as specified, as applicable, as show on the drawings and to the
approval of Engineer and General Civil Defense Authorities.

The Contractor shall ensure that the system supplier shall be authorized distributor of the equipment,
maintaining a local staff of factory trained personnel for Engineering assistance, installation and
maintenance of such equipment in compliance with the requirements of BS 5266 and relevant
CENELEC Standards.

The emergency lighting self-contained monitoring. All features of the self-contained system shall be
displayed at the management station including the ability to carry out functional tests. Functional
testing of the emergency lighting allowing tests to be witnessed at the management station.

The Contractor shall provide in the panel necessary volt free contacts for hardwiring to the
management station from his system supplier.

2-SELF CONTAIND PANEL.

 Control Panel (375H:357W:50D)

 Touch-screen display
 Maximum of 200 Luminaires per panel.
 Up-to 63 panels can be networked together (12,600 luminaires total).
 Multi –languages (English, Italian, Portuguese, Greek, Swedish)
 Continuously monitors luminaires with immediate fault detection.
 Download from panel to PC for backup of configuration file. Allows easy re-configuration and
changes to be made.
 Data wiring can be loop or radial with single spurs allowed using MSI850
 Flexible testing regime configurable to user requirement.
 Short Circuit Isolators on each ECS110 (no need for additional isolators). Reduces installation
cost and improves system integrity.
 Device addressing by panel – not by the installer. Eliminates manual addressing saving, time,
Avoids addressing errors saving time, Minimises installer error.
 Software can be up-dated in panel.
 Easy to up-grade software with new features.
 Upload panel information via serial port without the need of specialist software. (hyper-
terminal)

Key Points:
1.Total number of devices per panel = 200
2. Total number of panels in network = 63
3. Total number of device across a network system = 12600
4. Total number of test groups = 16
5. Recommended Data-Bus Cable = Belden 8471 or Belcom 4001P1644 (LSZH)
Both these cables are a single twisted pair (16AWG) without screen/drain wire
6. Data Bus configuration = Loop & Mixture of Loop and Spur/Radials
7. Maximum Cable Length = Determined by Cable type and number of devices (refer to
EasiCheck planning guide for calculations)
8. Maximum Number of Spurs and spur length allowed = Determined by Cable type and
number of devices (refer to EasiCheck planning guide for calculations)
9. Maximum Volt Drop on data-bus allowed = 10V
10. Other cable length restrictions = Total capacitance of all cable connected cannot exceed
1µf (please refer to cable manufacturers datasheet)
11. Recommended network cable type= Belden 8719 CL2 (Screened)
12. Maximum network cable length = 1500 Metres (if above cable is used)

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 79/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

13. Where extra network cable length is required a network booster can be use for network
cable lengths above 1.5kM. This allows a further 1.5kM to be connected.
14. Maximum number of Boosters allowed= 3
15. Networking between buildings can be achieved using one of the following methods:
(regardless of cable length)
 7660-3250 booster
 EC400 LON/IP interface
 EC450 LON to Fibre Optic interface
16. Following conversion of any luminaires for use with EasiCheck an EMC and 5 day test
must be performed to ensure correct operation.

3-EMERGENCY LIGHTS

Self-contained Emergency lighting units are used, it shall be provided with automatic monitoring and
testing through the dedicated control system which is interfaced with Building Monitoring System and
the fire alarm control unit. The circuits and self-contained luminaries shall be monitored for the low
battery fault and the status. The batteries shall be able to function for at least 3 hours during power
failure or emergency.

The Monitored self-contained Emergency lighting system mentioned. Shall be an Approved System
where in the Emergency luminaries, the control units, Addressable Modules, Batteries etc Shall be
approved as an Assembly.

The emergency lighting system shall be either continuously in operation or shall be capable of
repeated automatic operation without manual intervention.

All components of the emergency light and its fittings shall be designed, tested and approved to be
used for the purpose of emergency lighting.

The typical setup of central and self-contained emergency lighting system with monitoring
arrangement.

4- EXIT LIGHTS

Exit sign shall be installed at strategic point throughout the building as indicated on the relevant
drawings and as per approved shop drawings.

These exit lights shall be similar to emergency lights but maintained type thus ensuring that the signs
are permanently illuminated.

Exit sign shall be pictorial type as per latest EN Standards and as per Client requirements.

All exit lights shall be on the types specified and shall be installed manner to of the emergency light
fittings.

EL Location: Offices, Corridors, Maintenance lobby

1x8W high lumen output recess ceiling mounted self-contained and non-maintained emergency light.
Sheet steel body and glass diffuser with 3 hours 3 battery backup, charge indicators, 8hours
maximum recharging time, test button and battery Nickel Cadmium rechargeable maintenance free
and gas tight with 3.6v/4.0 Ah.

EL Location: plant rooms, staircases, car parking

Same as type above but surface mounted with polycarbonate body and IP65.

Exit Location: Car park, staircases

1x8W high lumen output, self-contained and maintained exit light with polycarbonate body and
polycarbonate diffuser to IP 65 with direction arrows. Laminar shall be wall / pendant mounted with 3
hours 3batteries back up, charge indicator, 8 hours maximum recharging time, test button and battery
Nickel Cadmium , rechargeable maintenance free and gas tight with 3.6v / 4.0 Ah.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 80/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Exit Location: Corridor, entrance Lobby

Same as above, but edge-lit type pendant, maintained exit with glass directional arrows or recessed.

5- SAFETY LUMINAIRE

Safety luminaire shall non-maintained type slave luminaire with 8 watt fluorescent tube and with
addressable electronic ballast which can communicate with central control module. The luminaire
shall have plastic polycarbonate housing and diffuser with downward light distribution.
Protection class II, protection IP41 Supply voltage 220 V/240 V AC/DC

6- EXIT/ESCAPE ROUTE LUMINAIRE

Exit/escape route luminaire shall be of the same type as safety luminaires except for the following:

a) It shall be maintained type luminaire

b) Minimum viewing distance 30 meters
c) The diffuser will have RAL colored EXIT sticker in English and Arabic.

END OF SUB-SECTION

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 81/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

SUB-SECTION 17170
WIRING DEVICES

1.0 GENERAL

The Contractor shall supply and install all of the wiring devices as indicated on the Drawings and as
herein specified.

Wiring devices shall be flush mounted type, unless otherwise noted and shall be installed at
heights as shown on the Drawing, or as directed by the Engineer.

Wiring devices fixed on glazed tiles shall include a rubber gasket between the cover plate and the
glazed tiles for rigid fixing of the device plates. The gaskets shall not protrude beyond the plate: they
shall be neatly cut in the shape of the plate.

Samples of devices and plates shall be submitted for choice and approval of the Engineer.

2.0 DEVICE PLATES

Plates shall be rectangular or square in shape to the approval of the Engineer.

Plates shall be designed to match associated devices.
Plates for cord extension shall be provided with cord grip bushings, threaded type, of same material
and finish as of plate.

Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, plates for flush mounting devices shall
be constructed of molded material of ivory or white in color in general areas and shall be decorative
type in areas under Interior Decorator's scope, to the approval of the Engineer and of the Interior
Decorator.

Fixing screws shall be chromium plated and polished. Screw heads shall be finished to suit the plates.

3.0 SWITCHES

Switches shall be rocker operated mounted with the operating handle in the upward position when in
the "ON" position unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

Switches shall interrupt the hot wire or hot and neutral simultaneously as applicable.

Switches shall be quick-make, quick-break, with silver alloy contacts, trunnions and spring
assembly lubricated for the life of the switch neoprene bumpers.

Switches shall be 250 volt ac only rated with number of poles and amp ratings as indicated on the
Drawings, to BS 3676 Part 1.

Switches shall be fully rated for tungsten filament and fluorescent lamp loads, and up to 80% of rated
capacity for motor loads.

Switches shall be one gang or multi gang, 1-way, 2-way or intermediate as indicated on the drawings
and to the approval of the Engineer.

Key operated lighting switch shall be 20 amp rated, one way single pole, and shall be as per approval
of the Engineer.

20-Amp double pole switches shall incorporate a pilot light, and shall have the words "Water Heater"
engraved on it when used for that propose, to the approval of the Engineer.

30-Amp double pole switch shall incorporate the inscription indicating the purpose of its use.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 82/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

45/50-Amp double pole switches shall incorporate a pilot light, and shall have the word "Cooker"
engraved on it when used for that purpose.
45/50-Amp double pole switches shall be to the approval of the Engineer.

4.0 Switch Assemblies

Switch assemblies shall be of the grid switch system, comprising rocker-operated grid switches and
cover plates of molded material with white finish, unless otherwise indicated.

Switch assemblies shall comprise 20-amp lighting switches, and other units if so indicated on the
Drawings.

Switches shall, to the approval of the Engineer.

Switch assemblies shall have the words "Danger 415 volts" engraved in red in it.

Cover plates shall be similar to MK 3631, 2, 3, 4, 6 & 8 Crabtree 5571, 2, 3, 4, 6 unless otherwise
specified or indicated on the Drawings, to the approval of the Engineer.

5.0 LIGHTING CONTACTOR CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS

Pushbuttons shall be double contact type with spring return action.

Body shall be made of molded plastic with clear baked acrylic protection.

6.0 SOCKET OUTLETS

Socket outlets shall be mounted with correct polarity, such that switch shall cut the hot wire.

Socket outlets shall be of the standard, 3-pin, switched, single phase, shuttered type of molded plastic
unless otherwise specified.

13-amp socket outlets shall be flat pin type, to BS 1363, single or twin as indicated.

13-amp socket outlets shall be unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, to the
approval of the Engineer.

15-amp socket shall be round pin switched type to BS 546.

30A sockets shall be round pin type cover made of brass, and shall be provided with corresponding
plugs.

7.0 PROTECTIVE SOCKET COVER

Weatherproof socket outlets shall be provided with protective socket covers.

Protective socket cover shall be manufactured from high impact resistant "Noryl". The cover shall be
designed to fall by gravity over the socket whether a plug is inserted or not.

Cover shall be to the approval of the Engineer.

8.0 ELCB PROTECTED SOCKET OUTLET

ELCB protected socket outlet shall be 13-amp switched type with added protection against the risk of
fire and electrocution by tripping out in the event of current leaking to earth in excess of 10 mA.

ELCB protected socket outlet shall be suitable to fit in place of 13-amp duplex socket outlet.
ELCB protected socket outlet shall otherwise be similar to 13-amp switched socket outlet.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 83/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

9.0 CEILING ROSES

Ceiling roses shall be designed to meet the requirements for the installation of flexible pendent
cords for lighting. They shall be molded in non-track insulating material to BS 1322 and shall comply
with BS 67 and IEE Wiring Regulations.

Ceiling roses shall incorporate 3 terminals (one of which properly shrouded), loop-in, earth and strain.
The shrouded terminal shall be used for the live un-switched wires.

All lighting fixtures incorporated in a false ceiling shall be connected to the ceiling lighting outlet
through a ceiling rose and a flexible cord.

10.0 HOOK FOR CHANDELIER

Hook shall be suitable for suspension of chandeliers of up to 25kg.

11.0 FAN COIL POWER OUTLET/FUSED CONNECTION UNIT

Power outlets for fan coil units ceiling mounted shall be flush surface mounting 13-amp fused
connection units incorporating double pole switch, neon indicator and fuse of appropriate rating, in
a 2-gang device box, with the second gang covered with a blank plate.

Device shall be all to the approval of the Engineer.

Outlet for fan coil units with heaters ceiling mounted shall be surface mounting type and shall
comprise a 20-amp double pole switch for the fan motor and a 50-amp double pole switch for the
heater.

Outlet shall be to the approval of the Engineer.

Outlet for fan coil units installed at low level shall be recess mounting 13-amp fused connection unit
incorporating a double pole switch, neon indicator, fuse of appropriate rating and flex outlet.

Outlet shall be to the approval of the Engineer.

12.0 TELEPHONE OUTLETS

Unless otherwise specified or covered under structured cabling system, telephone outlets shall be
cord grip type and shall consist of terminal blocks of high insulating phenolic block with non-
ferrous screws and straps.

Telephone outlets shall be unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings to the approval of
the Engineer.

13.0 TV OUTLETS

TV outlets shall be of molded material and shall have a low attenuation (1 db) for all
frequencies.
TV outlets shall be supplied with matching plugs and cord of 1.2 meters.
TV outlets shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer of the TV System and to the approval of
the Engineer.

14.0 CONTROL STATIONS

Control stations shall be spring type, with silver plated contacts. Contacts shall be 5 amp rated. Plate
shall be constructed from aluminum gray baked enamel painted.

ON-OFF maintained contact station shall have two pushbuttons, one green for ON and one red
for OFF. A green pilot light shall be incorporated which shall lit when pushbutton ON is depressed.
The words ON & OFF shall be engraved on the pushbuttons in white.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 84/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

START-STOP momentary contact type station shall have two pushbuttons, one green for START and
one red for STOP. A green pilot light shall be incorporated which shall lit when pushbutton START is
depressed. The word START & STOP shall be engraved on all motor control stations.

UP-STOP-DOWN momentary contact type stations shall have three pushbuttons and no pilot lights.

Pushbuttons shall be molded from trac-resistant material, and shall be provided with button shrouding
ring.

Key switch shall be a cylinder lock operator type station with three positions UP-OFF-DOWN. These
words shall be engraved on the station.
Stations in damp and wet locations shall be enclosed in a Feraloy box and covered with stainless
steel plates.

When line voltage is 380-415 and the control is line-to-line connected as described under MOTORS &
STARTERS", a warning notice shall be inscribed in the device in a clearly visible manner once the
cover is removed.

15.0 FLEX-OUTLET

Flex-outlet shall be unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, to the approval of the
Engineer.

16.0 CABLE OUTLET

Cable outlet shall comprise a molded cover plate with a side groove for 3 x 10 mm2 multi-core
flexible cord, a cable clamp, 3 terminals for 10 mm2 conductors.

Cable outlet shall be similar to Crabtree 4506, MK 5045 to the approval of the Engineer.

17.0 FIREMAN'S EMERGENCY SWITCH

Fireman's emergency switch shall be 16 Amp double pole or four pole as applicable. It shall
incorporate a neon light. Opening of cover shall not be possible when live.

It shall be protected against dust and splash of water to IP54.

18.0 APPLICATION STANDARDS

1. Specification for ceiling roses - BS 67: 1987

2. Specification for 13A fused plug and socket outlets - BS 1363:1984
3. Specification for Aminoplastic Molding materials - BS 1322:1992
4. Specification for Transformers for reduced voltage - BS 3535:1990
5. Specification for Lighting Switches - BS 3676
6. Specification for Dimmers - BS 5548

END OF SUB-SECTION

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 85/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

SUB-SECTION 17180
DISCONNECTING SWITCHES

1.0 GENERAL

The Contractor shall supply and install the following equipment as shown on the Drawings, and as
herein specified.

2.0 DISCONNECTING SWITCHES

Switches shall be non-fusible single throw, number of poles and rating as shown on the Drawings.

Switches shall be quick-make, quick-break type, capable of making, carrying and interrupting
specified current at its rated voltage.

Switches rated more than 200A when used with motors shall be plainly marked "Do Not Operate
Under Load".

Switches rated 200A or less, when used with motors shall be motor circuit switch type, of horse-
power rating equal to, or more than, that of the associated motor and having interrupting capacity
at least equal to the maximum operating overload current of the motor at rated voltage.

Motor circuit switches shall incorporate all necessary auxiliary contacts to isolate auxiliary power
supplied (if any) associated with the starter.

Isolating switches with no interrupting ratings shall not be used, for any type and rating of motor.

Enclosures shall be treated with a rust-inhibiting phosphate, and finished in grey baked enamel.

** Deleted.

END OF SUB-SECTION

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 86/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

SUB-SECTION 17190
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM

1.0 GENERAL
The Contractor shall supply and install complete Structured cabling systems as shown on the
drawings, as specified in the shown BID specifications and to Local telecommunication Authorities
approval.
CONTENTS
1. Structured cabling 2.2.11 Connections
1.1 Reference standards 2.2.12 Marking
1.2 Compliance with safety standards 2.3. Work Acceptance
1.3 Terminology 2.3.1. Principle
1.4 Network architecture 2.3.2. Testing the Cabling System
1.5 Application classification 2.3.3. Copper Cables
2. Specification 2.3.4. Optical Fibers
2.1 Components 2.3.5. Grounding Network
2.1.1 The Cabling System 2.3.6. Cabling Certification
2.1.2 EITC Special Considerations 2.4. Documentation
2.1.3 Etisalat Special Considerations 3. Call for Tenders Regulation
2.1.4 User outlet 3.1 The Offers
2.1.5 Patching Connectivity for Copper Horizontal Distribution 3.2 Conformity
2.1.6. Patching Connectivity for Fiber 3.3 Samples
2.1.7. Patching Connectivity for Copper Backbone 3.4 Execution of the Work
2.1.8 Horizontal Copper Cable 3.5 Warranties
2.1.9 Fiber Cable 3.5.1. The Contractor
2.1.10 Vertical Copper Cable
2.1.11 Cat.6 Copper Patch Cords
2.1.12. Cat.3 Copper Patch Cords
2.1.13 Fiber Jumpers
2.1.14 Consolidation Point
2.1.15 Enclosures
2.1.16 Horizontal Cable Management Panels
2.2. Execution
2.2.1 Distribution and Location of Workstation Outlets
2.2.2 Patch Cords and Fiber Jumpers
2.2.3 Telecommunication Rooms
2.2.5 Horizontal Distribution
2.2.6 Vertical Distribution
2.2.7 Cable Management
2.2.8 Grounding
2.2.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility
2.2.10 Drilling

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 87/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

1. Structured Cabling
1.1. Reference Standards
The rules and standards that apply to the techniques for projects and industrial installations
for data transmission networks are:
 ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B and addenda (Electronic Industries Alliance / Telecommunication
Industry Association: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard).
American standard for structured cabling, applied most often at present and throughout the
world.
 ISO/IEC 11801 2nd Edition 2002 and Addenda (International Organization for
Standardization / International Electro-Technical Commission).
The IEC commission is responsible for establishing the standards to be used by the sixty
four member countries. CENELEC EN 50173-1:2002, Information Technology—Generic
Cabling Systems—Amendments.
The following American standards are also used in this document. Their international or
local equivalents may be used instead if more appropriate:
 ANSI/EIA/TIA-606-A (Administration standard for Commercial Communications
Infrastructure)
 ANSI/EIA/TIA-569 (Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and
Spaces)
 ANSI-J-STD 607-A (Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications)
If a datacenter is part of the project, it will comply with:
 ANSI/TIA-942 (Telecommunications infrastructure standard for datacenters).
The cabling system shall also be compatible with a series of standards, products and
protocols, i.e., at least:
 IEEE 802.3an-2006 (10 Gigabit Ethernet for Copper)
 IEEE 802.3-2002 (Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet)
 IEEE 802.3-2002 (10 Gigabit Ethernet for Fiber)
 IEEE 802.5 (Token Ring)
 ANSI FDDI
 ATM at 155, 622 and 1.2Giga
 ANSI/TIA/EIA 854 (1000 Base Tx)
 ISO/IEC 8802.3 (all equivalents to IEEE 802.3)

1.2. Compliance with safety standards

All cables used shall comply with the safety specifications established by IEC standards, in
particular for buildings with a high-density population and fire protection within buildings.
On contact with flames, cables can become a vehicle for propagating fire and substances
produced by combustion can, in turn, have a harmful effect on both persons and equipment.
Fire propagation shall be deemed the main risk factor and, therefore, the main item to be
considered when setting up protective measures.
The results obtained from research on the most advanced production-related technologies and
materials have enabled the development of cables that are specially suited for use in
installations where it is essential to eliminate, or at least limit, the risks for both persons and
equipment.
Among the types of cable having characteristics likely to reduce fire -related risks, groups with
flame retardant cable jacket and reduced emissions of smoke and toxic gases stand out. The
composite materials used to make them must limit the production of smoke (which reduces
visibility) and the release of halogen gases (which lead to asphyxia).

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 88/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

1.3. Terminology
In this document:
The term "Building Owner representative" refers to the Employer or to the company
representing the Employer. The company shall appoint a Technical Manager. The Employer
representative will entrust said manager with responsibility for the quality control of the whole
service described below.
The term "Tenderer" refers to the Company that replies to these specifications.
The term "Contractor" refers to the Tenderer who will be selected to execute the services
defined in these specifications.
The term "Specifications" refers to all the documents describing the service to be carried out,
and received by the Contractor prior to signing the contract. The specifications are part of the
contract file and are therefore of a contractual nature.

1.4. Network architecture

The cabling infrastructure will be:
Systematic: presence of outlets at all user access points to enable the connection or moving
of any equipment without need for re-cabling.
Standard: outlets and connected cables shall be identical in order to support any type of
network and equipment.
The computer and telephone cabling system will have a star-type topology. As regards
computers, there will be one main cross-connect (MC or BD) located in the server room and
another in either the same room or in another room to be specified in the building's technical
features. These will be used to interconnect the intermediate cross-connect facilities (IC or FD)
located in the telecommunication rooms on each floor by means of backbone cables.
Each telecommunication room will house the entire telephone and computer distribution for its
floor. The layout of the telecommunication rooms within the buildings is shown on the drawings
and the outlets layout will also be given in appendix.
Cabling architecture is based on the following principles:
- Horizontal distribution from the cross-connect facilities to the workstations will be done with a
four-twisted-pairs cable wired to a RJ45 outlet.
- Vertical distribution will be done with multiple-twisted-pairs cables for telephony and fiber optic
cables for computers. They will be as follows:
- Optical fiber cables between the IC on each floor and the MC, which is the center of
the network.
- Multiple-twisted-pairs cables dedicated to telephony between each IC and the MC.
The following block diagram shows the architecture of a standard network to be installed:
- Equipment room
- Telecommunication room
- Work area outlet = RJ45 outlet at the workstation
- Main cross-connect = Patching zone between active equipment and the main building vertical
backbone and patching zone between active products and the backbone cable between the
main building and the secondary building(s).
- Intermediate cross-connect = Patching zone between the main patching zone and the vertical
backbone of a secondary building for inter-building cabling.
- Horizontal cross-connect = Patching zone between the vertical backbone and the horizontal
cabling.

1.5. Application classification

This standard defines the minimum requirements for the installation of a structured cabling
system. The following classes have been identified for copper twisted-pair cables:

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 89/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Class Type of application

- C Up to 16 MHz
- D Up to 100 MHz
- E Up to 250 MHz
These specifications include a series of parameters that shall then be checked during the
testing phase.

2. Specifications
2.1. Components
2.1.1. The Cabling System
General
All system components of the entire cabling system will be of the same manufacturer in order to
insure efficient operation, component compatibility and a single warranty covering the entire
installation. This includes but is not limited to:
- Horizontal distribution
- Fiber vertical distribution
- Copper vertical distribution
- Cabinets and Racks
The cabling system shall be guaranteed products and applications for a period of twenty
(20) years. During this period, the warranty will cover installed components such as cables
and connectors as well as the complete cabling system including labor.
All components will provide identification markings that meet the requirements of standard
ANSI/TIA/EIA 606-A.
All system components shall be manufactured by ISO 9001:2000 certified companies and all
packaging shall carry clear product identification (catalogue number, quality control number, etc.),
possibly in the form of a barcode.
All products must meet European directive 2005/95/EC concerning restriction on the use of
hazardous substances (RoHS).
Horizontal distribution
The proposed horizontal distribution cabling system is Class E UTP associated with OM3 fiber
guaranteed for 10Gbps Ethernet.
- All single outlets will consist of an RJ45 Cat6 port.
- All dual outlets will consist of 2 (two) RJ45 Cat6 ports, AND an LC duplex fiber connector with
OM3 fiber.
All copper components used in the horizontal system will be of the same manufacturer, and
will all be third party CERTIFIED for Cat.6 compliance according to ANSI/TIA/EIA, ISO/IEC &
CENELEC EN.
All components of the fiber horizontal system will be of the same manufacturer and the entire link
will meet all applicable standards and be guaranteed for 10Gbps Ethernet on OM3 multimode fiber
(Laser optimized).
Vertical distribution
The proposed vertical copper distribution cabling system is a Category 3 UTP multiple twisted pair
structured system for voice applications. All the components used in the vertical copper system will
be of the same manufacturer.
The proposed vertical fiber distribution cabling system is a 50/125_m OM3 multimode (laser
optimized) and 9/125 _m SM fiber structured system according to ISO/IEC 11801 ed2:2002. All the
components used in the vertical fiber system will be of the same manufacturer.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 90/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

2.1.2. EITC Special Considerations

If the building is covered by EITC (Emirates Integrated Telecommunications Company,
Dubai, U.A.E.) shall be used laste regulation from ETIS, then the following also apply:
Multi-Tenant Commercial Buildings
The “Office Consolidation Block” is intended to be a connection between the building
cabling and the tenant’s horizontal cabling. The tenant will therefore bring backbone cables
between his HC (housed most likely in a 19” format cabinet) and the OCP (zone distribution
box). It is not intended to house active equipment. This OCP will therefore consist of the
following:
- A grade A-C plywood board, wall mounted above false ceiling, near the entrance.
- The copper consolidation point connectivity (110 block)
- The eventual fiber connectivity. (Zone Distribution box)
Even if fiber is not required, the plywood board must allow space for future installation. All
copper Cat3 backbone cables will be between the OCP and the closest floor telecom room.
They will then be connected to main Cat3 backbone cables towards the main telecom room
through wall mounted 110 blocks, (example: four 50pair cables from 4 OCP’s are connected
to one 200pair cable, on a 400pair 110 block)
As per EITC specifications, fiber is not required in the design. However, it may be required by
the tenants for data communication to the service provider, or between offices. The bidder will
therefore propose as an option a full fiber backbone system composed of the following:
- 12 core OM3 fiber between the main telecom room and each telecom room.
- A 4 core OM3 fiber between each telecom room and the OCP’s.
- Connection in the main telecom room is done on 19” rack mount cabinets.
- Connection in the floor telecom rooms is done in wall mount cabinets.
- Connection in OCP’s is done in surface mount outlet boxes.
Multi tenant Residential Buildings
The “Apartment Consolidation Block” is intended to house the connectivity for the three
cables towards the closest floor telecom rooms, all cables towards the outlets, and the active
equipment (provided by EITC) that will provide all internet, TV, and telephone services. Active
equipment is sensitive to dust and heat and physical exposure, and must therefore be
protected. This ACP will therefore consist of the following:
- An enclosure that locks with a key. This enclosure will be flush wall mounted, and will
have limited depth (internal 10cm). There will be one enclosure for every apartment. It
must include a plywood board to fix the various elements inside, and a set of 19”
brackets to fix an equipment of 1u vertically inside.
- A (or multiple) 110 block(s) to connect the outlets inside the apartment and to connect
three Cat.6 cables to the closest intermediate cross connect (IC). Because of the
limited depth of the enclosure, the patch cords must NOT be facing forward so that they
are not crushed by the closing of the door. They will be facing the side, up or down (110
block mounted sideways).The 110 block must therefore be maximum 50mm wide so
that it does not impede the closing of the door. This item must meet the criteria in
product specifications: “consolidation point”.
- The active equipment (Provided be EITC).
This system must meet all product specifications from this document, as well as specifications
from the EITC guidelines.

2.1.3. Etisalat Special Considerations

If the building is covered by Etisalat, then the following applies:
Definitions:

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 91/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

- ONU: Optical Network Unit, flush mounted cabinet to wall, housing active & passice
components and dedicated to each office/flat/villa.
- ODF: Optical Distribution Frame, is a min. size 42U cabinet (W800mm x D800mm) at ground
floor main telecom room.
Structured Cabling System (SCS)
To deliver the services from the ONU, a SCS system on star topology is required. The
minimum requirement is standard CAT 6 cable with RJ45 connectivity.
Horizontal Cabling of High-rise Buildings (Commercial & Residential) & Villas
All SCS cables are to be labeled and terminated in the RJ45 sockets and in patch panel or in
CAT 6 complaint IDC modules by the Employer at ONU. The physical topology of the
horizontal cabling shall be configured as a star with each outlet connected directly to ONU.
Etisalat shall supply and install ODF and ONU active equipments. All jumperings and
patchings in the ODF, patch panels & ONU shall be the responsibility of Etisalat.
The Employer / contractors or other technicians are totally prohibited to carry out these
functions.
Fiber Drop Cables of High-rise Buildings (Commercial & Residential)
The building owner shall install a minimum of 2 core fiber drop cables from the main telecom
room ODF location to the indoor cabinet location of each flat / premises. Termination of these
fibers shall be done by Etisalat on the ONU and ODF. Installer to leave an extra length of 3m
of cable on either end for terminations. The cables shall be suitably labeled.
For Single Villas: Etisalat shall extend and terminate the FO cable directly in the ONU.
In all the other cases, the 2 core drop cables should be extended to the ODF location in the
telecom room by the Employer.
This system must meet all product specifications from this document, as well as specifications
from the Etisalat guidelines.

2.1.4. User outlet

Copper
Outlets are to be used to connect the user equipment to the network through a patch cord.
The RJ45 modules shall meet the following criteria:
- Category 6 RJ45, according to ANSI/TIA/EIA 568 B 2.1 of 20 June 2002, ISO/IEC 11801
2002 ed.2 & CENELEC EN 50173-1: 2002.
- Tool less connector.
- Possibility of re-termination if a mistake is made by simply unclipping.
- IDC block which holds wires in place by locking the latch. The 130 degree slanting
contacts should enable perfect connection.
- Support T568A and T568B wiring.
- Accept 22 to 24 AWG cable.
- Enable maximum untwisting of ½ inch (1,2cm) of the pairs.
- Risk of oxidation should virtually be zero on the connector thus increasing life
expectance of the connection while maintaining the performance of the cabling system.
Modules that cannot be re-connected in case of error are not acceptable.
Fiber
For fiber to the desk solutions, connectors will be LC field installable. They will be of the
crimping type with factory polishing of the termination checked by laser interferometry. The
ferrule must be Ceramic / Zirconia for best precision.
The following solutions are NEVER acceptable:
- Field polishing. (It does not allow repeatable performance, and has high return loss.)

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 92/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

- Composite / Polymer ferrules. (insufficient precision)

- Mechanically splicing pigtails. (high return loss)
All connectors and adaptors will be provided with dust caps.

Faceplates
The modules will be integrated in faceplates with either of the following methods:
- A single faceplate accepting one or two RJ45 modules each. The faceplates will be
matched to the electrical outlets, and must have label holders. (a transparent cover that
allows the placement of a machine printed label)
- An adaptor in “Mosaic” 45mm formats that allows placing the modules in standard
faceplates of the same brand and modeling as the electrical outlets, or in floor boxes.
Each adaptor MUST also have a label holder.
- When fiber to the desk is associated with copper cabling, care must be taken as to allow
sufficient space for the cables in the outlet. This may require a dual gang faceplate, or a
zone distribution box. The Tenderer must inform the Employer representative’s of the
solution chosen.
The choice of method is subject to the Employer representative’s approval.

2.1.5. Patching Connectivity for Copper Horizontal Distribution

Modular Patch panels shall be used in the cross-connect facilities to connect the four-
twisted-pair cables and their related outlet, to the active devices via patch cords.
They shall meet the following criteria:
- Category 6 RJ45, according to ANSI/TIA/EIA 568 B 2.1 of 20 June 2002, ISO/IEC
11801 2002 ed.2 & CENELEC EN 50173-1: 2002.
- Support T568A and T568B wiring.
- Modular panel that support 24 ports on one unit of space consisting of 6 blocks each
containing 4 ports.
- The modular patch panel should enable all possible combinations of the various types
of cable (UTP, FTP, SFTP) mounted on the same panel by using connector
blocks/modules.
- Tool less connector.
- Possibility of re-termination if a mistake is made by simply unclipping.
- The modular patch panel should also enable combinations of fiber optic cassette or
fiber optic / copper converter-transceiver (available by the same manufacturer to fit in
the patch panel) to be mounted on the same panel by using connector blocks/modules.
- The Power over Ethernet (PoE) injector module compatible to 802.3af should also be
available with the manufacturer that can be mounted on the same modular patch panel.
This is essential to power up Wi-Fi access points or other PoE compatible devices.
- IDC block which holds wires in place by locking the latch. The 130 degree slanting
contacts should enable perfect connection.
- The blocks of the connectors and the connectors themselves are easy to unclip, making
the wiring easily accessible from the front or the rear and maintenance simple.
- Label holder on each block for easy marking.
- Have a metal structure enabling it to be durably fixed to the uprights of the 19”chassis
assuring automatic grounding between RJ-45 connectors & panel and also provides
grounding continuity with the metal frames.

2.1.6. Patching connectivity for fiber

Connectors and Adaptors

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 93/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Fiber enclosures will include the LC duplex adapters for all fibers. Single mode adaptors
will be blue with ceramic alignment sleeves, Multimode adaptors will be beige with
phosphor-bronze alignment sleeves.
All fiber cables will be fusion spliced to LC pigtails of 2m length. They will meet the
following performance:
- Ultra Physical Contact (UPC) finish for single-mode: Insertion loss: 0.40dB maximum,
0.20 dB typical; Return loss: minimum 55db.
- Physical Contact (PC) finish for Multimode 50 micron: Insertion loss: 0.50dB maximum,
0.30 dB typical; Return loss: minimum 20db.
Only for small installations with LC field installable connectors shall be accepted. They will
be of the crimping type with factory polishing of the termination checked by laser
interferometry. The ferrule must be Ceramic / Zirconia for best precision.
The following solutions are NEVER acceptable:
- Field polishing. (It does not allow repeatable performance, and has high return loss.)
- Composite / Polymer ferrules. (insufficient precision)
- Mechanically splicing pigtails. (high return loss)
All connectors and adaptors must be provided with dust caps.
Rack Mount Cabinets
Rack mount fiber cabinets shall be used in the cross-connect facilities to connect the fiber
cables to the active devices via fiber jumpers. They must be dimensioned to enable the
connection of all fibers of the installed cables.
The rack mount fiber patch cabinets are metallic box type modular structure, the front part
having a standardized 19" chassis, and able to take any type of standard optical connector
module in the market: LC, ST, SC or MT-RJ. They shall include all the appropriate cabling
accessories (bend limiting clips for the cables and fiber jumper, cable-ties, label-holders,
etc.), to ensure correct positioning of the fibers.
Label holder should be present on each fiber optic module thus allowing the identification of
all cables and strands.
Zone Distribution Box
The zone distribution box is used to centralize the connections and provide total flexibility
and adaptability of the installation. It can be attached to any surface with the use of either
screws or double-sided tape. It must meet the following criteria:
- capable of accepting up to 6 SC duplex or 9 LC duplex connectors,
- include all accessories to allow correct attachment of cables,
- include fiber storage rings to respect the bend radius of the fiber cores,
- capable of accepting up to 12 RJ-45 connectors,
- include label fields under clear plastic cover compliant with TIA/EIA 606,
The zone distribution box can be used in the following conditions:
- 19” enclosure not available in the location to connect the fiber
- 18 or fewer fiber cores to be connected.
- Box to be fixed on a plywood board.
- For installations in false ceiling or raised floors.
- Used for low voltage distribution areas.
The connection to an outlet at the workstation is easily done using:
- A single ended cord specific for connection to an RJ-45 outlet.
- A standard cord for connection to a RJ-45 coupler outlet.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 94/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

2.1.7. Patching connectivity for copper backbone

110 panels shall be used in the cross-connect facilities to connect the backbone cables to
the horizontal distribution patch panels and to the PBX via cords. They shall meet the
following criteria:
- 100, 200 & 300 pair formats.
- Include troughs for patch cord management
- Allow termination of 22AWG to 26 AWG cables.
- Allow for identification field to support the ANSI/TIA/EIA 606-A standard.
- Allow the use of 3, 4, and 5 pair connecting blocks.
- Include the connecting blocks to connect 100 % of the pairs. (Connecting blocks must
have color-coded tips for easy identification of the pairs.)
In the IC’s, the 110 panels will be mounted in the racks or cabinets along with the
horizontal distribution RJ45 panels. They will therefore be 19” format.
In the MC’s, the 110 panels will be wall mounted. It must include the metal backboard
channels for the cables and cross-connect channels for the jumpering.

2.1.8. Horizontal Copper cable

Whether for computers or telephones, copper cables shall be used on each floor for the
horizontal distribution between the end sockets and the IC’s. They shall meet the following
criteria:
- Category 6 according to ANSI/TIA/EIA 568 B 2.1: June 2002, ISO/IEC 11801 2002 ed.2
& CENELEC EN 50173-1: 2002.
- Four twisted pairs of 22 or 23 AWG wire per cable.
- Impedance 100 Ohms.
- U/UTP according to the last edition of ISO/IEC 11801ed2: 2002.
- Zero halogen jacket, meeting IEC 332-1 Fire resistance.
The cable must be supplied in a reel to guarantee the performance of the cable, (Pulling of
the cable from a box increases probability of damage during installation)

2.1.9. Fiber cable

As regards the vertical distribution, it is planned to use 50/125_m multimode fiber optic
cable of OM3 type according to ISO/IEC 11801 ed2:2002 (50 micron laser optimized
according to TIA/EIA 568B.3-1), in order to certify the correct operation of 10GBase-S
between each IC and the MC that houses the network's active equipment.
The maximum attenuation of the cable at 850nm must be 2.8dB/km or less.
Note: If cables are to be longer then 300m, then single mode fiber will be used. This fiber
must meet ITU-T: G652 and have maximum attenuation at 1310nm of 0.4dB/km or less. If
used for outdoor, then the fiber jacket must be loose-tube, non-dielectric.
All backbone cables will have the following mechanical resistance:
- Maximum pulling tension: 500N or better.
- Minimum crush resistance of 200N/10cm or better.
Horizontal fibers (fiber to the desk) may be less resistant as they need more flexibility and
smaller diameter:
- Maximum pulling tension: 220 N or better.
- Minimum crush resistance of 100N/10cm or better.
All types of fiber cables will have an operating temperature range of –
All types of fiber cables must have the IEC 60332-1 fire ratings.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 95/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Note: All cables between buildings will be protected in non-metallic ducting. Direct burial or
aerial methods are not accepted.

2.1.10. Vertical copper cable

Standard Cat. 3 UTP cabling will be used for vertical distribution between floors, to MC for
telephony. It shall meet the following criteria:
- 24 AWG multiple twisted pair.
- 30, 50, 100, or 200 pair cables available.
- Tested for NEXT performance.
The cable must have the IEC 60332-1 fire ratings. All cables between buildings will be
protected in non-metallic ducting. Direct burial or aerial methods are not accepted.

2.1.11. Cat.6 Copper patch cords

Cat.6 copper patch cords are to be used to connect the workstations to RJ45 outlets, and
allow for patching in the enclosures between patch panels and active devices. They shall
meet the following criteria:
- Factory made. (hand crimping of cable is not acceptable)
- Minimum length of 3 ft or 0.97 m, and maximum length of 20m. (used with a MUTOA)
- Category 6 according to ANSI/TIA/EIA 568 B 2.1: June 2002, ISO/IEC 11801 2002 ed.2
& CENELEC EN 50173-1: 2002.
- Strain relief boot should be present on top the plug to protect the latch from damage
during moves and installation. It also avoids mechanical stress on the wires.
- Manufactured from stranded wire cable.
- Be available in various colors.
- Meet requirements of IEC 60603-7 for plug and termination

2.1.12. Cat.3 Copper patch cords

Cat.3 copper patch cords are to be used to allow patching in the enclosures between patch
panels and copper backbone or PBX. They shall meet the following criteria:
- Be available in 1 pair, 2 pair, and 4 pair.
- Be available in 110 to 110, and 110 to RJ45 formats.
- Be made of stranded wire cable.
Jumper wire is allowed for wall mount 110 blocks used for Cat.3 cabling.

2.1.13. Fiber jumpers

Fiber jumpers are to be used to connect the active devices to the fiber backbone.
The optical jumpers are Duplex 50/125μm OM3 type with connectors adapted to the fiber
cabinet and the active devices used. (They will be single mode if single mode fiber is used)
Fiber jumpers shall meet the following criteria:
- To be Duplex type, with a keying system to avoid connector mismatch.
- Tested for insertion loss in accordance with TIA/EIA-455-171.
Fiber jumpers will meet the following performance:
- Ultra Physical Contact (UPC) finish for singlemode: Insertion loss: 0.40dB maximum,
0.20 dB typical, Return loss: minimum 55db.
- Physical Contact (PC) finish for Multimode 50 micron: Insertion loss: 0.50dB maximum,
0.30 dB typical, Return loss: minimum 20db.
All fiber jumpers will include their FOCIS document and individual attenuation test results
from the factory.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 96/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

2.1.14. Consolidation point

For retails areas or for added mobility, distribution cables may be connected to a
consolidation point (CP) for a selected areas, office, and group of desks. The number of
cables from the IC to the CP will be at least equal to the number of outlets connected to the
CP. It is to be located in an accessible permanent location. The consolidation point does
not allow patching.
Consolidation points shall meet the following criteria:
- Category 6 RJ45, according to ANSI/TIA/EIA 568 B 2.1 of 20 June 2002, ISO/IEC
11801 2002 ed.2 & CENELEC EN 50173-1: 2002.
- 48 pair, 96 pair, or 288 pair format.
- Allow termination of 22 AWG to 24 AWG cables.
- Allow for identification field to support the ANSI/TIA/EIA 606-A standard.
- Allow the use of Cat.6 4 pair connecting blocks.
- Connection of the cable will be done through IDC contacts with use of a standard 110
impact tool.
- Include the connecting blocks to connect 100 % of the pairs.
- The connecting blocks will use a printed circuitry for noise cancellation.
Additionally, the manufacturer must have in his catalogue Cat.6 patch cords adapted to the
consolidation block. (In case the consolidation point is changed into a HC in the future.)
RJ45 connectors are not acceptable for the CP.

2.1.15. Enclosures
Choice of enclosure
Size of enclosure must be chosen according to amount of material required, keeping into
account extra space for active equipment an future expansion.
Free standing cabinets
Free standing cabinets are the preferred choice to house the patch panels and the active
devices in rooms where persons other then IT technicians have access. They shall meet
the following criteria:
- 19”format.
- Heights from 24 to 42 rack units.
- Width of 800 mm, and depth of 800 mm.
- Fitted with 2 sets of 19” rails, front and back.
- Fitted with vertical cable management on both sides. (Left and right, front only)
- Fitted with lateral cable support on both sides. (ie. Cable tray or bars on the inside so
that cables are never fixed to the 19” rails but on proper support)
- Have key lockable front door, back door, and side panels. The side panels must be
removable without tools.
- Fitted with a grounding kit.
- Include 3 fans connected to a thermostat.
- Fitted with a 5 way power strip.(or more as per power requirements, without exceeding
the power rating of the cabinet)
- Fitted with a safety glass front door.
All Free standing cabinets must have the following ratings:
- Rated IP 20 according to IEC 60529.
- Rated IK 08 according to IEC 62262.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 97/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

- EIA 310-D.
- Loading of 10kg per unit of space. (i.e: 420kg for a 42u cabinet)
- Tested for corrosion resistance: Maximum 6mm of cross around a scratch after 1000
hours of continuous salt spray.
Wall mounted cabinets
Wall mounted cabinets can be used to house the patch panels and the active devices
where less than 16 units of space is required (including 20% spare extra space). They shall
meet the following criteria:
- 19”format.
- Height of minimum 9 units, maximum 12 units.
- Width of 600 mm, and depth of 600 mm.
- Pivoting to allow easy access to the rear of the cabling.
- Fitted with one set of 19”rails in the front.
- Fitted with lateral cable support on both sides.
- Have key lockable front door.
- Fitted with a grounding kit.
- Include 2 fans connected to a thermostat.
- Fitted with a 5 way power strip.(or more as per power requirements, without exceeding
the power rating of the cabinet)
- Fitted with a curved safety glass front door.
All wall mounted cabinets must have the following ratings:
- Rated IP 20 according to IEC 60529.
- Rated IK 08 according to IEC 62262.
- EIA 310-D.
- Loading of 3kg per unit of space. (ie: 18kg for a 9u cabinet)
- Tested for corrosion resistance: Maximum 6mm of cross around a scratch after 1000
hours of continuous salt spray.

2.1.16. Horizontal Cable Management Panels

Horizontal management panels inside cabinets will meet the following criteria:
- 19”format, metal structure.
- 1 or 2 units.
- 4 cutouts
- 5 plastic rings of minimum depth 90mm. Rings must be durable, flexible, and must
protect the bend radius of the patch cords.
2.2. Execution
2.2.1. Distribution and location of workstation outlets
The workstation outlet is the access point that houses all the connecting devices enabling a
user to connect to the cabling system. This can also be isolated outlets in a corridor used to
connect a network printer or a phone, for example. Outlets shall be located in the rooms in
such a way as to preserve the aesthetic quality.
Refer to the drawings hereinafter for the distribution of the outlets between the different
floors of the buildings. Their exact location is determined by the indications of the works
manager during the execution phase.
Unless otherwise specified, the number of user telecommunication outlets is defined
according to the useable surface area (see drawings). The following rule is applied:
Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 98/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

- Two RJ45 outlets for 10 m2 of useable space i.e. aside from passageways, technical
rooms, toilets, lifts, etc., generally 80% of the total area.

2.2.2. Patch cords and fiber jumpers

The Contractor is to provide cords and jumpers for:
- Connecting workstations to RJ45 outlets. This requires planning for sufficient
quantities of several different cord lengths, keeping to the maximum length of 5
meters.
- Allowing for computer and telephone patching.
- Allowing active devices to be connected together through the fiber backbone.
- Unless otherwise specified, the following quantities of copper Cat.6 cords shall be
supplied:
- 9ft RJ45-RJ45 Cat.6 cords at the work area for 70% of the ports.
- 3ft RJ45-RJ45 Cat.6 cords in the IC for 15% of the ports.
- 5ft RJ45-RJ45 Cat.6 cords in the IC for 20% of the ports.
- 7ft RJ45-RJ45 Cat.6 cords in the IC for 20% of the ports.
- 9ft RJ45-RJ45 Cat.6 cords in the IC for 15% of the ports.
The Employer representative reserves the right to modify the quantities of patch cords
needed according to the final design. Unless otherwise specified, the following quantities of
fiber jumpers shall be supplied:
- 10ft duplex jumpers in the IC to allow usage of 50% of the cores in the backbone
cables.
- 10ft duplex jumpers allow usage of 100% of the fiber-to-the-desk outlets. (if any)
- According to design, jumper wire for the MC, and 110-RJ45 patch cords may be
needed. The Tenderer will indicate quantities recommended.

2.2.3. Telecommunication rooms

- The telecommunications rooms (TR) will house the enclosures for the patching.
- TR should be equipped with minimum lighting that enables patching and connecting
operations to be carried out while minimizing the risk of errors.
- TR should be sufficiently ventilated to ensure that the temperature does not exceed
24°C, to control humidity, and to prevent dust.
- TRs are to be located at some distance or insulated from high voltage transformers, lift
machinery motors, radio transmitters, and any equipment or environment that
generate high EMI.
The Tenderer will inform the Employer representative of any non compliance.

2.2.4. Enclosure components

Enclosure configuration (cable entry, cable management, etc.) shall be the same for each
IC.
An IC comprises:
- Optical computer backbone cable entry.
- Copper telephone backbone cable entry.
- Outgoing cables corresponding to user need:
A minimum of 20% of spare space is to be provided for future extensions.
Each switch and each copper patch panel will be backed up by cable management panels
that enable clean patching. (Only angled panels used in a rack do not require one
horizontal cable management panel each.) Dimensioning will be 1U of management panel

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 99/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

for every 24 ports.

Cable management panels are to be dimensioned to comply with the bend radius of the
patch cords, even when all the patch panel ports are used, and will be fitted on
standardized 19" structures.

2.2.5. Horizontal distribution

A Category 6 four-twisted-pair cable will be assigned to each RJ45 connector in the user
outlets.
Pair assignment shall be that according to T568-B method. From the IC, cables are routed
either:
- In surface-mounting raceways for workstations or in sleeves installed for this purpose
between cross-connect and raceways.
- In cable trays located in false ceilings, ready to feed the workstations in the false
ceiling itself. Cable trays shall be flat bottomed and of the perforated tile type and are
to be fixed by hangers or brackets every two meters at the most. Support centers must
be spaced according to the cable load and span, as specified for the cable tray’s type
and class by the manufacturer and applicable electrical codes.
- In metal conduits for fewer than 5 cables. Interior diameter to be 27mm for 4 and 5
cables, 21mm for 3 cables or less (Cat.6 UTP). The bend radius of any portion of the
conduit pathway must be at least six times the diameter of the conduit.
Conduit bends should be smooth and even and should not contain kinks or other
discontinuities that may have detrimental effects on pulling tension or cable integrity during
or after installation. All conduits to be equipped with a plastic or nylon line (also called a pull
cord) that has a minimum test rating of 90 kg (200 lb).
Back boxes must be minimum 40mm deep. Floor boxes must be deep enough as to
respect the bend radius of the cable and the patch cords.
The horizontal distribution network has uniform characteristics, whatever the type of floor,
the only specific parameters being the number and location of the user outlets.
Maximum cable length is 90 meters between the end outlet and the IC.
Avoid as far as possible transition or consolidation points or MUTOA. The project technical
manager shall be notified if any are required.
To enable several re-cabling operations, each RJ45 outlet shall have 30 (thirty) centimeters
cable slack.
An additional cable slack of about 3 (three) meters shall be planned for the cabling in all the
enclosures in the technical rooms, also to enable eventual re-cabling operations.
These additional lengths of cable shall be organized so as to avoid creating loops that are
too small and that degrade link performance. Recommended procedure is to make a
“detour” with the cable tray so that cable length is increased while keeping cables
organized. If space is unavailable for the detour, then slack will be kept in a figure of eight.

2.2.6. Vertical distribution

The rack mount fiber patch cabinets will be mounted into the 19” enclosures or wall
cabinets supplied as part of this work section. They shall ensure proper cable mechanical
strength suited to each type of fiber optic cable and to the connection method
recommended by the manufacturer.
No strand-by-strand tension resulting from a cable or fiber being too short, an unsuitable
support or due to insufficient fiber bend limiting will be tolerated.
At least 7 (seven) meters of optical cable shall be provided as slack on each side for
multimode fibers and 10 (ten) meters for single mode fibers to ensure any re-cabling.
Backbone cables will be located in cable trays that shall be flat bottomed and of the
perforated tile type and are to be fixed by hangers or brackets every two meters at the
most. Support centers must be spaced according to the cable load and span, as specified

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 100/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

for the cable tray’s type and class by the manufacturer and applicable electrical codes.
2.2.7. Cable management
All fitted cables shall be routed through trunking installed by the "Civil Engineering – Low
Voltage" work section and/or by cable trays.
All cable trays will be designed for 40% usage, and will never exceed 60% usage with all
cables installed. In any case, the Contractor is to notify the project manager or project
manager's representative of any close installation that may cause problems such as:
circulation of fluids, neon tubes, etc.
The contractor will also inform the project manager if any of the cable management
solutions are insufficient or non compliant with standards (cables tray too small, back boxes
or floor boxes with insufficient depth), and must specify if the issue may affect the
performance of the system.
On cable trays, cables are to be fixed in bundles of maximum of 48 cables using removable
cable clips with clamp control of minimum 12mm width, at distances of about 60 cm,
avoiding, where possible intervals that are too regular so as to prevent the generation of
harmonics.
Vertically in the racks and cabinets, cables will be fixed with Velcro™ type straps of
minimum width 19mm, in bundles of maximum of 48 cables.
On the rear cable support bar of the patch panels, cables will be fixed with Velcro™ type
straps of minimum width 10mm.
Care must be always taken that the ties are not too tight as to avoid deforming the outer
jacket and damaging the cables' internal structure.
The “thin white” plastic cable ties are always prohibited.

2.2.8. Grounding
There shall be only one grounding network, and therefore no distinction between the
computer ground and the electric ground. This requires a maximum meshing of all the
metal parts (e.g. cable trays) such as indicated in standard ANSI-J-STD-607.A and IEEE
142.
The Contractor is to ensure the connection to earth in compliance with good engineering
practice: this will cover every installed metal structure.
Cross-connect facilities and 19 inch enclosures are to be earthed, and at the time of
installing systems.
During the installation, special attention shall be paid to strict compliance with grounding
rules. The building grounding installation shall ensure a maximum potential difference of 1
V RMS between any two connection points.
The rules mentioned above shall also be complied with as regards metal ducts.
Grounding must be done in accordance with all applicable codes and regulations.

2.2.9. Electromagnetic compatibility

At the time of designing a structured cabling system, it is essential to take account of
issues of protection against electromagnetic emission and immunity. Cabling is considered
a passive system and it is therefore impossible to test its electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC) on an individual basis. Devices that have been designed for these applications shall
comply with the standards on electromagnetic compatibility, in order to avoid degradation
of the characteristics of the system. When developing the project, it is necessary to pay
special attention to this factor, so as to best protect the integrity of the signals against
interference and disturbances that are internal and, in particular, external to the
transmission lines. The minimum distance between LV and ELV shall comply with ISO/IEC
11801 ed2:2002 and ISO/IEC 18010, and to all applicable codes and regulations.

2.2.10. Drilling
The Contractor is to drill all the necessary holes and shall be responsible for filling in these
holes.
Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 101/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

No cable is to be flush-mounted directly across wall or floor feed-through. Any feed through
shall include a protection comprising a sleeve or conduit with a protection.
The Tenderer is reminded that the making of any holes in the ceiling shall require the
Employer representative's approval.

2.2.11. Connections
Connection of the cables to the cross-connect facilities is to be carried out according to
good engineering practice, and as to guarantee highest performance of the system.

2.2.12. Marking
Marking labels shall be created using a dedicated software program in order to ensure that
the marking complies with standard ANSI/TIA/EIA 606-A. Labels enabling easy marking
shall be inserted. The Contractor is to ensure marking of all the installed equipment:
- The RJ45 outlets.
- Each end of each cable (horizontal and vertical distribution), on the technical room
side and the outlet side.
- The RJ45 patch panels (telephone and computer).
- The rack mount fiber patch cabinets
- The telephone wiring blocks, indicating the serviced areas and the various outgoing
cables.
The method for labeling and marking is to be submitted to the project manager or project
manager's representative for approval at the time of the execution studies.
Labels on the outlets and patch panels must be either printed paper inside the clear plastic
cover designed for it, or engraved adhesive plastic. Adhesive paper (type “Brady”) will not
be accepted as it can be removed to easily while cleaning. Cables are to be labeled at both
ends using self-laminating wrap around labels.
For horizontal distribution, labeling will include (when relevant): Building, floor, enclosure,
outlet number.
For fiber vertical distributions, an identification label fixed inside the glass door of the fiber
cabinet will enable identification of the origin and type of the cables when looking from the
outside, and of all individual cores when opening the door (back side of the label). These
shall be repeated at both ends of the cable.

2.3. Work acceptance

2.3.1. Principle
Acceptance tests will take place at the end of the work project.
The installation compliance is checked in relation to the specifications of this document as
per the following criteria:
- Certification tests compliance with standard ANSI/TIA/EIA.
- Compliance with the technical file submitted at the start of the work, with the drawings
for cable management and outlets layout.
- Cable connection.
- Marking of the distributed outlets and the distribution enclosures.
- Systematic grounding.
- Quality of the fitting.
- Filling in of all the holes.
- Equipment: layout, quantities.
- Testing and inspection files.
- Test validity.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 102/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

During the testing phase (as well as during the execution phase), if the Employer
representative records one or several deteriorations in the locations made available to the
Contractor at the start of the work, the Contractor shall be responsible for any renovation
work.

2.3.2. Testing the cabling system

The contract giver may reserve the right to be present at any time during the tests and,
once the test phase is over, to select at random up to five (5) percent of the total of the
copper and optical links in order to re-test them and compare them with the results given in
the technical certification tests.
Any test that has not been carried out according to the methods described in this document
shall be repeated and will not be invoiced. If more than two (2) percent of the total of the
tests fail, the whole cabling system shall be re-tested at no additional cost.
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing the test equipment during the acceptance
tests.

2.3.3. Copper cables

Visual tests for Cat.3 backbone and Cat.6
As regards an installation with twisted pairs, among other things the test shall verify the
following:
- Environmental limitations.
- Cable bend radius.
- Maximum jacket removal of 25 mm.
- Untwisting lengths less than or equal to a half-twist.
- Absence of unpaired parallel wires
- Marking labels.
- The connections are correctly made.
- Continuity is ensured along the whole length of the link.
- Free of any short circuits
- Maximum lengths are respected.
- Each pair is properly insulated with respect to the other pairs and with respect to the earth.
Measurements
Cat.3: Continuity tests will be made on 100% of Cat.3 links.
Cat.6:100% of links will be tested for compliance with standard ANSI/TIA/EIA 568 B.2-1
which shall result in:
- The name of the certification company.
- The name of the operator.
- The type, serial number and software version of the instrument used.
- The identification number of the tested link system.
- The type of test carried out (class E link).
- The connection (including earth continuity for FTP cables).
- The length of each permanent link.
- The length of each channel.
- The results of all the tests carried out with the tester with the version of the software used.
The cable's NVP (Nominal Velocity Propagation) shall be taken into account for accurate
length measurements.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 103/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

The test method will be “Permanent Link”, except if 110 connectors are used in which case
“Channel” will be tolerated.
“Basic Link” is never acceptable as it is obsolete.
All test devices of the same type shall be supplied by the same manufacturer and the
results produced shall have a consistent format.
Approved devices for Cat.6 testing:
Fluke Networks testers of Level III or better, with latest software version, and with
calibration up to date
Results
In order to insure proper performance of the cabling throughout the 20 years lifetime, 100%
of the links installed will be tested and show passing results for the entire frequency range.

2.3.4. Optical Fibers

The device used will enable saving of the test and calibration of the device on all necessary
wavelengths. Output power of the light source will be –20dBm minimum for multimode
testing, and –10dBm minimum for single mode testing.
100% of the fiber links will be tested.
The certificate shall state:
- The name of the certification company.
- The name of the operator.
- The type, serial number and software version of the instrument used.
- The identification number of the tested section.
Testing methods will comply with ANSI/TIE/EIA-526-7-98 for single mode fiber and
ANSI/TIE/EIA-526-14-A-98 for multimode fiber.
The characteristics below shall be examined and checked on each fiber:
- The wavelength used.
- Attenuation of the link.
- Length of the link.
For backbone links, the measurements mentioned above shall be made at a wavelength of
850 nm and 1300 nm for multimode fibers and 1310 and 1550 nm for single mode.
For horizontal links (i.e. fiber to the desk), only measurements at 850nm are required.
All fiber links (horizontal and backbone) will be tested both ways.
Measurements will show fiber links to be in accordance with 10Gigabit requirements
according to standards TIA/EIA 568B-1 and 568B1-3, and in accordance with the limit
values stated in the horizontal link and backbone limits stated in the same standard.

2.3.5. Grounding network

A milli-ohmmeter shall be used to measure the resistance between any two points of the
grounding network. This resistance shall
This means that any metal connection point shall have a contact resistance of less than 5

A visual inspection of the whole grounding network shall also be carried out since the
missing connection of some metal components that cannot be detected by the measuring
instruments in a simple way may cause malfunctions.
The measurement and inspection is the scope of work of the company installing the
grounding network, but any company involved with the structured cabling or networking will
be required to visually inspect the grounding and report any malfunction.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 104/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

2.3.6. Cabling certification

In compliance with standard ISO/IEC 11801 2nd edition 2002/09, ANSI/TIA/EIA 568- B.2,
or CENELEC EN 50173-1: 2002, each CAT 6 twisted-pair cable section or each fiber optic
cable section shall be certified to proof its compliance with the minimum characteristics
required by the standard mentioned above. It is mandatory for the network administrator to
receive the original certification together with the calibration certificate for the instruments
that have been used, and all test results of the concerned links.

2.4. Documentation
Full documentation shall be provided in both printed and electronic format.
At the start of the work, the Contractor is to deliver the execution drawings to the Employer
representative.
The Contractor is to provide, in the form of tables, a technical acceptance test report that
shall guarantee that the whole cabling infrastructure has been tested and validated as per
the standards in force. The information required is:
- The reference number with the departure and arrival point for each cable, the type of cable
and its identifier.
- Results of the tests relating to the standards used.
- For the fiber optic cables, overall optical budget for each link
- Date and time of the tests.
- Final result of each test: Pass/Fail.
- etc.
The results of each test (graphs and values) given by the measuring instruments shall be
supplied on an electronics support such as CD-ROM, along with any proprietary software
(other than Excel, Access, CSV files, etc.) required. A certificate signed by an authorized
person from your company shall accompany these electronic reports guaranteeing the
authenticity of the information.
The documentation delivered at the end of the service will also comprise:
- A set of "as built" drawings with the locations of the outlets for the cross-connect facilities,
cable routing systems and cable duct insertion points.0}
- The "as built" drawings for the technical rooms (with enclosure drawings):
- The distribution diagrams and details of the connection blocks.
- The technical data sheets for each item of installed equipment.
- The reports on the tests carried out.
As part of its offer, the Contractor is to provide a standard example of the acceptance test
report that is to be used. The Contractor is also to provide the parts list for any equipment
implemented with the operating instructions and the delivery notes.

3. Call for Tenders Regulation

3.1. The offers
The Tenderer is invited to take account of the difficulties of work execution on site. No
supplementary price may be requested for work that may have been underestimated
through lack of knowledge that may or may not be attributed to the contract giver as
regards the entire conditions of execution.

3.2. Conformity
A cabling system is intended to provide an integrated communication system, independent
from the transmission equipment (computer, printers, network equipment, etc.), as well as
from the protocols used (Ethernet, Token Ring, TCP/IP, etc.), while taking account of the
future developments and uses for which the bandwidth shall always require further
extension.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 105/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Therefore, the cabling system shall perfectly comply with the standards and shall be
characterized by an open architecture, as indicated in standard ISO/IEC.
Cabling shall comply with international standards and the regulations in force.
If, during the execution of the work, new regulations or standards come into force, the
Contractor shall make the required modifications to ensure that the installations delivered
at the time of acceptance are compliant with the latest provisions.

3.3. Samples
All installed equipment shall be submitted to the Employer representative for approval. For
each equipment, the Tenderer shall indicate in its offer the type, supplier and catalogue
number as a list classified by equipment type.

3.4. Execution of the work

The worksite manager will be responsible for checking the conformity of the work with the
requirements defined in this specification and for carrying out the work acceptance tests.
A weekly worksite or work progress meeting is to be scheduled to keep the Employer
representative informed of work progress.
The Contractor also agrees to make every effort to maintain the worksite in as clean a state
as possible. The Employer representative requests that the Contractor should carry out
systematically full cleaning of the worksite every week. In case of non-execution, the
Employer representative will entrust the mission to another company, whose invoice shall
be forwarded to the contractor.
3.5. Warranties
The Tenderer shall specify the type and period of the warranties it is able to propose, in
particular, covering:
- The transmission class type: Class D 100 MHz, Class E 250 MHz, and Class O for optics.
- The cabling components with certificates of compliance with standards from at least one
independent laboratory.
- The applications supported by the structured cabling.
- Conformity with electromagnetic compatibility.
The established warranty contract shall clearly involve all three parties; the Manufacturer of
the solution; the Installer and the Company benefiting from this warranty.

3.5.1. The contractor

The Tenderer shall submit detailed documentation on the components used, using photos
or graphics taken from the manufacturer's documentation.
The Tenderer shall be able to provide proof of a significant similar installation
demonstrating real experience in the implementation of the manufacturer's cabling
solutions.
The Tenderer shall include the approved installer certificate evidencing its qualification.
As part of the sales commitments, the installer is to include in its proposition the 20 year
product and applications warranty for the cabling system.

3.5.2. The system warranty

The system warranty is to refer to the performance defined by the rules and standards
EIA/TIA 568 B with all addenda, and ISO 11801: 2002:
To guarantee the technological follow-up of the standards for the defined period, the
product commitment shall clearly demonstrate the ability of the supplier selected by the
installer to manufacture, by its own industrial means, the components marketed by said
supplier Description of production units and range assignment, production of ISO 9001
certificates.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 106/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

The customer will therefore be covered by both the installer's legal warranty and by the
manufacturer's system warranty.
The cabling system shall be guaranteed products and applications for a period of
twenty (20) years. During this period, the warranty is to cover components, cables
and connectors as well as the complete cabling system including labor.
It will include an applications assurance to cover all applications designed to work on the
cabling system and approved by ANSI/EIA/TIA 568 (B.1, B.2, B.3).
Products found to be defective during the period covered by warranty shall be rapidly
replaced by new components.

3.6. Scope of the service

The Contractor shall carry out the following work:
- Submission of execution studies file prior to the work.
- Supply and installation of capillary and primary distribution cable supports
- Supply, installation and connection of capillary distribution cables.
- Supply, installation and connection of fiber optic backbone cables.
- Supply, installation and connection of the patching connectivity for capillary distributions.
- Supply and installation of enclosures or cabinets.
- Supply of cords and adaptors such as defined below:
- Connection of workstations to terminal outlets sockets.
- Supply and installation of fiber optic connectivity equipment.
- Supply of the optical jumpers.
- Marking, documentation, testing and acceptance tests for the whole installation.
- Connection of the building's computer earth using electrical earth well.
- Final connection for all structure cable shall be done by contractor.

END OF SUB-SECTION

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 107/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

SUB-SECTION 17210
PARKING BARRIER SYSTEM

PART 1

GENERAL

This Section includes the guidelines for the, Engineering, Installation and Commissioning of a complete
Parking Barrier System as specified in this section and as shown on the drawings from an approved
supplier.

The system shall be supplied, installed, tested and commissioned by the authorized dealer of the system
with more than five years experience in the market.

Specifications included in this section are indicative and is to be considered as the minimum requirement,
equipment & software that shall be delivered at the time of implementing the project shall be the latest
versions available in the market and shall form a complete system.

The system shall be compatible with controlling by fire alarm system.

ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

All equipment installed shall not require readjustments of controls, realignment, software reloading or
reconfiguring when operating under the following conditions:

- The control areas indicated on drawing shall be air-conditioned.

- Equipment installed outside shall be capable to operate at their nominal performances under
the Atmospheric environmental conditions in UAE.

SUBMITTALS:

The following documentation shall be submitted for Engineer / Employer’s approval before
commencing of any work.

- Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data with Compliance Statement as per the
specifications issued.
- Drawings: Submit Schematic & Layout drawings of the systems.
- Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for all systems of security and electrical power
connections to equipment and components.

QUALITY ASSURANCE:

The following association and organization shall be referred to with respect to standards as they apply to
the materials and equipment provided under this Section. Electronics Industries Association (EIA):
Publications and Engineering Publications.

Single Source Responsibility: Parking Barrier System Equipments shall be of single manufacturer to the
maximum extent.

WARRANTY

Submit written guarantee signed by the contractor, manufacturer for the period of one year from the date
of substantial completion. The guarantee shall cover the repair and replacement of defective materials

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 108/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

and workmanship as directed by the Engineer.

General Description:

Comply with General conditions of contract, conditions of particular Application and the
Requirements in the Specifications.

This includes, but is not limited to, the following works:

Parking control system limiting traffic entry to the Building by means of automatic gate arms,
magnetic loops, electronic-eye and the associated electrical controls including remote controls.
Supply and install long parking gate arms for the required quantity as shown in the drawings.
Exact locations shall be as shown in the drawing.

Gates shall be opened using the Proximity Access cards or Remote Access as per the Employer
requirements.

- Number of (PA) OR (RA)

1- 1 no for each office
2- 1 no for each shop
3- 2 no for each flat one bedroom
4- 2 no for each flat two bedrooms
5- 3 no for each flat three bedrooms

Gate Arm Shaft: Provide with permanently lubricated bearings.

Gate Arm Motor: Heavy duty sleeve bearings capacitor type motor with Solenoid operated brake
control, Control by heavy-duty relay with ample current carrying contacts to operate the full starting
load; Thermal overload circuit breaker protection with automatic reset; Fused protection for motor,
relay and solenoid power.
Provide mechanical means to operate gate arm to raise/ lower in case of power or system failure.

Gate Control Panels: The panels shall contain the 24 volt DC power supply, with solid state
components throughout, as well as manual control switches and circuit breaker protection of the
AC supply and low voltage power source. Contain the control circuitry on a pluggable glass epoxy
board unit that determines the mode of the gate operation. Provide key switch to raise, Lower and
select automatic functioning of the gate. Provide a control to activate or inactivate the safety
device. Control panel shall be constructed to IP54, have lockable Perspex front doors. Control
panel shall be provided with a power disconnect and is concealed (flush) mounted. Earth fault
protection shall be provided for 3 phase motors.

Car Detectors: Loop detector wrapped in vinyl plastic to connect to Loop Detector unit. Detector
shall be completely transistorized and mounted in gate housing. It shall be self-tuning, digital
design and shall operate with circuitry that recognizes vehicle movement into the loop and an
unlimited duration of vehicle pressure or a pulse as required.

Electrical Power: 240 volts, single phase, 50 Hz or 415 volts, three phase, 50 Hz. Provide flashing
amber lights on the arm.

FABRICATION:
Fit joints and junctions between components tightly, in true planes, and to prevent entry of water to
collect in component voids.

Fabricate work switch materials and components sizes, metal gauges, reinforcing, anchors, and
fastenings of adequate strength to ensure that it will remain free of warping, buckling, opening of
joints and seams, and distortion within limits of intended and specified use. Conceal and weld
connections.
Cleanly and smoothly finish exposed edges of materials including holes. Incorporate reinforcing and
attached anchorage for built-n products.
Incorporate holes and connections for work installed under other sections of this specification.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 109/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

INSTALLATION:
All of the system installation work shall be carried out / supervised by the specialist subcontractor.
However, the necessary containment and electrical power to support the security system shall be the
responsibility of the MEP Contractor. The cables necessary for the Security system shall be as
recommended by the specialist supplier. Also, the MEP Contractor shall co-ordinate with the Main
Contractor and the specialist supplier to complete the installation successfully.

TESTING, COMMISSIONING AND HANDOVER:

The complete installation shall be tested and commissioned by the specialist sub contractor who is
responsible to demonstrate the operation of the system to the satisfaction of the Employer's personnel
or the Engineer. Sufficient Training shall be given to the Employer’s personnel for a smooth operation
of the system.

MAINTENANCE:
The Subcontractor shall be responsible for the free of charge regular inspection and maintenance as
recommended by the manufacturer of the complete system for one year after the official handing over
of the system

DRAWINGS:
Prior to commencement of any works the Contractor shall prepare and submit working drawings
detailing but not limited to:

1. Proposed cable routes.

2. Component / Equipment layouts
3. Schematic Diagrams.

As-Built Drawings and O/M Manuals

Prior to handing over the works, the Contractor is to supply the Engineer with four sets of prints, 1
electronic copy of all "As Built" drawings relating to the supplied systems, four bound sets of all
Operation and Maintenance Manuals for all equipment installed.

END OF SUB-SECTION

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 110/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

SUB-SECTION 17220
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

The contractor shall supply and install access control system as specified in this section and as shown on
the drawings.

Specifications included in this section are indicative and considered as minimum, equipment & software
that shall be delivered at the time of implementing the project shall be the latest versions available in the
market.

The system shall be compatible with controlling by fire alarm system.

ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

All equipment installed shall not require readjustments of controls, realignment, software reloading or
reconfiguring when operating under the following conditions:

a. The control areas indicated on drawing shall be air-conditioned.

b. Equipment installed outside shall be capable to operate at their nominal performances
under the Atmospheric environmental conditions in UAE.

SUBMITTALS

The following documentation shall be submitted for Engineer / Employer’s approval before
commencing of any work.

a. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data with Compliance Statement as per the specifications
issued.
b. Drawings: Submit Schematic & Layout drawings for all systems of security.
c. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for all systems of security and electrical power
connections to equipment and components.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

a. The following association and organization shall be referred to with respect to standards as they
apply to the materials and equipment provided under this Section.

Electronics Industries Association (EIA): Publications and Engineering Publications.

b. Single Source Responsibility: Access Control System Equipments shall be from a single
manufacturer to the maximum extent.

WARRANTY

Submit written guarantee signed by the contractor, manufacturer for the period of One year from the date
of substantial completion. The guarantee shall cover the repair and replacement of defective materials
and workmanship as directed by the Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

ACS SYSTEM
The contractor shall appoint a specialist subcontractor for the supply, installation; commissioning and
training of a PC based Access Control System to control and monitor personnel and alarm activity. The
Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 111/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

proposed products are to be supported by a local distributor/installer with sufficient experience in the
industry. Only the equipment approved by the engineer shall be delivered to site or installed. The
system shall include control panels, proximity cards and card readers, magnetic door contacts and
magnetic locks as indicated on the drawings. The system shall include any additional accessories or
parts those are not indicated on this specification and drawings shall be considered and included to
form a fully operational system to the satisfaction of the engineers.

Different Intelligent control unit configurations shall be available to allow various combinations of
card/card reader or keypad inputs, relay outputs, and alarm inputs to maximize system hardware
flexibility. Panels (Master and Slave) will be connected to provide the exact number of inputs and
outputs required for each application. All panels shall support a fully distributed processing
architecture so that the panels make its own access decisions to facilitate instant response to card
reads, no degradation of system performance due to communication loss and total independence
from the PC. The intelligent controller shall have Intel micro processor as its engine and its operating
system resides in the flash ROM of the controller.

All time zones, access levels, linking events, holiday schedules, and global functions remain
operational. Upon communication loss to the host all controllers shall automatically buffer event
transactions until the host communications is restored, at which time the buffered events will be
automatically uploaded to the host. The system maintains full feature capability regardless of the style
of the communications from the PC.

The doors shall operate Fail safe/Fail Secure as per Engineers requirements on site and as per the
drawings.

1.1 System Features

The system should be able to accommodate:

1. Support a minimum of 170 different card reader formats
2. Support a minimum of 32,000 Locations having grouping capabilities to share
cardholder databases between sites.
3. Support a minimum of 99 user defined fields per Location.
4. Support a minimum of 32,000 system operators.
5. Support a minimum of 32,000 password profiles to determine accessibility of system
functions for each operator.
6. Support a minimum of 999 operator comments.
7. Support a minimum of 32,000 graphic alarm maps for full input, output, CCTV control,
DVR control, and alarm handling.
8. Support a minimum import of 21 graphic file types for maps.
9. Support a minimum of 32,000 custom action messages per Location to instruct operator
on action required when alarm is received.
10. Support a minimum of 32,000 ASCII output messages per Location for use to interface
with CCTV and pager systems.
11. Each controlled entry/exit shall have the ability to be locked (secured) and unlocked
(open) up to 4 times a day through time zone programming.
12. Each monitored input shall have the ability to be armed and disarmed up to 4 times a
day through time zone programming.
13. Each reader/keypad shall have the ability to be enabled/ disabled up to 2 times a day
through time zone programming.
14. Each card/code shall have the ability to be enabled/ disabled up to 4 times per day per
entry point through access level programming.
15. Support a minimum of 32,000 Access Levels.
16. Support a minimum of 4 Anti-Passback zones per Location.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 112/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

17. Automatic door unlock by time schedule, by user defined group or individually
18. CCTV Alarm Interface: Shall allow commands to be sent to CCTV systems during
alarms (or input change of state) thru serial ports.
19. Animated Response Graphics: Provide for highlighting Alarms with flashing Icons on
graphic maps.
20. Time and Attendance reporting shall be provided to match in/out reads and display
cumulative time in for each day and cumulative time in for length of the report.
21. Photo ID Badging: Provide ability to import images from bitmap file formats, digital
cameras, TWAIN cameras, scanners, or live video. Allows image cropping and editing,
WYSIWYG badge building application, and full badge printing/print preview capabilities.
22. Photo Recall on Card Use: Provide means that Images can be automatically displayed
on a workstation in response to any card read on any reader.
23. Operator Audit Trail: Provide for recording and reporting of all changes made to the
database. This option shall have the ability to be toggled off.
24. Shall have Name search engine with capabilities such as, can search by Last name,
First name, Company, User defined data,

1.2 Card technologies

The system should be able to support the following technologies:
Proximity, Magstripe, Bar Code, RF, Biometric, Weigand & Smart Card Technologies

1.3 Photo-ID & Badging

The system should also provide an inbuilt a fully integrated Photo ID module which should be
designed to provide an easy to use high quality personalized credentials and professional looking
template layouts. The features of this software must include…
1. Dual sided badge design and printing
2. Signature and fingerprint capture
3. Magnetic stripe encoding
4. Use of standard Windows compatible video and picture sources with direct access to native
settings
5. Direct and easy access to printer settings
6. Multiple templates

Card/badge printer to direct graphic print the cards with necessary software, camera, tripod and
scanner shall be provided with the system including supplies for printing 1000 cards.

2. Software Features
i. The software should be capable of providing the following:
ii. Live Video CCTV Monitoring
iii. Cardholder Video Verification
iv. Access Control Management
v. Alarm Monitoring & Response
vi. Elevator Control
vii. Parking Control
viii. Building Systems Control
The system should be capable of monitoring up to 250,000 unique alarm points. Each point
should be fully configurable for type of annunciation, priority, customizable action messages,
ASCII output, and executable link. Live graphic maps and color coded alarm handling
instructions guide operators in efficient response to each alarm. The system should be capable

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 113/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

of handling
i. 48,000 inputs or outputs per site
ii. 10,000 live graphic maps with automatic display on alarm
iii. 65,000 programmable action messages
iv. 10,000 programmable ASCII output messages
v. 99 assignable alarm priority levels

2 Intelligent Control Panel

The control panels shall have a standard configuration of 512K of ROM and 512K of RAM.
The Pre-Warn Output of the control panel unit shall be used to indicate the controlled door
being held open and about to go into alarm.

The unit shall have the following features:

 9600 Baud - Dial-up / 38400 Direct

 170 + Card, Reader and keypad formats.
 Flexible I/O Linking, Removable Terminal Blocks, Supports 4 State Input monitoring,
UL 294 Listed and CE approved

 Operating Temperature : 32 to 131F

 Panel voltage: 16.5VAC, 40VA

 AUX DC Voltage : 12 -24 VAC, 40VA

 Panel Current Draw : 550ma

 Panle Output 1 12VDC 1A Fused

 Panel Output 2 9VDC 300ma current Ltd

 Panel output 3 5VDC 300ma Fused

 Panel Output 4 12-24VDC 3A, Fused

 The transaction buffer shall automatically adjust to use any RAM not allocated for
system parameters. Upon completion of a download from PC or LAN to a Master ICP,
the Event Buffer size is reported to the PC or LAN and displayed on the Monitor
Screens

 The ICP unit shall be supplied complete with Processor Board, I/O board, Ribbon
Cable, 16 EOL Resistors, Enclosure, Lock and Key, Wiring Label, Anchors and Wire
Ties, Tamper Switch, and an External AC Power Indicator.

4 Access Cards
a. The RF programmable proximity Contact less, multiple applications ISO credit card size
card with high-speed read/write (106kbits/s) and data exchange with the reader as
specified in ISO 7816 shall be used in the system to provide the proximity technology and
photo identification.
b. The cards shall be plain white, wiegand encoded, gloss finish on both sides and shall be
directly printable on both sides.
c. The read distance of the cards using relevant proximity reader shall be upto 10 cms, with
fast transaction time of less than 100 ms.
d. Cards shall be constructed of laminated PVC, with data retention on temperature range of -
45 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C.
e. 300 nos. cards to be supplied with Video badging and life time warranty against defects in

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 114/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

materials and workmanship.

5 Proximity Card readers

The system shall be equipped with proximity card readers with keypad and a tamper switch as
shown on the drawings. This unit shall have a read range of more than six cms. The Proximity
Reader shall be a unitized reader with a standard Wiegand output that connects directly to the
access control panel without the use of an interface module. The reader shall be designed to
work with any HID proximity cards.

The card reader shall read the encoded data from the access card and/or transponder and
transmit the data back to the host panel, giving an audible and visual indication of a properly
read card and shall have a hold line that will buffer a card read until the panel has asserted
that the information can be sent up line.

1. This feature is required to prevent multiple reads from a single card presentation The reader shall
be powered from the access control panel (ICP) directly.

Construction Polycarbonate

Operating Voltage 10 to 15 VDC

Indications Bi color Green/Red, Amber LED and audible

tone

Temperature -30 to +65 Deg C

Humidity 5 -95%, relative (indoor model)

Cable Requirement 7 conductors 22 AWG shield

Reader Distance Max 150 m from the Panel, Standards FCC and
CE
The card reader shall have the following reader configuration options:

A. Reader beeps and flashes green on a card read, LED normally red.
B. Reader flashes green on a card read, LED normally red.
C. Reader beeps on card read, LED normally red.
D. Reader beeps and flashes green on a card read, LED normally off, red and green LED's controlled
individually.
E. Reader flashes green on a card read, LED normally off, red and green LED's controlled
individually.
F. Reader beeps on a card read, LED normally off, red and green LED's controlled individually.
G. Beeper and LED are controlled by host only, LED normally off, red and green LED controlled
individually.

6 Magnetic Door Contacts

Magnetic door contacts shall be provided on all doors equipped with the access control system as
indicated in the drawing to monitor the door status. It shall be possible to arm and disarm the doors
to be monitored manually or using the time zones in the system. The door contacts shall meet
following minimum specifications:

Contact Type: SPST, Gold under plating and deactivated Rhodium outer plating

Switch Cycles 50 Million

Operation Gap One Inch

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 115/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Colors: White, Brown, Grey

Construction Weatherproof, high impact ABS plastic
Rating 0.1 Amp/ 100 VDC
Temperature: -25 Deg. C to 70 Deg. C

The electromagnetic lock provided shall be suitable with the door type and shall meet following
minimum specifications:

7 Electromagnetic Locks

Holding Force 2700 Pounds (Main Door and entrances from

Car parks)
Operation Fail Safe (Door shall remain Open on Power
failure)
Locking Using Internal circuitry to sense door closure
Door lock delay time 2 to 6 seconds
Lock Status Using built in NO/NC SPDT contact rated 1A/
monitoring 24V DC

Door Gap 3 mm Maximum

Power Supply 12 to 28 VDC (Max. 1.8 Amp. Pull/ 500 mA
Hold).
8 Auto Tag reader

The system proposed shall be designed with vehicle tag system for the gate barriers/ sliding
doors for the parking entrances and exits. The gate barriers/ sliding gates are not a part of this
specification and will have to be integrated with the Access Control System specified as herewith

The Vehicle Tags shall be placed behind the windshield and will be identified by the tag reader in
order to control the entry/ exit of the vehicles.

 Shall have a facility to check the identification by protocol.

 The reader shall be weather proof and the read range will be maintained within four inches
 Shall be microwave directivity

Minimum reading angle shall be 45 Deg

Reading range 8 to 10 meters
Frequency Band 2.45 GHz
Number of reading channels 31
Operating temperature 20o C to 70o C
Storage temperature 20o C to 80o C
Relative humidity 90% without condn.

Supply minimum 200 auto tags as described here under.

9 Auto Tag

The auto tag shall be semi passive type applicable for vehicle identification. The tag must be
attached with the Velcro backing on to the wind shield. The tag shall be able to program many
times. The memory of the tag shall be 180 bits or 30 alphanumeric characters. The auto tag is
capable of reading from few cms to 10 meters by using microwave based communication.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 116/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Operation temp shall be -30oC to 80oC, Frequency 2.45 GHz.

10 PC Requirements
1. Pentium IV – 2.4 GHz (or better), Windows 2000 or NT Workstation Version 4.0 (or higher)
Service Pack 3 or greater if required, 256 MB of RAM
2. Application software shall be provided on CD only. History archives and database backups
performed in the software will utilize the floppy drive or other specified target drive.
3. Drives: 1 Floppy Drive 3.5", 1.44M, 1 CD-RW Drive 16x speeds (or better)
4. Hard Disk: 40 GB Hard Disk (or better).
5. Monitors: 21-inch Color monitor, CRT VGA - or better
6. Serial Ports: Two Serial Ports

INSTALLATION

All of the system installation work shall be carried out / supervised by the specialist subcontractor.
However, the necessary containment and electrical power to support the security system shall be the
responsibility of the MEP Contractor. The cables necessary for the Access Control system shall be as
recommended by the specialist supplier. Also, the MEP Contractor shall co-ordinate with the Main
Contractor and the specialist supplier to complete the installation successfully.

TESTING, COMMISSIONING AND HANDOVER

The complete installation shall be tested and commissioned by the specialist sub contractor who is
responsible to demonstrate the operation of the system to the satisfaction of the Employer's personnel
or the Engineer. Sufficient Training shall be given to the Employer’s personnel for a smooth operation
of the system.

MAINTENANCE
The Subcontractor shall include for and be responsible for the free of charge regular inspection and
maintenance as recommended by the manufacturer of the complete system for one year after the
official handing over of the system

DRAWINGS
Prior to commencement of any works the Contractor shall prepare and submit working drawings
detailing but not limited to:

1. Proposed cable routes.

2. Component / Equipment layouts
3. Schematic Diagrams.

As-Built Drawings and O/M Manuals

Prior to handing over the works, the Contractor is to supply the Engineer with four sets of prints, 1
electronic copy of all "As Built" drawings relating to the supplied systems, four bound sets of all
Operation and Maintenance Manuals for all equipment installed.

END OF SUB-SECTION

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 117/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

SUB-SECTION 17230
INTELLIGENT ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE DETECTION
AND VOICE EVACUATION SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 General requirements

1.2 Design Parameters
1.3 Quality Assurance
1.4 Approved
1.5 Brands

PART 2 FIRE DETECTION AND VOICE EVACUATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

PART 3 PRODUCTS

3.1 Fire Alarm control panel

3.2 Peripheral devices
3.3 Central Graphics Supervisor Computer
3.4 Network
3.5 Addressable device types/ Notification Devices
3.6 Fire Cables

PART 4 FIELD AND INSTALLATION WORK.

4.1 Drawing to be approved

4.2 Installation
4.3 Testing, Commissioning and handling over
4.4 Warranty

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 General requirements:

a) The contractor shall supply, install, test, connect and commission high quality fast-acting electronic
fire systems. An Analogue Addressable Fire Detection and voice evacuation System comprising
main fire control panel; heat sensors; Optical Sensors; heat and optical sensors combined in one
head; duct mounted sensors; break glass points; electronics sounders; speakers; amplifiers;
Paging microphone; including all loop cabling, network cabling, outputs to and inputs from other
systems and any other components and accessories deemed necessary for a safe, reliable and
satisfactory system, conforming to the relevant and applicable requirements and recommendations
of NFPA 72, NFPA101,UL, LPCB, Vds, EN54,BS5839,BS5445and BS5446 for Fire Alarm. The fire
decision on compliance shall be to the requirements of Civil Defense Authority and the Engineer.

The contractor shall ensure all system components offered should be manufactured by one
manufacturer who shall also be on the local Civil Defense Authority's (CDA) list of approved
manufacturers.

The fire alarm system in the retails shall be standalone connected to the main loop through IFU’s in
order to modify in the future by tenants.

1.2 Design Parameters

a) the complete system design shall comply with the current provision of the following standards:

National Electric code, Article 760

National Fire Protection Association Standards

NFPA72 National Fire Alarm code.
NFPA101 Life Safety Code.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 118/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

UL –Under Laboratories
EN54
British Standards- BS5446, BS 5839 and BS5445
LPCB
Vds Standard / VDE (Verband Deutcher Electrotechniker)
EMC Directive 89/336/EEC Electromagnetic compatibility Requirements
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
International Standard organization (ISO)
ISO-9000
ISO-9001
Local Civil Defense Authority Requirements

1.3 Quality Assurance

a) The equipment and installation supervision furnished under this specification is to be provided by a
manufacturer (independent dealers and/or distributors will NOT be considered) who has been
engaged in production of this type of equipment for at least ten (10) years.

Any Far East version of product will not be acceptable

b)
Attested Country of origin certificate should be provided for each any every felid device.

1.4 Approved Brand

Esser
Siemens
Tyco

PART 2 FIRE DETECTION AND VOICE EVACUATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Contractor must supply and install fire detection and voice evacuation system as per civil defense
requirements and approval.
The general system description is as described in the following few sections

a) The fire detection and alarm system shall be designed to facilitate accurate identification of the
source of heat/ smoke/ fire in their early stages to minimize occurrences of false alarms due to
faulty equipment, electrical transients, system faults etc.

b) The main Analogue Addressable Fire Control Panel shall be located as indicated in the drawing.
The scheme for the Construction is to be advised later.

c) The system shall be intelligent in operation with advanced decentralised intelligence technology.
Each detector shall have its own processor with algorithms built in the device to take a fire or fault
decision. System with centralised intelligence by providing signal levels to the control panel is not
acceptable.

d) The system will be capable of providing fire, fault disablement and supervisory monitoring facilities
as required by DIN EN 54 Pt 2. All devices on a loop shall have built in SHORT CIRCUIT LINE
ISOLATORS for wiring fault isolation to protect the system. “Group Circuit Monitors” which
isolate/protect sections of a loop circuit, i.e. a group of field devices are not acceptable.

e) System shall be of automatically addressable type i.e. all the devices on the loops of the FACP shall
be allocated addresses automatically from the PC / panel at the time of system power. The loop
devices shall also be able to commission by using PC interface without the need of FACP.

f) And also given an address during commissioning, the value of which shall be stored in non-volatile
memory, within the electronics module of the outstation. This value shall be read during loop
allocation and provided it is valid shall be used to setup the outstations primary address.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 119/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

g) Automatic Addressing shall cover the benefits of Soft Addressing and also overcome the limitations
of Hard Addressing. This means that If the devices are inserted or removed all the existing devices
shall keep the same address and programmed activations and use labels remain unchanged. The
panel with PC shall allocate the address to ensure that it is impossible for two devices to have the
same address. Fire Detection and Alarm Systems, which rely only on Coding, Programmer or hard
addressing techniques are not acceptable.
h) Facilities shall be provided to constantly monitor and check the following circuits and fault
conditions:
- The power supply to the loop /s;
- For open-circuit, short-circuit, earth fault and any other fault condition in the loop
wiring;
- For communication failure and errors in all cards and loops
- For faults in keyboard and printer circuits
- All devices, etc. shall be installed on the same loop.

i) All devices shall be assigned a maximum of 25 character or 2 lines of max. 30 characters each
with a ¼ VGA Display. In case of fire, fault or warning, the label of device sensing threshold shall
appear on visual display unit of the panel.

j) Any event i.e. Fire, fault or warning shall be recorded with time, date and place of occurrence in the
memory of FACP. These events can either be displayed on normal or ¼ VGA Display of the FACP
or printed, as required. Provision shall be done at the fire alarm control panels to silence the loop
powered alarm sounders but the visual indication shall remain until the system is reset. The
detectors shall have auto learn sensitivity adjustments. The main fire alarm control panels shall be
located as shown on the schematics and the floor drawings.

k) Voice Evacuation Master panel should be fully linked (Software integration) with the Fire Detection
panel.
l) The voice evacuation system shall feature number of zones as indicated in the shop drawing, each
served by two A/B circuits (Class B Wiring)

m) Alarm speaker amplification equipment shall be sized to provide the following wattage levels for
each location type of alarm speaker:

Speaker tapped at 1 watt must give at least a sound output of 81dBA@10ft.

 Public toilet alarm speaker: provide (1/2) watt of input power.

 Each mechanical room alarm speaker: provide (2) watt of input power.
 Each Stairwell alarm speaker: provide (1/2) watt of input power.
 Each elevator cab alarm speaker: provide (1/4) watt of input power.
 General floor Area like lobby, Rooms, corridor, offices: provide (1) watt of input power.

n) At Separate Speaker Circuit ( A/B configuration ) shall be provided per floor

o) As a minimum, alarm speaker amplification equipment shall be sized to provide the above
indicated wattage of input power to each location type of alarm speaker shown on the drawings,
plus twenty –five percent (25%) spare capacity to permit the addition of future alarm speakers.
The system shall include high quality 70.7 Vrms or 25Vrms line amplification.

p) Flush mounting mimic panel indicating the fire zones shall be provided, located at the Main
entrance lobby, which will indicate simple zone areas for quick identification by the Civil Defense
of a fire.
q) In the event of a fire being reported from the smoke/heat Detectors, activation of manual call points
or sprinkler operation the sequence of alarm operation shall be as follows: If a fire condition is
reported from a smoke detector then the evacuation will be done initially by the local integral
sounder. Then after a certain delay (to be agreed at the time of commissioning) the evacuation
message shall be announced on that fire zone only. If after 3 minutes the alarm has not been
acknowledged, the evacuation message shall also be announced on the other adjacent zones. All
other zones shall be given the Alert message. The evacuation of the building shall be staged in

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 120/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

phases to allow orderly movement of people.

r) If a Manual Break Glass Unit is activated or a sprinkler flow switch is operated, then the evacuation
shall be transmitted immediately to the affected fire zone plus the adjacent zones

s) Activation of the fire alarm system shall directly initiate some or all of the following to be agreed as
a part of the overall engineering policy.
 Signal to all elevator machine rooms indicating fire status (to control lifts)
 Release doors normally locked by magnetic devices.
 Release doors normally held open by magnetic devices
 Shutdown mechanical equipment ventilation plant
 Shutdown general exhaust fans
 Start up smoke extract fans
 Start up exhaust make up fans
 Start up stair vestibule pressurization fans
 Automatically operate fire dampers
 Initiate alert signals to panels in the adjacent office tower.
 Sprinkler valves, flow switches and other monitored valves shall be directly supervised by
the fire alarm systems.

These shall include but not limited to the following:

 Building automation system via OPC Protocol
 Emergency lighting system
Security system.
u) Voice Evacuation System may be configured for General Alarm All Call operation, Alarm by Zone or
Floor Above / Floor Below as required. Contact closures shall allow immediate broadcast of an
alarm signal and evacuation message to the appropriate area. Non-Alarm areas may receive alert
tones and messages as required or activated by the FACP.

v) To prevent unauthorized tampering, the voice evacuation system shall disable the microphone if
the microphone is keyed continuously for 3 minutes or more. Systems that do not have this feature
shall not be acceptable.

w) The alarm signal/evacuation message shall be broadcast until the FACP is reset, or until
emergency personnel interrupt the broadcast with a manual page. Frequency response of each
digital audio channel on the network shall be 400 to 4000 hertz.

x) The system shall include two-way communication system between the Main Fire Control Panel and
emergency phone jacks.
y) Emergency phone jacks shall be provided as shown on the plans. Each jack shall be mounted on a
stainless steel single gang plate with the words "Fire Emergency Phone" screened on each.

Fire Phone circuits shall be capable of connecting up to 5 phones on a circuit simultaneously.

A jack-in of a portable handset or taking a remote station off-hook shall generate a call-in signal at
the Master Panel. The associated LED shall flash until the call is acknowledged. It shall then switch
to a steady ON on acknowledgement. On disconnection of phone by the remote party the LED shall
extinguish.

Six Handsets should be provided in a metal cabinet

2.12 VOICE EVACUATION SYSTEM:

The voice evacuation system shall be ESSER Systems Series ESR HMX High Rise or approved
equivalent.

The HMX system capacity shall include at least one Master Panel and up to 250 Distributed Panels. The
system shall be microprocessor based, and shall be SOFTWARE INTEGRETED from the Fire Alarm
Control Panel, (FACP). The system shall have a high speed communication bus and have the capacity
for 6 channels of audio and data on a single pair of wires. The field wiring for the communication bus
may be configured for either Style "4" or Style "7" supervision. The system shall have the capacity for
Fire Fighters Phone. The system shall have a minimum capacity of 1000 control points.
Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 121/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

The Master Panel shall contain an integral microphone, dual channel digital message repeater, (DMR)
and digital tone generator, 220/230V AC power supply, and battery charger.
The system shall be modular in design, and shall be expandable such that additional system control
points may be configured. The system shall include integral self-diagnostic routines that shall continually
monitor system status, and shall indicate the precise type of trouble conditions should they occur in the
system. A trouble condition within the system shall cause
a trouble indication to be transmitted to the FACP.

Distributed panels shall provide a minimum of 4 Class "B" speaker circuits, expandable to eight total.
Alternately, panel may be configured for 4 Class "A" speaker circuits, up to 4 total.

Panel may be configured for 1 to 8 amplifiers. Panel must provide up to 6 simultaneous audio
channels and up to 8 Fire Phone circuits. Amplifiers will contain their own power supplies, battery
chargers and provide auxiliary power for other components. Speaker circuits shall be supervised for short
and open circuit conditions, and shall be able to withstand transient or continuous short-circuit conditions
without damage to the system.

Fire Phone circuits shall be capable of connecting up to 5 phones on a circuit simultaneously. A jack-in of
a portable handset or taking a remote station off-hook shall generate a call-in signal at the Master Panel.
The associated LED shall flash until the call is acknowledged. It shall then switch to a steady ON on
acknowledgement. On disconnection of phone by the remote party the LED shall extinguish.

System may be configured for General Alarm All Call operation, Alarm by Zone or Floor Above / Floor
Below as required. Contact closures shall allow immediate broadcast of an alarm signal and evacuation
message to the appropriate area. Non-Alarm areas may receive alert tones and messages as required
or activated by the FACP.

The alarm signal/evacuation message shall be broadcast until the FACP is reset, or until emergency
personnel interrupt the broadcast with a manual page. Frequency response of each digital audio channel
on the network shall be 400 to 4000 hertz.

To prevent unauthorized tampering, the voice evacuation system shall disable the microphone if the
microphone is keyed continuously for 3 minutes or more. Systems that do not have this feature shall not
be acceptable.

2.13 VOICE EVACUATION SYSTEM NETWORKS:

All voice messaging, public address and emergency phone duplex audio shall be transmitted digitally,
and fully supervised. True digital operation is required to assure identical and clear transmission
regardless of the system size, and immunity to hum and noise. Systems with analog voice channels with
digital control will not be accepted, as no encryption is provided, and security can easily be compromised.

Individual buildings shall have self-contained independent systems. These local control panels shall
generate emergency messages and provide microphone and fire phone control at the building fire
command center. Larger buildings and high-rises shall have independent HMX audio networks to
minimize wiring and installation costs.

Campus-wide master panels shall be provided at the security offices or Manned places or guard rooms.
These panels shall be capable of delivering recorded messages or live voice to any building, or all-call to
the entire campus. Emergency phones shall ring in at all master panel locations, and any operator can
respond.

All inter-building communications shall have capability of being wired via fibre-optic transmission, to
eliminate ground-loop, lightning, or transient voltage problems. Fibre optic cabling shall be industry-
standard multimode fibre, utilizing ST connectors. Fibre-optic transceivers shall be tested to tolerate up
to 15 dB of signal loss, to allow for long inter building distances and long-term reliable operation.

Networking panels shall be available to allow existing amplifiers to be tied into the campus wide network.

Equipment shall be listed to UL Standards 864, Control Panels for Fire Protective Signaling Systems, and
UL 1711, Amplifiers for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. Individual building systems shall be

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 122/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

configured as either single-channel or dual-channel, for simultaneous alarm and alert messaging.

The RS 485 voice and data transmission shall be via a high-speed multi-channel network. System
commands such as All-Call shall be virtually instantaneous, with a fully-loaded system processing
commands in less than 1/4 of a second. Systems that process commands sequentially, which results in
words being missed because of slow amplifier response, will not be acceptable.
The communication system shall have the capability to provide fire alarm signaling when connected to
any local fire alarm panel. Multi-message capacity and smart network connections shall permit additional
auxiliary functions, which are automatically overridden for alarm announcements.

Individual building systems shall be factory assembled, pre-programmed, and shipped to the job site. As-
built drawings for each panel, showing all field-wiring terminations, shall be included at the time of
shipment. Equipment which must be assembled, programmed, and tested in the field will not be
acceptable.

All system events shall be time-stamped and recorded within the local building system. This history log is
required in order to provide fast troubleshooting of fault conditions, whether internal or in field wiring.
Additionally, this log shall record system activity, including details of manual and automatic message
broadcast. In the case of a disaster event such as fire, tornado, or terrorist attack, this event log can be
valuable in evaluating emergency response. Systems which rely on LED’s to indicate fault conditions, or
do not log system activity, will not be accepted.

Amplifiers shall be available in 25, 50, or 100 watt units, field-selectable for 25 or 70 volt output. Remote
microphone units, with programmable switch banks for message and zone selection shall be available for
connection to any local panel within the overall system.

2.14 Signaling Devices for Voice Alarm:

These signaling devices shall include speakers, strobes and speaker strobe combination units. All these
shall be designed for semi-flush wall mounting to a 4” square box or surface mount using the back boxes.
The speakers shall be field selectable for either 25 VRMS or 70 VRMS operation and shall have the
wattage taps at 0.25 / 0.5 / 1 and 2 watts.

The strobes shall be available in variety of light intensity outputs for either random or synchronized
operation.

PART3 – PRODUCTS

3.1 Fire control Panel

Standard : NPFA 72 or EN54

UL or Vds or LPCB Approved

a) The panel shall be modular Multifunctional computer controlled using 32 bit processor. De-
centralized control and monitoring functions to be realized on the loop and spur.

b) The System Shall have capabilities for 254 intelligent initiation devices and can be expanded up to
2500 intelligent initiation devices. Loop circuit shall be wired style 7 (Class A).

c) The panel shall be complete with visual display unit capable of displaying 8 lines 40 characters
backlit display / ¼ VGA display as optional.

d) The Panel shall be equipped with

1. Built-in full numeric keyboard with function keys.
2. 64 Single Zone Indicators
3. USB Port
4. Ethernet connection

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 123/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

5. SMART Card media slot.

6. Key switch to prevent unauthorised operation of keypad.
7. Integral sealed lead acid battery and charger, with 24 hour back up in the event of supply
mains failure.

e) The Panel shall be equipped with on board Essential controls – Delay, panel reset, Audible alarm
off, Disconnect master box, additional messages, verify/cancel fault buzzer. Fire, Pre-Alarm,
Trouble, Disconnection lamps. Each lamp shall also have appropriate indication (Releasing
Systems activated, Master box, Delay , Verify, CPU failure, In operation normal condition & failure
of power supply / battery) Simple menu driven function keys with password protection shall allow
users to an extensive range of software based features such as:
- Overview
- Service
- Time functions
- Information
- Last 10000 system events
- Current fault and warning logs.
- Interrogation of sensor cleanliness
- On/Off, Enable/ disable sensors, zones, sounders, interface unit channels.
- Status of detectors
- Alarm counters
- Printer on, off, line feed and test facilities.

f) All control buttons and keyboard shall be enclosed behind a lockable cover, at least 127 device
capacities per 2km loop and a TTY/ RS 485 communication option.

h) Individual loop circuits Shall be capable of accommodating the following.

- Minimum of 127 addressable devices on 2 kms loop length
- The detection loop shall have the ability to support both sensors and sounders connected on
the same 2 core loop circuit.
- Should have the ability to spur off the detection loop without using ‘T’ breaker devices, without
any degradation.

i) The Master voice evacuation panel shall contain an integral microphone, dual channel digital
message repeater (DMR), digital tone generator; Zones LED's and switches control. Distributed
panel shall contain multi speaker circuits (Class B Wiring) and Amplifiers with it own supplies,
battery chargers and provide auxiliary power for other components.

j) Voice Evacuation panel shall provide Six simultaneous audio channels.

Amplifiers shall be available in 25, 50, or 100 watt units, field-selectable for 25 or 70 volt
Output. Remote microphone units, with programmable switch banks for message and zone
selection shall be available for connection to any local panel within the overall system.

Peripheral devices

3.2 a) Printer

A. The system printer shall be 40 character thermal printer optional in-built on the main control
panel, and shall log all events, change of status, alarm and fault messages along with time of the
day and date.

The printer shall provide the following:

- Hard copy of every event occurring

- Status read out of every addressable point

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 124/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

- Devices tested on a walk test

- Contaminated detectors needing replacement
- Single point scan printout of analogue values
- Hard copy of historic log.

b) Repeater
The Repeat Panel shall be sited at the location where it is manned 24 hrs. It shall provide system
repeat facilities to repeat all of the liquid crystal display messages as well as the common
indications. Repeat panel shall be interfaced for network fire alarm control panels, designed for
standardized display and operation as per DIN EN 54 part 2 and DIN VDE 0833 part 2.

c) Mimic Driver
Provides 30 programmable open-collector outputs and can be programmed to follow a zone or an
event in the main panel.
Central Graphics Supervisory Computer
3.3 The graphic visual display shall pictorially represent Fire, Fault and Emergency events on a visual
display unit (VDU). The purpose of this facility shall be to provide the operator with the additional
visual information over and above the text provided. All system events i.e. fire, fault and warning
shall be automatically printed onto the graphics printer. Operation of the graphics terminal shall
normally be by selection of the appropriate pages guided by a navigation system. However, it shall
automatically track to the relevant initiating device for the first occurrence of each type of the event.
The graphics terminal shall provide the following:

- DUAL LANGUAGE ENGLISH / ARABIC

- Single Station version
- Multi Station Version
- Multi Networks
- Modem Interface
- Communications shall be bi-directional
- Free programming of alarm programs and alarm condition through SIA programming

Software shall have software interface using drivers with:

- Fire Alarm Panels

Web Function: PC on Intranet/Internet using a common Web-browser shall be able to

access the software with password.

Notification: Software shall be capable of transmitting text and voice messages to

specific devices like cell phones, pagers etc.

Escalation: Software shall be capable of starting escalation action if within

certain/configured time period the notification is not acknowledged.

Integration of IP telephony shall be possible at least with ALCATEL to have innovative

linking of telephony via IQ phone enabling the end-user devices to be used as
multifunctional operating and display terminals with variable adaptation of applications.

Events display/status bar giving a clear and concise view of the current events on the fire
alarm system.

Ability to control and change the following:

- Disable actions
- Labels & Auxiliary text

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 125/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

- User Action buttons

- Historic data of all the system events
- Access levels/passwords to target specific levels of access to specific users
- Graphical representation (if required) of the site allowing the exact location of the fire alarm
events, e.g., fires, faults etc.
- Panel remote buzzer cancellation
- Event acknowledgement
- Clock synchronization with panels with local adjustment facility
- Touch screen support

The terminal shall assign a number of different graphic pages to each fire event – from a site
overview of building layout, through a floor layout, breaking the site down into increasing levels of
detail. Number of graphic pages required shall be finally determined by the Employer/Engineer. For
tender assume 4 pages per floor, based on the drawings produced on AutoCAD by the Contractor.

The system shall operate on the Windows environment. The platform specification required is an
IBM PC compatible with the following minimum specifications.

Pentium IV Processor , 1GHz speed

256 MB RAM, 1 GB Hard Disk
XGA-graphic card with min. 4 MB video memory
Minimum 14 super VGA color screen
Two serial ports and two parallel ports & Real time clock
3.5 inch 1.44-MB floppy disk
CD RW & Microsoft mouse

The combined text and graphics package shall be provided on the same supervisor. The supervisor
with touch screen is recommended.

3.4 Network

a) It shall be possible to network connect up to 31 controls as a secure network connection. All

messages from a panel should be transmitted in both directions on the ring structure. Any wire-
break or short-circuit on the ring shall not effect data transmission. The network shall be
configurable so that single panels, groups of panels or all panels on the network operate the same
site configured cause and effect fire plan.

The network shall also be configured to allow master control from any one of the control panels on
the network. To cover longer distance repeaters or fibre optical cable and converters can be used
between two panels.

There shall be extensive diagnostic functions on the panel to be used to localize faults caused by
interference or wiring. The distance between each panel shall be standard 1200 meters and
capable of extending up to 3000 meters using booster repeaters.

3.5 Analogue Addressable field devices

a) Addressable Manual call point

Standard:
NFPA72 or BS EN 54

UL or Vds or LPCB Approved

Mounting: Flush/weatherproof.
Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 126/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Operating :
 Field programmable to trigger alert or evacuate alarms.
 It shall be provided with test key and shall be addressable and monitored.
 It shall be provided with integral activation indicator and built in isolator.
 End of line device shall be mounted in the unit.

b) Intelligent Detectors

All analogue detectors and bases shall be provided by the same manufacturer of the control
system. No other make of detectors will be permissible.

All analogue detectors shall have real intelligence itself. This means even without control panel the
detector can make decision, adapt to different environmental condition and diagnose itself. They
shall have decentralized intelligence, automatic function self test, CPU failure mode, alarm and
operating data memory and integrated short circuit line isolators. The detector bases for interfacing
between the loop wiring and the detector head shall be manufactured by means of injection
moulded ABS plastic coloured white and shall not contain any electronics for addressing. The base
fixings should be suitable for any industry standard BESA or conduit boxes. All bases shall include
the option to provide a programmable relay output for interfacing, providing a dry contact for third
party.

All bases shall be provided with a plastic removable dust cover for protection during site
construction as well as an IP rated sealing gasket to prevent dirt and moisture from entering
through from the fixing surface.
Each base shall include a lock and removal of locked detectors shall be achievable only through the
use of the appropriate removal tools as specified by the manufacturer of the detectors. Detectors
removal tools are to be handed over on completion of the contract as part of the spare parts to the
Employer.

Removal of a detector from its associated base shall not affect the continuity of the detection loop.

All detectors shall also have an integral short circuit isolator, which in the event of a single cable
fault will isolate the “culprit” piece of cable and retain all devices on the loop operationally.

Each detector shall possess two integral LED giving a red flashing indication for fire and green for
normal operation. For remote locations, each detector shall be capable of connection to a remote
LED unit by means of 2 core wire connection.

Detectors shall be white in colour and manufactured from ABS plastic. All electronics and
associated sensing elements will be housed within this unit, these components being hermitically
sealed to prevent their operation from being impaired by dust, dirt and humidity.

The sensitivity off all detectors shall be adjustable from software. It shall be possible to programme
detector sensor sensitivity directly on the loop using interface with a laptop PC and appropriate
programming software from manufacturer.

For MULTI SENSOR detectors, disablement of each sensor element shall be possible individually
or for whole loop. Also this disablement feature shall be possible to have manually or time / event
controlled.

1b) Intelligent (Analogue Addressable) Optical smoke Sensors

Standard NFPA72 or EN54-7:2000,
UL listed or Vds approved or LPCB Approved

The optical element shall detect visible smoke from slow smouldering fires. Smoke sensing design
shall comply with EN 54 part 7. It shall have microprocessors; short-circuit isolators and all
electronic components and circuitry suitable for an Analogue addressable system. The detectors

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 127/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

shall also have 360 degree viewing LED fire indicator. Detectors mounted in the false ceilings shall
be provided with semi flush mounting kits.
Each detector shall possess two integral LED giving a red flashing indication for alarm and green
for normal operation.
Where indicated in the shop drawing detector with integral sounder should be provided.
The combined detector sounder shall provide a sound pressure level of 92dBA at 1 metre. The
audible volume levels shall be individually selectable for each device and there should also be a
configurable soft start feature that ramps up the volume gradually rather than switching on at full
level. It shall be possible to connect a maximum of 80 combined detector sounders to a detection
loop.

A minimum of 19 Different tone types are stored in the detector sounders. Up to 4 different tone
types shall be combined in a signal set and activated in case of alarm. Individual detector sounder
volume levels shall be adjustable at the main control panel or via the use of the remote programmer
unit coupled with a laptop PC and appropriate programming software from the manufacturer.

For Duct Sensor, Venturi principle air duct detector kit shall be used. The kit with IP 54 protection
ABS plastic with filters shall be mounted outside air ducts. The venturi tube dips into the air duct.
The airspeed in the duct shall not exceed 1 m/s to max 20 m/s. This device shall employ the
aforementioned Optical detector to provide environmental information. Probes are fitted to pick up
smoke in ventilation ducts. This unit is particularly suitable for sensing smoke particles in ducting
which is likely to be in large quantity and flowing fairly quickly.

Intelligent (Analogue Addressable) Dual Angle Optical/Heat Detector

2b) Standard NFPA72 or EN54-7,5&3:2000

Vds, LPCB or UL Approved

Install as shown in the drawings .These shall comply with the requirements of EN 54: Part 5, 7& 3.
This device shall combine two individual sensing elements to provide excellent cover for both
“types” of fires. (Slow smouldering and fast free burning).

OPTICOPTICAL SENSING: Shall be carried out by 2 infra-red LED transmitters across separate
Optical detection angles. This sensor shall process both the forward and backward scattered Light
caused by entering the detection chamber of device, allowing the detector to Differentiate between
real smoke and non smoke particles e.g. Steam & Dust.

HEAT SENSING: Shall be carried out by a thermistor, sampling the surrounding environmental.
Where indicated in the shop drawing detector with integral sounder should be provided.

The combined detector sounder shall provide a sound pressure level of 92dBA at 1 metre. The
audible volume levels shall be individually selectable for each device and there should also be a
configurable soft start feature that ramps up the volume gradually rather than switching on at full
level. It shall be possible to connect a maximum of 80 combined detector sounders to a detection
loop.

A minimum of 19 Different tone types are stored in the detector sounders. Up to 4 different tone
types shall be combined in a signal set and activated in case of alarm. Individual detector sounder
volume levels shall be adjustable at the main control panel or via the use of the remote programmer
unit coupled with a laptop PC and appropriate programming software from the manufacturer.

3b) Intelligent (Analogue Addressable) thermal Sensor

Standard; NFPA72,UL or EN54, Vds Approved

Thermal Detectors shall be rated at 135 F degrees fixed temperature and 15F degrees per minute
rate of rise. The choice of alarm reporting as a fixed temperature Detector or a combination of fixed
and rate of rise shall be made in system software and be changeable at any time with out necessity
of hardware replacements.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 128/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Each detector shall possess two integral LED giving a red flashing indication for alarm and green for
normal operation.
c) Addressable contact Monitor (Input) Module
UL, LPCB or Vds approved

Monitor units shall be capable of accepting 1 input signal. Dependent upon the specific application,
input signals may be interpreted by the system as any of the following:
Fire signal input
Fault signal input
Supervisory signal input
Event signal input

The exact nature of which shall be selected by means of the commissioning software.

These units will accept and or supply clean contact signals only, either normally open or normally
closed (configurable). No switched voltage inputs or outputs will be accepted.

The unit should be integrated with built in isolator

d) Addressable Control Module

UL, Vds or LPCB Approved

The output contacts shall be rated at 30V / 1 amp. DC output of the unit shall be provided with
single pole change over contacts for control of plant, door release units or power output to drive
conventional bells, sounders etc.

The unit should be integrated with built in isolator

e) Addressable Notification appliance module

Alarm sounders shall be capable of providing a minimum sound level of 97dBA ± 2 dBA @ 1meter.

The sounder shall be capable of providing 4 different sound signals, which are selected/ configured
from 19 tone types stored in the device.
Each sounder shall include its own microprocessor to handle loop communications and monitoring
of the internal sound element during an alarm condition. This shall allow faulty devices to be
automatically identified during the weekly test procedure. All associated electronic components
shall be hermetically sealed to provide protection from hostile operating environments.

Sounder shall have built in short circuit line isolators and an ingress protection rating of IP31 or
IP65 with accessories.

It shall be possible to connect up to 32 Addressable Alarm sounders to each detection loop of the
fire alarm control panel. These devices will comply fully with EN 54 part 3.

f)
Addressable Flasher

The electronic flasher shall be loop powered suitable for direct connection to the 2 core detection
loop. The device shall have a matrix of high brightness LED's.

The frequency of the electronic flasher light output shall be 1Hz, low current consumption of
5mAmp at 42 Vdc providing a max 24 CD peak / 3.87 CD effective similar to 3 Watts xenon flash
light.
Flashers shall have built in short circuit line isolators and an ingress protection rating of IP31 or
IP65 with accessories.

The unit shall be manufactured from ABS plastic with a polycarbonate lens. Body and
lens colour options shall be as follows:

 Red body / red lens

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 129/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

 White body / transparent, blue and green lens

 White body / amber lens

Each electronic flasher shall include its own microprocessor to handle loop communications and
monitoring of the internal strobe element for faults in both the quiescent and alarm conditions. The
internal circuit assembly and all other associated electronic components shall be hermetically
sealed to provide protection from hostile operating environments.
These devices for direct connection to the detection loop. It shall be possible to connect up to 32
electronic flashers to each detection loop of the fire alarm control panel.

g) Voice Evacuation Speakers-Wall and Ceiling mount

Voltage Input: 25 V or 70.7 Volts nominal
- Frequency range: 400 Hz to 4000 HZ
- Operating temperature range : (0° to 49° C)
- Power Tapping: 1/4 , 1/2, 1 and 2 Watts
- Colour :White
- UL Listed
Speaker shall be designed for semi-flush wall mounting to a 4” square box or surface mount using
the back boxes.
3.6 Cables
All cables connected to the fire alarm control panels should be fire resistant cables. The drain earth
wire, where available, should be connected to the earth tag on the cable entry gland and to a
suitable earth point at the remote end of the cable
Suitable cable types are listed below
Fire rated cables for signaling loops and sounder circuits.
 18 AWG Signal 88802 Belden 9574 WPW975
 16 AWG Signal 88602 Belden 9575 WPW991
 AEI Type Firetec Multicore Ref.F1C1 (1mm 2) to F1C2.5 (2.5mm 2) in 2 cores.
 AEI Type Firetec Armoured Ref.F2C1 (1.5 mm 2) to F2C2.5 (2.5mm 2) in 2 core.
 AEI Type Mineral Insulated Cable (all types up to 2.5mm 2)
 BICC types Mineral Insulated Pyrotenax (all types up to 2.5 mm 2)
 FIRETUF (OHLS) FTZ up to 2.5mm 2.
 PIRELLI type FP 200 Gold 2 core type from 1mm 2 to 2.5mm2.

Signal cables for RS485/RS232 Communications Links (twisted pair)

 FIRETUF FDZ1000 by Draka 2 core.

 PIRELLI type FP200 Gold 2 core
 18 AWG Signal 88802 Belden 9574 WPW975
 16 AWG Signal 88602 Belden 9575 WPW991

PART4– FIELD AND INSTALLATION WORK

4.1 Drawing to be approved

The contractor shall submit to the Civil Defense through the engineer for the approval fully
dimensional working drawings detailing the location of all automatic and manual fire alarm points,
sounders, main fire panels, each address point, single line schematics, cable routes etc. Prior to the
commencement of the work

Contractor shall also submit the following documents for Engineer's approval. These drawings/
details shall be coordinated with all services and shall be in full compliance with the relevant details
given in mechanical and electrical specification.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 130/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

 Cause and effect matrix: detailing fire zones and all the interface units as well as the
equipment interface activation to clearly highlight the various actions on fire conditions.
 Sequence of operation; detailing the operation/action on activation of various fire
components.

4.2 Installation
a) The entire system should conform to the requirements of NFPA71/ NFPA 72.
b) The installer should ensure that all wiring complies with the following

 Method of cable support should be such that circuit integrity will not be reduced below that
afforded by the cable used.
 All the fire alarm cables should be of a single, common colour that is not used for cables of
general electrical services in the building.

c) All junction boxes shall be sprayed red and labeled “FIRE ALARM

d) Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work in the contract shall be closely
coordinated with the appropriate subcontractors.

e) The contractor shall clean all dirt and debris from the inside and the outside of the fire alarm
equipment after completion of the installation.

f) The manufacturer’s authorized representative shall provide onsite supervision of installation.

4.3 Testing , commissioning and handling over

The complete installation shall be tested and commissioned by the equipment manufacturer or his
representative and the contractor shall demonstrate the operation of the system to the engineer
and the Employer's personnel and shall be to their approval. The contractor shall obtain
certificates from the civil defense to the effect that the installation as a whole complies with the
requirements of the civil defense, prior to handling over. The system shall not be deemed handled
over until this certificate has been issued.

The contractor shall provide one smoke detector and heat detector tester for handling over to the
Employer.

The contractor shall prepare fully detailed operation and maintenance manuals for every individual
items related to the fire installations

4.4 WARRANTY

The contractor shall warrant the complete fire alarm system wiring and equipment to be free from
a) inherent mechanical and electrical defects for a period of one (1) year from the date of the
complete and certified test or from the date of first beneficial use.

b) The equipment manufacturer shall make available to the owner a maintenance contract proposal
to provide a minimum of two (2) inspections and tests per year.

END OF SUB-SECTION

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 131/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

SUB-SECTION 17240
CCTV SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

The contractor shall supply and install complete CCTV system as shown on the drawings and as
specified in this section.

Specifications included in this section are indicative and considered as minimum, equipment & software
that shall be delivered at the time of implementing the project shall be the latest versions available in the
market.

ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

All equipment installed shall not require readjustments of controls, realignment, software reloading or
reconfiguring when operating under the following conditions:

1. The control areas indicated on drawing shall be air-conditioned.

2. Equipment installed outside shall be capable to operate at their nominal performances under the
Atmospheric environmental conditions in UAE.

SUBMITTALS

The following documentation shall be submitted for Engineer / Employer’s approval before
commencing of any work.

a. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data with Compliance Statement as per the specifications
issued.
b. Drawings: Submit Schematic & Layout drawings for all systems of security.
c. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for all systems of security and electrical power
connections to equipment and components.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

a. The following association and organization shall be referred to with respect to standards as they
apply to the materials and equipment provided under this Section.

Electronics Industries Association (EIA): Publications and Engineering Publications.

b. Single Source Responsibility: CCTV System Equipments shall be from a single manufacturer to
the maximum extent.

WARRANTY

Submit written guarantee signed by the contractor, manufacturer for the period of One year from the date
of substantial completion. The guarantee shall cover the repair and replacement of defective materials
and workmanship as directed by the Engineer.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

CCTV SYSTEM

The CCTV system shall be equipped with HIGH RESOLUTION Colour Cameras for the areas as shown
in drawings. The Camera types shall be as per the BOQ / Drawings which shall include Dome Cameras,
Fixed Cameras, PTZ Cameras and High Speed Domes etc. Outdoor Cameras shall be fixed inside
weather proof enclosures with heater, blower and sun shield (IP 66). Control & Monitoring equipments
such as Digital Video Recorders, Matrix Switchers, and Monitors shall be proposed as required.
The system setup, including programming, start up, shutdown, and features like stop recording,
remote controlling and viewing etc. shall be password protected. The operator or user authorization
on the system shall be with at least two levels of priority and can be set by the system administrator.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 132/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

The system shall be proposed with remote monitoring license for three remote and one local operator
to be logged into the DVMR for monitoring and controlling the system.

The DVMR shall be provided with hard disk for 30 days of storage in line with the police specifications
at 640 x 480 resolution. The hard disc calculation from the manufacturer shall be submitted for
Engineers Approval.

Fixed Indoor Colour Cameras (Wall or Ceiling Mount)

1. Cameras shall be installed at fixed positions as shown in drawings.

2. Cameras will have at least the following characteristics:

 1/3-inch Digital Color EX View CCD type

 480 TV lines Minimum of horizontal resolution
 Excellent signal-to-noise ratio of 50dB
 High sensitivity with a minimum scene illumination of 0.008lux (F1.2)
 Internal synchronization with line-lock and AGC control
 BLC covers various light conditions
 Accepts CS and C mount lenses without adaptor
 Accepts 2 types of auto iris lenses (DC servo type and VIDEO servo type).
 No interference from magnetic or electronic fields
 Automatic Shutter: 1/50 to 1/100,000 sec.
 Operating voltage: DC or AC

Fixed Indoor Dome Colour Cameras (Ceiling Mount)

1. Cameras shall be installed at fixed positions as shown in drawings.

2. Cameras will have at least the following characteristics:

 1/3-inch Digital Color EX View CCD type

 480 TV lines of Minimum of horizontal resolution.
 Excellent signal-to-noise ratio of 50dB.
 High sensitivity with a minimum scene illumination of 2.8lux.
 Internal synchronization with line-lock.
 Automatic Shutter: 1/50 to 1/100,000 sec.
 Shall have built in varifocal lens
 Input Power: 24 V AC/50 Hz. With suitable power supply unit operable 230 VAC/50 Hz
 Dome camera shall be vandal resistant
 Operating voltage: DC or AC

3. Lenses

 Focal length: Provide vari-focal lens

 Auto Iris
 C/CS mount
 Lenses to 3.5-8mm.
 Minimum focusing distance: 0.4 meter

Fixed Outdoor Colour Cameras (Wall Mount)

1. Cameras shall be installed at fixed positions as shown in drawings.

2. Cameras will have at least the following characteristics:

 1/3-inch Digital Color EX View CCD type

 480 TV lines Minimum of horizontal resolution.
 Excellent signal-to-noise ratio of 50dB.
 High sensitivity with a minimum scene illumination of 0.008lux (F1.2).
 Internal synchronization with line-lock and AGC control.
 BLC covers various light conditions.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 133/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

 Accepts CS and C mount lenses without adaptor.

 Accepts 2 types of auto iris lenses (DC servo type and VIDEO servo type).
 No interference from magnetic or electronic fields
 Automatic Shutter: 1/50 to 1/100,000 sec.
 Operating voltage : DC or AC
 Shall have built in varifocal lens
 Weather Proof Housing

Camera Housing:

All weatherproof cameras shall be provided with suitable UV radiation and corrosion protected,
environmental housing. Ceiling mounted housings with suitable brackets shall be proposed for the car
parking drive ways and special care shall be taken to accommodate for the minimum clear height of
such areas (as per local authority norms). The housings shall be heavy-duty Aluminium or
Polycarbonate constructed with side latches and adjustable platform for camera positioning and
suitable cable entries.

 Cable Access: At bottom and the rear base.

 Accessories: Built in Camera Power supply and Heater.
 NEMA Standard: 4
 CE Standard: IP 65

Mounting brackets:

Adjustable wall/ceiling mounted brackets in line with the site conditions and cameras shall be
proposed and submitted for Engineer’s approval. The load rating for the brackets shall be suitable for
the cameras and the NEMA standards shall be shall as that of the housings.

Monitors:

One number 17” LCD monitor shall be proposed for each DVMR and one number PC monitor (21”) shall
be proposed and housed in a wooden console. Monitors will have the following characteristics.

 High resolution, PAL Standard

 Diagonal Screen size: 17” and 21” , LCD ( provide as per drawings)
 High immunity to external electrical and magnetic interference
 Power: 220V 60Hz
 Input signals: Composite video, SVHS, Analogue RGB
 Controls shall include brightness, contrast, vertical and horizontal hold.

Digital Video Recorder:

 The DVR shall have the following design and performance specifications as minimum.
 The DVR shall be capable of Playback and Recording upto 16 video inputs onto its hard
disk with a minimum capacity of 320 GB and the storage shall be provided to record a
period of 30 days.
 The DVR shall be capable of recording at a Minimum of 50 fps (PAL), with multiple
recording formats and multiple playback speeds.
 DVR shall be equipped with 4,8,12 & 16 Display modes for playback and a Built in
Multiplexer.
 Different recorded video sequences should be played back simultaneously.
 Each video stream could be decompressed and played back at the required speed. All
video sequences should be time-synchronized on playback.
 Windows type menu screen shall be provided for user friendly operation. A sophisticated
motion detection module should be used that could monitor up to 16 camera inputs in
real time. Any number of regions may be selected for motion trigger in any one view.
The motion detector should have three sensitivity levels. Different sensitivity levels
should allow the user to select the required level of motion to generate triggers.
Sensitivity level settings should also be used to ignore ‘usual’ motion such as movement
in the leaves, rain etc. Changes in light conditions should not affect the motion detection.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 134/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

The robust motion detection algorithm should be only sensitive to movement reducing
false triggers
 There should be 3 levels of privileges in the CCTV system; administrator, manager &
operator. Administrators should have access to all system resources including configuration.
All actions should be logged and may only be viewed by administrators.
 Activity detection, Flicker control and video display control shall be a standard features
 Shall support external archive media
 Shall provide third party interface ports – RS 232, RS 485, USB, Ethernet TCP / IP Connections
etc
 MPEG 4 / H.264 Compression Technology
 Embedded Windows Operating System
 Built in Web browser with no additional Software required for viewing
 Remote Management Software (remote monitoring and remote backup software) to have
different user profiles.
 Fully Network enabled
 Built in CDRW for Back UP
 Video Loss alarm / PC Key board Support Available

EQUIPMENT RACK

A custom built wooden Console and 19” rack shall be provided as a part of the system to
accommodate all control and monitoring equipment. Suitable rack mounting brackets shall be used for
proper fixing of all rack-mounted items. The design for the console shall be submitted for final
approval from the Engineer. The location for the control and monitoring stations shall be as per the
drawings and approved by the Engineer.

INSTALLATION
All of the system installation work shall be carried out / supervised by the specialist subcontractor.
However, the necessary containment and electrical power to support the security system shall be the
responsibility of the MEP Contractor. The cables necessary for the Security system shall be as
recommended by the specialist supplier. Also, the MEP Contractor shall co-ordinate with the Main
Contractor and the specialist supplier to complete the installation successfully.

TESTING, COMMISSIONING AND HANDOVER

The complete installation shall be tested and commissioned by the specialist sub contractor who is
responsible to demonstrate the operation of the system to the satisfaction of the Employer's personnel
or the Engineer. Sufficient Training shall be given to the Employer’s personnel for a smooth operation
of the system.

MAINTENANCE
The Subcontractor shall include for and be responsible for the free of charge regular inspection and
maintenance as recommended by the manufacturer of the complete system for one year after the
official handing over of the system

DRAWINGS
Prior to commencement of any works the Contractor shall prepare and submit working drawings
detailing but not limited to:

1. Proposed cable routes.

2. Component / Equipment layouts
3. Schematic Diagrams.

As-Built Drawings and O/M Manuals

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 135/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Prior to handing over the works, the Contractor is to supply the Engineer with four sets of prints, 1
electronic copy of all "As Built" drawings relating to the supplied systems, four bound sets of all
Operation and Maintenance Manuals for all equipment installed.

END OF SUB-SECTION

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 136/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

SUB-SECTION 17250
SMATV SYSTEM
General

The contractor shall supply, install, test and commission a central antenna television system for
distribution of television signals and channels from 7 satellites specified on IF to all outlet points
indicated in the drawing and as per WASL standards. The system equipment and its components
shall be installed by a specialist sub-contractor and is to be approved by the Resident Engineer in
accordance with the specifications as listed in this document.

The system supplier shall be an authorized distributor of such equipments, maintaining local staff of
specialists and trained technicians for engineering assistance, installation and maintenance of the
equipment with minimum five (5) years of experience in this field.

The system shall be capable of providing television reception of six (6) local channels broadcasted
and receivable in this area in addition to ten RF satellite channels. The system shall be made for the
distribution of other channels in IF with the latest cascadable switching technology. The system shall
be designed in such a way that a maximum number of MATV/SMATV channels can be distributed
through the cable network and as to anticipate for future additions of programs.

SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
The system shall provide for the reception of the following channels on RF and the signals from the
satellites connected on IF. The entire channels specified here should be digital unless the channels
are not available on digital platform at present for making the system future proof.

SATELLITE Free To Air Channels:

 24 Nos. of Digital channels from Arab sat 3A /Nile sat/ INSAT 2E ( Selectable at site)

IF Channels:

1. Nilesat with 4 polarities

2. Hotbird with 4 polarities
3. Arabsat with 4 polarities

Satellite Dishes

The system shall provide for reception of the following Satellites:

1) Arab sat 2) Nile sat 3) Hot bird .
The dishes for the satellite reception shall be solid construction with polyester powder coated
finish to provide maximum protection from UV exposure and weather to ensure a long life. The
satellite dishes shall be warranted for a minimum period of five years and shall have the following
minimum specification:
Ku Band:

Band: 10.700 – 12.750 GHz

Diameter: 1.35 meters
Gain: Linear or circular
Operating Temperature: Up to 60C
Type: Offset
Wind load capability: 145KmpH
Efficiency: 70% Min

Non-switching Quattro LNBF’s with a maximum of 0.9dB noise figure should be used.

Lightning Protection:

The contractor shall be responsible for providing lightening protection for all roof top equipment and
the main equipment of the system. For the roof top equipment, the protection should include
lightening arresters for antenna mast. The satellite dishes shall be fitted with an adequate surge
Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 137/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

arrester at the point where the cables gross into the building from the roof.
RF Head-end Equipment:

 Head-End equipment shall be single side band so that additional channels can be added at a
later stage.
 Head-end shall be totally in modular construction as to allow for easy upgrading and adding of
future channels and fully compatible with analog and digital transmission technology.
 The satellite processor and digital receiver modules should be capable of processing an IF
signal (in the range of 950 ~ 2150 MHz or higher) at signals nominal levels between -60 ~ -30
dBm (approx. 47 ~ 77 dBuV) or better.
 Each satellite processor module should have an audio sub carrier tuning range of 5.50 to 9.00
MHz (or better).
 Each module should be capable of transmitting audio sub-carriers in mono, stereo or dual
tone, as to allow for full reproduction of mono, stereo or bilingual broadcasts.
 The modulator of all the processing modules shall be PAL B/G.
 The LF audio level of the modulator module should be adjustable; so that all channels in a
system will have the same balanced audio level.
 Each modulator module shall have AV (audio / video inputs) that accepts standardized audio
and video signals.
 Tuning in the output frequency range of the modules should be PLL-synthesized as to have
maximum stability.
 All modules should be digitally programmable, as to allow for easy installation.
 The modulator shall have a saw filter, dual conversion and a tracking filter for good CNR at
the Head-End and to avoid forbidden channels in the spectrum. CNR should be better than
54dB inside the channel and better than 65dB outside the channel on each module. This is to
ensure the head-end to be future proof and to make sure that the head-end can be upgraded
to use the whole RF spectrum (in excess of 80 channels).
 Digital receiver used for digital channels should be professional rack mounted and not set top
boxes used for DTH.
 The control on output levels of the individual head-end modules shall be such that the signal
level can be balanced and an equalized output are guaranteed at the output of the RF head-
end.
 The equipment shall be housed in a weatherproof, lockable cabinet, allowing for sufficient
ventilation, preferably being located in a climate-controlled environment.
Distribution System:

The contractor will supply and install a TV system capable of receiving and distributing the 24 Free to
air channels from the RF Head-end and all channels from Hotbird, Nilesat , Arabsat ,INSAT 2E on IF.
The system shall be based on multi-switch system whereby it shall be possible to receive all the
channels using appropriate receivers.

 A 16 IF input and 1 RF input multiple output switches to be used to distribute signal in the
building.
 Appropriate Head-End Amplifiers to be used to distribute the signal to the switches.
The specification has to match the following or better.

Frequency band 950-2400 MHz

Gain 30 dB +/- 1.5
Output level max 118 dBµV
Noise figure <10 Db

Gain adjustment (per input) 15 dB

Slope adjustment (per input) 10 dB
Isolation between inputs > 40 dB
Selectivity at 830 MHz > 35 dB
Return loss > 10 dB
 The switches used in the system should have attenuation control on each and every input of
the switch to balance all the polarities. The specification has to match the following:

1) Highest frequency response

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 138/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

2) 1 RF & 16 satellite inputs with 8/12/16/24/32 outputs

3) Frequency 47-862 & 950 -2200 MHZ
4) Through loss – 3 db to 6db
5) Tap loss ------ 15 to 20 db
6) Isolation Trunk --- 35 db
7) Switching - DISEq 2.0

 The signal level on RF at the wall outlet should be between 60 and 80dBuV with a CNR of
more than 43dB with the following parameters.
o Difference of level between adjacent channels : 3dB
o Difference of level between 60MHz band : 8dB
o Difference of level between any channels in the spectrum : 15dB

 The signal level on IF at the wall outlet should be between 47dB and 77 dBuV with a
maximum of 15dB between transponders on any polarity. The bit error rate on digital signal
should be better than E-4 at the wall socket
 A detailed schematic drawing of the proposed plan with RF and IF signal levels should be
submitted.

Wall Outlets:
1. A dual socket with TV/FM on one side and Sat on the other should be used.
2. TV/FM connector on the wall socket should be “IEC” type and Sat should be “F” type.
3. Apartment-to-apartment loop-through outlets cannot be accepted. A separate cable is to be
used from the switch to each of the outlets.
4. All SAT/TV wall outlets will fully comply with electromagnetic regulations as to screening and
losses.
5. The available channels at the wall outlet should be all channels from Nilesat, all channels
from Arabsat “Ku” band and all channels on the wide beam of Hotbird satellite.

Cables:
1. Cables used should be double shielded and have a linear response across the frequency
spectrum.
2. Specifications of the cables with cable losses specified till 2150MHz should be submitted.
3. Coax cable for Riser: 11mm cable with max of 20dB at 2150MHz per
100mts.
4. Coax cable for Distribution: 6mm cable with max of 30dB at 2150MHz per 100mts.

Electrical Requirements:
- The complete MATV / SMATV system shall be powered from the 220 - 240 VAC / 50 Hz
mains supply and fully comply with the existing electrical safety regulations or as otherwise
specified by the Chief Engineer.

- Preferably all the modules in the RF head-end should be individually powered, as to ensure
no interruption of the reception of other channels in case of eventualities.

Commissioning of the SMATV / MATV System:

The complete MATV / SMATV system shall be tested and commissioned to the complete satisfaction
of the Chief Engineer. The installer of the system shall provide all necessary test equipment including
an IF digital signal meter, appropriate decoder etc.
All signal levels at the wall outlets shall measure as above specified at 75 ohms.

MAINTENANCE
The Subcontractor shall be responsible for the free of charge regular inspection and maintenance as
recommended by the manufacturer of the complete system for one year after the official handing over
of the system

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 139/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

DRAWINGS:

Prior to commencement of any works the Contractor shall prepare and submit working drawings
detailing but not limited to:

1. Proposed cable routes.

2. Component / Equipment layouts
3. Schematic Diagrams

As-Built Drawings and O/M Manuals Prior to handing over the works, the Contractor is to supply the
Engineer with four sets of prints, 1 electronic copy of all "As Built" drawings relating to the supplied
systems, four bound sets of all Operation and Maintenance Manuals for all equipment installed.

Warranty:
Without any prejudice to any other warranty for which the contractor is liable, the complete MATV /
SMATV system shall be (preventively) maintained for a period of two years, following the date of
commissioning, free of charge for both material required and labor cost.

END OF SUB-SECTION

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 140/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

SUB-SECTION 17260
EARTHING SYSTEM
1.0 GENERAL

The Earthing system shall be in full compliance with the requirements of the IEE Wiring Regulations,
Local Authorities Practices and the Specifications.

Any modification required by Local authorities shall be done at no extra cost.

Unless otherwise specified all materials used for earthing shall be of copper or approved copper
alloys, and shall be specially manufactured for the purpose.

The complete earthing system shall be electrically and mechanically continuous to provide an
independent fault current return path to the earthing source.

Bolted connections shall be of the multiple bolt type. Bolts, washers and stop nuts shall be of high
copper alloy. Ferrous hardware will not be accepted.

Where earthing terminal connectors are brazed to equipment, the metal shall be thoroughly cleaned
prior to brazing and the impaired surfaces repainted to prevent corrosion.

The impedance of equipment (earth loop) at any point in the electrical wiring system shall be
sufficiently low to limit the voltage to earth and to facilitate the operation of the circuit protective
devices in the circuits, as required by the IEE Wiring Regulations. Otherwise earth leakage circuit
breakers shall be used.

2.0 EARTHING INSTALLATION

Two separate earthing installations shall be provided. One installation shall be the System earthing
and the other shall be the Authorities Service Equipment Earthing.

3.0 SYSTEM EARTHING

The System Earthing shall consist of earthing pits connected in parallel if practicable, or shall
consist of 95 mm2 ring (counterpoise) buried under ground at a depth of 1 meter minimum around the
periphery of the building or substation if the latter is a separate structure.

Resistance of this earthing installation to earth shall not exceed 2 ohm. To this installation shall be
connected:

a) The neutral of the transformer(s) at the local authorities Low tension pillar or at the main
distribution switchboard if the former is not provided.

b) All Equipment earthing of the Electrical Works through a removable link at the Main Distribution
Switchboard connecting the main earthing bus to the neutral bus. If no main switchboard is
included in the works, a peripheral earth bus shall be provided in the Meters Room to which all
the equipment earthing shall be bonded. The earthing bus shall in turn be bonded to the
Local Authorities Low Tension Pillar neutral.

The main earthing bus of the main switchboard(s) if any shall be connected to the system
earthing by a 95 mm2 bare copper cable via a 40 x 5 mm main earthing bus bar fixed on the wall
in an approved location.

4.0 SERVICE EQUIPMENT EARTHING

The service equipment earthing shall be a separate earthing installation consisting of earthing pits
connected in parallel. These pits shall be at least 8 meters away from the system earthing if
practicable otherwise the service equipment earthing shall be bonded to the system earthing and the
combined resistance shall be less than 1 Ohm.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 141/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

To this installation will be connected: the ring main unit earthing bar, the transformer(s) and HT
switchgear tanks, HT cable sheaths, all exposed structural metal works including metal cable trays
when the substation is situated above a basement.

Connection material and sizes shall be as approved by the Local Authorities.

5.0 EQUIPMENT EARTHING OF THE ELECTRICAL WORKS

Equipment earthing of the Electrical Works shall consist of bonding all non-current carrying metal
parts of the Electrical installation to the System earth (TN-S system as per IEE Wiring Regulations,
latest edition).

Non-current carrying metal parts of the electrical installation shall include such items as cabinets,
exposed metal parts of apparatus as well as enclosures, doors, grill, etc. protecting or shielding
electrical equipment from direct access to unauthorized personnel.

The series earthing of one piece of equipment to another will not be permitted. All equipment earthing
connections shall be tapped from the applicable earth source.

Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, cable armor shall be accepted as equipment
earthing conductors, provided they comply with the requirements of the Regulations.

All socket outlets, power apparatus, lighting fixtures and switches shall be earthed.

No point on the neutral shall be connected to the earth system except as described under "System
Earthing".

Additional earthing pits may be shown on the drawings at different locations. These pits shall be
bonded to the earthing bus of the relevant switchboards or panel boards as applicable in order to
reduce the earthing resistance. Neutral at such points shall not be bonded to the earthing system.

Shells of all water heaters shall be connected to the neutral and earthing of the corresponding circuit.

6.0 PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS

Earthing wires (protective conductors) are not shown on the Drawings. All circuits running in conduits
or in flexible conduits shall have earthing insulated conductors of minimum sizes as follows:

Current carrying conductor Earthing Wire

(protective conductor)
S SP
(mm2) (mm2)
S less than or equal to 16 S
S greater than or equal to 16 16
but less than or equal to 35
S greater than 35 0.5 S

If more than one circuit is included in a conduit, one protective conductor per neutral or per three
phase circuit with no neutral shall be provided.

7.0 EARTHING PIT

The earthing rod shall be constructed from copper clad steel rod. Copper sheath shall be 99.9% pure
electrolytic copper. The steel core shall be of carbon steel, with tensile strength min 97,000 psi yield
strength at 0.2% offset 85,000 psi, proportional limit 57,000 psi, percent of elongation 13%. Rod shall
be cold drawn.

END OF SUB-SECTION

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 142/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

SUB-SECTION 17270
CALL DOOR BELL SYSTEM

GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES
This section supplements on all other Contract Documents and forms part of every section of Division
of Electrical.

Include The Employer’s Requirements as part of this section.

The Contractor shall become familiar with other sections of the Specifications affecting work of this
trade.

Furnish all labour, materials, plant, equipment and appliances and perform all necessary operations
required to execute the work of this section.

This section describes the requirements for cables, cable accessories and associated workmanship.

RELATED SECTIONS
This schedule is intended to be used as a helpful indication of the related sections within the Project
Specifications. It is not necessarily comprehensive or complete and it is the Contractor's
responsibility to ascertain all applicable sections required to understand the full Scope of Works
intended.
16120 – Cables and Wiring
16140 – Wiring Accessories

REFERENCES
The minimum standards for products specified in this section shall be those standards referred to or
relevant BSI standards. In addition the following standards also apply where DEWA standards exceed
other standards they supersede other standards:

BS7671 (IEE Wiring Regulations)

DEWA Regulations

SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

Submit samples, specifications, catalogue cut sheets, description of product and installation method
in accordance with the Contract Documents. Submissions shall indicate all dimensions, details of
construction, detail of installation, relation and connections with adjoining work.

Submit copies of test reports required to be performed on the proposed products.

Submit a list of installation completed where proposed products were used.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Perform Work in accordance with relevant British Standards and industry standard codes.

QUALIFICATIONS

Skilled electricians shall install Call/Door Bell Systems.

MOCK-UP
No requirements.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 143/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

Do not install Call/Door Bell System in the building until the building is closed and the air conditioning
is operational.

WARRANTY

All materials shall have a standard 12 month warranty from the time of practical completions. The
Contractor shall allow for extended warranties beyond this period where indicated in this document or
elsewhere within the main contract documents. The extended warranties shall be in the Employer’s
name and be handed over at the time of practical completion.

PRODUCTS

Materials

All systems shall operate from at ELV from a mains operated transformer and be a SELV installation.

Transformers to be either combined within consumer units or in wall mounted enclosure and served
direct via a dedicated MCB or a suitably rated fuse spur unit and be short circuit resistant to IEC 742.

All equipment to be submitted for approval, all finishes of pushes to match accessories, bell/sounder
finish and positions to be agreed with Architect/interior Designer to match finishes schedule.

Manufacturers

As list of Approved Manufacturers

EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

Verify site conditions as 16010.

Location of items and fixing details to be shown on shop drawings for each area

INSTALLATION

Before beginning installation in any area, examine all parts of the adjoining work into which applicable
work is to be placed. Should any conditions be found which will prevent the proper execution of the
work, installation shall not proceed in that area until such conditions are corrected by the contractor.

The Contractor shall arrange for electricians to install the equipment.

The equipment shall be installed in accordance with local codes and the manufacturer ’s
recommendations.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Provide field quality control as indicated in The Employer’s Requirements.

The equipment shall be checked out and started by a customer support representative from the
equipment manufacturer. A signed service report shall then be submitted after equipment is
operational.

SPARES

A list of manufacturer’s recommended spare parts shall be submitted with the manuals.

CLEANING

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 144/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Cleaning installed work as indicated in The Employer’s Requirements.

Remove labels after Work is complete.

PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

Protect work as indicated in The Employer’s Requirements.

Schedule

This schedule is intended to be used as a helpful indication of work within this section. It is not
necessarily comprehensive or complete and it is the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain and
complete the full works intended and as shown within the drawings, specification and Contract or
thereby implied.

END OF SECTION

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 145/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

SUB-SECTION 17280
AUDIO / VIDEO INTERCOM SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL

This Section includes the guidelines for the Supply, Engineering, Installation and Commissioning of a
complete Video Intercom System as shown on the drawings and as specified in this section.
Specifications included in this section are indicative and considered as minimum, equipment & software
that shall be delivered at the time of implementing the project shall be the latest versions available in the
market.

ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
All equipment installed shall not require readjustments of controls, realignment, software reloading or
reconfiguring when operating under the following conditions:
1. The control areas indicated on drawing shall be air-conditioned.
2. Equipment installed outside shall be capable to operate at their nominal performances under the
Atmospheric environmental conditions in UAE.

SUBMITTALS

The following documentation shall be submitted for Engineer /Employer’s approval before commencing of
any work.

a. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data with Compliance Statement as per the specifications
issued.
b. Drawings: Submit Schematic & Layout drawings for all systems of security.
c. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for all systems of security and electrical power
connections to equipment and components.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
a. The following association and organization shall be referred to with respect to standards as they
apply to the materials and equipment provided under this Section.

Electronics Industries Association (EIA): Publications and Engineering Publications.

b. Single Source Responsibility: Intercom System Equipments shall be of single manufacturer to the
maximum extent.

WARRANTY
Submit written guarantee signed by the contractor, manufacturer for the period of One year from the date
of substantial completion. The guarantee shall cover the repair and replacement of defective materials
and workmanship as directed by the Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

INTERCOM SYSTEM
The Intercom system shall provide a basic level of electronic security to meet the requirements of the
building. The system shall allow controlled entry to the building and the entrance doors shall be
interfaced with electronic locks to enable the tenant to open them from the apartment. The system
shall be suitable for communication between the master panel and the house station and vice versa.

The system shall utilize minimum number of cables and its terminations in the building.

The Intercom system shall be provided with Entrance Panels near the entrance doors as shown in the
drawing with weatherproof housing. The Guest shall key in the flat number to speak to the tenant and
the tenant can then release the main entrance door lock to grant entry. Dialing from the entrance
panel shall sound the built in buzzer in the house station. The two way communication between the
panel and the house station shall end when the handset is replaced at the end of the communication.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 146/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Tenants can also gain access to the building by keying in a numeric code.

The main entrance door can also be unlocked from the security desk using the push button.

The entrance panel shall be digital type complete with microphone, loudspeaker, volume control, call
button, alpha numeric keypad, back lit LCD and day/night Camera. The system shall operate at extra
low voltage preferable below 24 volts.

Each apartment on the floors shall be provided with a Video Intercom handset as shown in the
drawing. The house station shall be of wall/ table mounted type made of high impact resistant plastic
to the Engineer’ approval. The intercom handset shall be of high quality with a lock release button.
Intercommunication shall be provided between the different handsets located in the same apartment.

In order to have privacy in communication, all other apartment units and entrance panels shall be
isolated when the system is in use.

The handsets located at each floor shall be connected to digital decoders and necessary power
supply units to ensure clear voice and picture communication and interference free video signal to the
approval of the Engineer.

INSTALLATION
All of the system installation work shall be carried out / supervised by the specialist subcontractor.
However, the necessary containment and electrical power to support the security system shall be the
responsibility of the MEP Contractor. The cables necessary for the Intercom system shall be as
recommended by the specialist supplier. Also, the MEP Contractor shall co-ordinate with the Main
Contractor and the specialist supplier to complete the installation successfully.

TESTING, COMMISSIONING AND HANDOVER

The complete installation shall be tested and commissioned by the specialist sub contractor who is
responsible to demonstrate the operation of the system to the satisfaction of the Employer's personnel
or the Engineer. Sufficient Training shall be given to the Employer’s personnel for a smooth operation
of the system.

MAINTENANCE
The Subcontractor shall include for and be responsible for the free of charge regular inspection and
maintenance as recommended by the manufacturer of the complete system for one year after the
official handing over of the system

DRAWINGS

Prior to commencement of any works the Contractor shall prepare and submit working drawings
detailing but not limited to:
1. Proposed cable routes.
2. Component / Equipment layouts

3. Schematic Diagrams.

As-Built Drawings and O/M Manuals

Prior to handing over the works, the Contractor is to supply the Engineer with four sets of prints, 1
electronic copy of all "As Built" drawings relating to the supplied systems, four bound sets of all
Operation and Maintenance Manuals for all equipment installed.
END OF SUB-SECTION

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 147/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

SUB-SECTION 17290
STANDBY ELECTRIC SYSTEM

GENERAL

Section Includes
The contractor shall include in his work the supply, Engineering, Installation and Commissioning of a
complete standby electric System complete with electric power and control panels, separate earthing
system, fire alarm and fire fitting system, battery system ,cabling and all necessary components, as
specified in this section and as shown on the drawings .
This section supplements on all other Contract Documents and forms part of every section, the
contractor shall become familiar with other sections of the Specifications affecting work of this
trade

Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and appliances and perform all necessary operations
required to execute the work of this section.

RELATED SECTIONS
This schedule is intended to be used as a helpful indication of the related sections within the Project
Specifications. It is not necessarily comprehensive or complete and it is the Contractor's
responsibility to ascertain all applicable sections required to understand the full Scope of Works
intended.
 Air Filtration
 Painting and Anti Corrosion
 Pressure Pipelines
 Sanitary Pipeline and Accessories
 Tanks
 Testing and Commissioning
 Earthing and Bonding
 Electrical Identification
 Electrical Testing and Commissioning
 Cables and Wiring
 Switchboards and Distribution Panels & MCCs

REFERENCES
The minimum standards for products specified in this section shall be those standards referred to or
relevant BSI standards. In addition, the following additional standards also apply:

SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

Submit samples, specifications, engineering calculations, catalogue cut sheets, description of product
and installation method in accordance with the Contract Documents. Submissions shall indicate all
dimensions, details of construction, details of installation, relation and connections with adjoining
work.
Submit copies of test reports required to be performed on the proposed products. Submit a list of
installation completed where proposed products were used.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
Perform Work in accordance with relevant British Standards and industry standard codes.

QUALIFICATIONS

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 148/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

The supplier of Generator Plant shall have supplied and supported similar products to that proposed
in the UAE area for the last five years.
MOCK-UP
No requirement on site.
Generators shall be mocked up at works and operated in conditions that simulate those specified.
This mock up shall be witnessed by Client representatives.

ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
The generator plant and equipment shall be suitable for the environment in which it is sited

WARRANTY
All materials shall have a standard 12 month warranty from the time of practical completions. The
Contractor shall allow for extended warranties beyond this period where indicated in this document or
elsewhere within the main contract documents. The extended warranties shall be in the Client’s
name and be handed over at the time of practical completion.

The generator shall have a 5 year extended manufacturer’s warranty.

PRODUCTS

Provide a low noise breakout type diesel engine driven electric generator system, complete, including
engine, generator, air-cooled radiator, starting system, exhaust system, fuel system, engine controls,
automatic mains failure transfer switch, control relays, piping, wiring, bases, and all appurtenances
ready for use, in accordance with this Specification.
Provide a unit of the latest commercial type, with limited time rating for standby purposes as defined
in BS7698, suitable for operation, at the following conditions: 50 degrees C. maximum ambient
temperature, allow for operation at 0.0 m to 500 m above sea level. Guarantee and certify the standby
rating.

The Schematic Single Line Diagram shows the equipment required to be supported by the generator.
The Contractor shall provide all details of this equipment to the Generator Manufacturers to ensure
that they consider the characteristics of these loads (such as power factor, harmonic content etc)
when selecting generator components. The Contractor shall verify the manufacturers selection and
offer to the Engineer for approval. A complete selection strategy shall be prepared detailing step
loads and timed delays to ensure minimal droop etc.

Equipment mounting bases are included in this Section.

Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

Refer the related sections- GENERAL PROVISIONS.
Fuel piping and exhaust piping are specified in Division 15.

QUALITY CONTROL
Design Criteria:
Design, manufacture, testing and method of installation of all apparatus and materials furnished under
requirements of these specifications shall conform to latest publications or standard rules of the
following:
 BS7698
 Regulations for the Electrical Equipment of Buildings (BS 7671) published by the
Institution of Electrical Engineer (IEE) London.
 British approvals service for Electric Cables (BASEC).
Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 149/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Quality Control / Quality Assurance:

The Quality Control/Quality Assurance duties shall be performed by the Contractor and be audited
and verified by a reputable Independent Third Party. Contractor shall submit proposed Independent
Third Party companies for Engineer approval. All costs in connection with the Independent Third
Party shall be paid by the Contractor and shall be deemed to be included in the agreement price. The
system of quality control verification by the Third Party shall be in accordance with ISO 9000
Standards of Quality Assurance.

SUBMITTALS
Test -Reports:

Work Tests. Provide the manufacturer's test in accordance with BS7698 on the completely assembled
unit in the manufacturer's plant. Submit the results with Shop Drawings prior to installation.

Field Tests: Provide a factory-trained representative to supervise erection and testing of the
emergency engine driven generator system. Submit the results of the -following tests in report form:

Sequence of Testing: Check all engine and driven unit mounting bolts. Check alignment of engine and
generator by dial indication. Check generator rotor air- gap.

Test generator and exciter insulation resistance with a megger. Take generator readings at circuit
breaker, to include generator leads to switchboard.

 Perform engine manufacturer's recommended prestarting checks.

Start engine and make engine manufacturer's “after-starting” checks during a reasonable run-in
warm-up period.
 Operate generator set for three hours at 75 percent of rated load using a load bank
supplied by the generator manufacturer specifically for the purpose

Follow above run immediately with three hours at 100 percent of rated load. Provide a load bank for
utilization during the testing phase.

Checks to be made during Testing: During the tests, all operations of which the controls are capable
shall be performed to assure that all controls are functioning in a satisfactory manner.

At several points during the tests, each instrument shall be observed to ensure that all instruments
and gauges are functioning properly.

 During the tests, all auxiliary and accessory equipment, all valves, including pilot
valves, and the injection pumps shall be checked to ensure proper operation.
 Temperature readings of the manifold shall be taken and compared with those
obtained during the manufacturers’ tests.

Operation and Maintenance Data:

Provide three sets of operating and maintenance instructions for each piece of equipment, bound in
suitable manuals. Post at two locations approved piping and wiring diagrams of the entire system,
framed under clear acrylic plastic. Provide the services of the manufacturer's factory-trained
representative for a period of not less than 40 hours to instruct representatives of the Company in the
operation and maintenance of the diesel electric generating plants.

GUARANTIES AND WARRANTIES

Provide one year guarantee for engine, generator and all accessories. Warranty or guarantee period
shall commence on the date of “Handover to the Company” of the Project.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 150/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

MATERIALS
All materials and parts comprising the units herein specified shall be new and unused, and of the
highest grade.

The unit shall be the product of a firm regularly engaged in the manufacture of engines, and shall
meet the requirements of the Specifications set forth herein. The unit shall be of a standard model in
regular production at the manufacturer's place of business.

Provide flexible vibration isolators for all piping, ducting, exhaust and conduit connections.

General requirements for the equipment are:

Number of Units Required 2

Rating As noted on the drawing
Power Factor 0.80
Generator Voltage 380V, 3 phase, 4 wire
Frequency 50 Hz
Rotative Speed Not to exceed 1500 rpm

Engine
The engine shall be water-cooled V12/V16 cylinder vee-type four-stroke cycle compression ignition
diesel. It shall meet Specifications when operating on No.2 domestic burner oil. Diesel engines
requiring premium fuels will not be considered. The engine shall be equipped with fuel,lube oil, and
intake air filters, lube oil cooler, fuel transfer pump, fuel priming pump, gear driven water pump, fuel
pressure gauge and an engine mounted instrument panel including a water temperature gauge, and a
lubricating oil pressure gauge.
The engine shall be equipped with an electronic speed sensing governor capable of isochronous
frequency regulation from no load to full rated load.
Mounting: The unit shall be mounted on a structural steel sub-base and shall be provided with
suitable vibration isolators.

Safety devices - Safety shut-offs for high water temperature, low oil pressure, over speed, and engine
over crank shall be provided.

ALTERNATOR DETAILS
ALTERNATOR SPECIFICATION
BEARING Single
ROTOR Direct coupled by flexible disc
LEADS NUMBER 12
VOLTAGE 380-415
VOLTAGE ACCURACY
FREQUENCY 50/60HZ
ALTERNATOR COOLING Direct drive centrifugal blower
INSULATION CLASS H
PROTECTION IP21
TELEPHONE INTERFACE FHT<2%
WAVE DISTOR.AT NO LOAD % THD (LL/LN)2.3/2.4

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 151/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

WAVE DISTOR.AT FULL LOAD % THD (LL/LN)1.7/1.8

EXCITATION SYSTEM Brushless AVR

NOISE LEVEL AT 1M /7M Db(A) 79/65

Generator
The generator shall be a three-phase, 50 Hz, single bearing, synchronous type with brushless exciter
and be built to British Standards. Class F insulation shall be used on the stator and rotor, and both
shall be further protected with 100 percent epoxy impregnation and an overcoat of resilient insulating
material to reduce possible fungus and/or abrasion deterioration (tropicalization and anti-abrasion).
Generator shall incorporate reactive droop compensation.

Regulator
A generator mounted "volts per hertz" type regulator shall be provided to match the characteristics of
the generator and engine. Voltage regulation shall be plus or minus 1/2 percent from no load to full
rated load. Readily accessible voltage droops, voltage level and voltage gain controls shall be
provided. Voltage level adjustment shall be a minimum of plus or minus 5 percent. The solid state
regulator module shall be shock mounted and epoxy encapsulated for protection against vibration and
atmospheric deterioration. Regulator shall be compatible with full automatic electronic synchronizing
system.

Cooling System
Radiator: An engine-mounted radiator with blower type fan shall be sized to maintain safe operation at
50 degrees C. maximum ambient temperature. The radiator shall be equipped for a duct adapter
flange. Air flow restriction from the radiator shall be coordinated with approved engine manufacturer’s
specific requirements. Provide ductwork with flexible connecting section between radiator duct flange
and exhaust louver at fascia of Generator house. Exhaust louver panels shall be demountable to
enable access to generator where applicable. Ventilation louvers shall be provided as detailed in the
drawings.

Fuel System
Provide fuel system complying with the following requirements:
 Day Tank: Floor standing day tank with rupture basin shall be provided. Tanks shall
be equipped as follows:

 Day tank with 8 hours capacity.

 Rupture basin.
 Fuel strainer.
 25mm solenoid valve.
 Vent cap.
 Drain pit cock.
 Rupture basin leak detector switch with remote signal.
 25mm overflow to rupture basin.
 150 mm square removable gasketed inspection plate.
 Fuel level gauge.
 "Press to test" switch.
 "pump running" indicator light.
 Tank drain.
 Removable top cover.

Flexible fuel connections at engine shall be provided. The engine shall be provided with a fully rated
fuel transfer pump. An engine-mounted fuel filter, fuel pressure gauge, fuel cooler and engine fuel
priming pump shall be provided. Fuel cooler shall be of sufficient capacity to reject to the air all heat
gain from the injectors. Note that no other fuel cooling source or heat sink is available.

Provide all interconnecting fuel piping between the day tank, and engine. Provide fill guard system to

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 152/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

fill the day tank from remote location as shown on the drawings. Fill pipe shall be provided as
detailed in the drawings.

Exhaust System.
Exhaust Silencer. Provide low noise residential silencers including flexible exhaust fitting for engine
mounting, properly sized and installed, according to the manufacturer's recommendations, Silencer
shall be mounted so that its weight is not supported by the engine. Exhaust pipe shall be schedule 20
black steel. Minimum silencer attenuation shall be
1. Frequency Attenuation
2. Hz dB
3. 125 29
4. 250 37
5. 500 35
6. 1000 31
7. 2000 27
8. 4000 27
8000 27
9.
Insulation: Insulation for exhaust silencer and all interior exhaust piping is to be 100 MM thick Calcium
silicate moulded block type of rigid hydrous calcium silicate with thermal conductivity of .060 W/M-K.
Outer covering shall be aluminum jacket, 0.4 MM inches thick, type 3003 or 5005 alloys with 4 MM
corrugations. Jacket shall have a factory-applied vapour barrier on the inside with aluminum straps
over transverse joints. Adjacent section corrugations shall overlap.

Automatic Starting System

Starting Motor: A DC electric starting system with positive engagement drive shall be provided. The
motor voltage shall be as recommended by the engine manufacturer.

Automatic Controls: Fully automatic generator set start-stop controls in the generator control panel
shall be provided. Controls shall provide shutdown for low oil pressure, high water temperature, over
speed, over crank, and one auxiliary contact for activating accessory items. Controls shall include a
30 second single cranking cycle limit with lockout and means for reset and overriding for manual
starting (momentary contact type) at the control panel.

Batteries: A set of lead-acid storage batteries of the heavy-duty diesel starting type compatible with
the starting motor voltage shall be provided for each engine. The battery set shall be of sufficient
capacity to provide for one and one half minutes total cranking time without recharging and will be
rated no less than l50 amp hours. A battery rack and necessary cables and clamps shall be provided.

Battery Charger: A current limiting battery charger shall be provided to automatically recharge
batteries. Charger shall float at 2.l7V per cell and equalize at 2.33V per cell. It shall include overload
protection, silicon diode full wave rectifiers, voltage surge suppressors, DC ammeter, and fused AC
input. AC input voltages shall be the same as generator output voltage. Amperage output shall be no
less than 5 amperes.
Automatic Transfer Switches
STANDARDS
_ Conformity to standards:
_ CEI 60947-6-1
_ CEI 60947-3
_ NF EN 60947-6-1
_ NF EN 60947-3

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 153/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

_ BS EN 60947-3
_ NBN EN 60947-3
_ GB 14048

OPERATION
The ATS is an automatic transfer equipment to be used in backup systems with interruption
of the supply to the load during transfer.

It integrates:
• Over / under voltages, over / under frequencies, phase sequence and phase failure
control.
• Specified timers:
• To start / stop a generator set
• To transfer the load from 1 source to the other

The product includes control modes such as “test on-load”, “test off-load”, “switch position
control”(transfer I, 0, II) and a “semi-automatic mode” requiring validation before
retransferring the load to the main source.

RAW MATERIAL.
High material quality:
• Use of glass fiber charged polyester for the power part:
•High mechanical resistance
•High overheating resistance
• Use of aluminum alloy for the components of the driving mechanism
• Complete motorized module is only made of moulded parts

THE TECHNOLOGY
The switching elements:
• Use of mineral grease on the contacts
• Silver plated contacts (auto cleaner).
• Fast closing and opening (the contacts speed is independent from the motor speed)
•Operation on highly inductive (AC23) load
•Closing capabilities on short circuit and high short circuit withstand
• A stable position of the contacts, not affected by voltage variations
• A stable position of the contacts in position I,O,II, not affected by vibrations/chocs
• Constant pressure on the contact, independent from the power supply
• Product not supplied in stable position ( / contactor), reduced consumption
• Back to back mounting of the power switches = more space and optimized interlocking
• Security disconnection integrated.

The motorized module:

• Wide power supply range (220Vac -20% to 240Vac + 20%)
• Limited number of components for better reliability

MOUNTING AND CABLING FACILITY

• Large terminals allowing easy cables or bars connection
• Mounting spacers available in option to allow enough space between the connection and
the back rail

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 154/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

• Flush or panel mounting allowing total protected access to manual and padlocking
operations.
• Electrical and mechanical interlocking is integrated in the product. The voltage sensing
and power supply kit provides voltage and power connection to the electronic module.
The routing of the conductors is controlled, which means that no specific protective
device is necessary for these connections

SECURITY
• Possibility to padlock the product in 0 position(until 3 padlock diameter 8mm) – padlocking
in 3 positions in option. All electric controls are inhibited
• Product able to be padlocked
• Impossible to introduce the handle when the product is in automatic mode or when
padlocked.
• Integrated electrical and mechanical interlocking.

MAINTENANCE
• Easy disconnection of the motorization module if replacement is needed (4 screws).
• Easy disconnection of the electronic module if replacement is needed
• The power switches can be kept connected in case of motorization module or electronic
module replacement
• Possibility to operate the product manually without the motorization module using the
handle.

UTILISATION
• 3 stable positions and electrical control (1,0 and 2)
• Manual emergency handle
• Dual power supply
• NO auxiliary contacts signaling positions 1, 0 and 2
• Auto/Manu selector by Key
• Position contacts for Auto /Manu and padlocking selector
• Possibility to plug optional module Inputs/Outputs, Communication
• Control logic selection, impulse or contactor mode to configure on the product
• Possibility to inhibit external position control using a dry contact
• Source availability and switch position information on front display

CHARACTERISTICS
Control
• Overvoltage and over frequency thresholds: from 102% to 120% of the nominal value
• Under voltage and under frequency thresholds: from 80% to 90% of the nominal value
• Overvoltage and over frequency hysteresis: from 101% to 119% of the nominal value
• Under voltage and under frequency hysteresis: from 81% to 90% of the nominal value

Metering
• 3 phases voltage on network 1, 3 phases voltage onnetwork2
• Frequency on network 1 and 2
• Timers

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 155/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Timers
• MFT: Main (priority) source Failure Timer (0-60s)
• DTT: Delay to Transfer Timer(0-60s). Controls the backup source stability before transfer
• OMF: Dead band stay in 0 position after main (priority source Failure (0 to 20s). It allows
the load residual voltage to decrease under a non critical value before transfer to backup
source
• MRT: Main (priority) Return Timer (0 to 30mins). Controls the main’s availability before
transferring back the load
• OMR: Dead band stay in position 0 position after Main(priority) source Return (0 to 20 s).
It allows the load residual voltage to decrease under a non critical value before transfer to
priority source (necessary in case of rotating loads).
• CDT: Cool Down Timer (0 to 10mins) allows the generator set cooling down before stop
operation (for generator application).
Ouputs electrical characteristics
• «Generator start signal » output: NO, 5A AC1 30Vdc and 230Vac, 4mm².
• «Fault relay » output: 5A AC1 230V AC.

Controls modes
• Test on-load (load transfer): allows loss of main’s network simulation. The complete
automatic cycle is then followed should be activated from the keypad of the device or
remotely from an external dry contact.

• Test off-load (without load transfer): allows a generator set start and stop operation.
should be activated from the keypad of the device.

• Control I, 0, II: allows the product to be driven into one of the positions, the automatic
cycle is then no longer active should be activated from the keypad of the device’s front
or using an external dry contact.

• Semi automatic: when this mode is active, any transfer back to the main network must be
acknowledged on the keypad of the product. These modes must be selected during
configuration (programming).

Other features
• A fault relay output: a dry contact closes in cases of product internal fault.
• Delay to Transfer Timer (DTT) can be set up its maximum value to allow enough time for
the Synchronization of several generators. A specific input can be used to allow transfer.
• Upgrading of the device by means of optional modules: an RS485 communication module
(JBUS/MODBUS), and / or “Network priority, status report” module.
• Connection with remote interfaces.

ELECTRICAL CHARESTERISTICS

Rating 125A 160A 250A 400A 630A 800A 1000A 1250A 1600A

Thermal 125A 160A 250A 400A 630A 800A 1000A 1250A 1600A
Current
415Vac
in
AC-31B

ENGINE GENERATOR CONTROL AND POWER SECTIONS

The section for engine generator set shall contain over current protection, controls, relays and

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 156/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

auxiliary devices associated with its respective engine generator set and include the following.
Generator Circuit Breaker and Feeder Circuit Breaker
A circuit breaker shall be furnished to provide over current protection for generator and outgoing
feeder breakers. The breakers shall be 3 pole, electrically operated, draw out, with solid state trip
elements. Trip elements shall include adjustable long delay, short delay, and instantaneous settings.
Breakers shall have 5 cycle stored energy closing. Draw out feature shall provide for connected, test
and disconnected positions. In the connected position the main line and load terminals and all
auxiliary control contacts and circuitry shall be connected and the breaker shall be fully operable. In
the test position, the breaker auxiliary control contacts and circuitry only shall be connected to permit
automatic operation of the complete control system without actually connecting the generator to the
main bus. In the disconnect position, main and auxiliary control contacts and circuitry shall be
completely disconnected. The breaker draw out mechanism shall be mechanically interlocked with the
breaker to permit draw out operation only when the breaker main contacts are open.
Provide a main bus to interconnect the generator breaker and feeder circuits. Main Bus shall be rated
for rated amps with a full size neutral and ground (earth) bus.
Bus shall be tinned copper with silver plating at all joints. Bus shall be adequately braced to withstand
short circuit current not less than 50,000 amps rms symmetrical. Construction shall comply with
Section 16425, Switchboards.

Generator Sensing Panel

A solid-state printed-circuit generator sensing panel shall be furnished to protect, monitor, and control
the operation of the generator set.
All outputs, unless noted otherwise, shall be isolated through plug-in relays with contacts rated for
their intended service. Relays used in control circuit logic shall have gold flashed contacts for low
voltage (32 volts and below), low current duty. Relay contacts shall be rated to 10 amperes at 240
volts AC. All relays shall be enclosed in polycarbonate covers and color coded for operating control
voltages.
Solid state protective relay circuits shall be on glass epoxy printed circuit boards with double sided
gold contacts to plug into sockets with double sided bifurcated contacts. Circuit boards shall be rigidly
held in place and covered to provide additional protection. All printed circuit boards shall be coated
with polyurethane for protection against physical contact and corrosive atmospheres. Adjustments
shall be readily accessible for calibration and periodic testing.
Generator sensing panel shall include the following components, devices, and indicators:
 Reverse Power Protective Relay. An adjustable reverse power solid state relay shall be provided
to detect a motorizing condition of the engine generator set.

 The trip setting shall be adjustable from 0 to l5% of the forward power rating of the engine
generator set. Response shall be independent of frequency over a range of 40 to 70 Hz. The
relay shall include a test switch to enable the relay circuit to sense forward power for periodic
testing and adjustment. The relay shall include a solid state linear time delay to insure
compatibility with engine driven generator set characteristics. The time delay shall have a range
of adjustability of 0.1 to 6.0 seconds and be factory set at 2.0 seconds. The relay shall respond
to power, the in phase component of current, across a power factor range of 0.2 to unity, leading
or lagging, with a repeatability within plus or minus 3.0%. Do not substitute relays with inverse
time characteristics.

 Generator Voltage Protective Relay. An under voltage solid state relay shall be included to
respond to the true r.m.s. value of the generator voltage. This relay shall have an adjustable pick
up range of 75% to l00% of nominal and an adjustable dropout of 80% to 95% of pickup. Dropout
shall have zero differential for time delay reset.

 Generator Frequency Protective Relay. An under frequency solid state relay utilizing full cycle
zero crossing sensing shall be included to respond to the fundamental frequency of the system
so as to ignore wave shape distortion resulting from solid state loads. The relay shall have an
adjustable pick up range of 40 to 60 Hz and adjustable under frequency dropout range of 0.1 to
10 Hz below the pickup.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 157/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

 Frequency/Voltage Time Delay. An adjustable time delay on drop out of both Devices i.e. under
voltage relay and frequency relay shall be provided to override loading transients. Range of
adjustability shall be 0.1 to 6.0 seconds, factory set at 2.0 seconds. Repetitive accuracy shall be
within plus or minus 2%.
 Control Circuit Status Indicators. Color-coded, light-emitting diodes shall be provided on the
generator sensing panel to indicate the control circuit status of the following conditions:

A) DC Input Power On Red Color

B) Generator voltage and frequency acceptable Green Color
C) Reverse power trip setting exceeded Yellow Color
D) Generator Voltage Too High Red Color
E) Generator Voltage Too Low Red Color
F) Synchronizing Output Relay On Yellow Color
G) Reverse Power Trip Setting Exceeded
for 2.0 sec; RPR Latched On Red Color

 Engine Cool down. Plug in, solid state time delays shall be provided for unloaded cool down,
adjustable from 0 to 15 minutes (factory set at 15 minutes). The cool down time delay shall be
adjustable from 1 to 3 minutes (factory set at 3 minutes) and automatically bypassed for
malfunction and manual shutdown of the engine generator set.

Governor: a machine for automatic control or limitation of speed. b: A device giving automatic
control (as of pressure or temperature). •A Governor is a device which controls the energy source to
a prime mover to control its power for a specific purpose. •Basic governors sense speed and
sometimes load of a prime mover and adjust the energy source to maintain the desired level.•
Advanced governors are often referred to as:

• Closed Loop Definition: When used as an automatic control system for operation or process in
which feedback in a closed path or group of paths to maintain output at a desired level.

• If parameter(s) of the loop change, it will affect the entire loop and fuel will automatically be
corrected to maintain the desired setpoint.

Control Systems

Engine Starting Control

The engine starting control logic shall be microprocessor based and shall automatically start, protect
and monitor each engine generator set. The engine starting control logic shall be capable of
controlling engines furnished with the following:
 Starting motor magnetic switch.
 Electrically operated fuel control.
 Normally open protective switches that close for abnormal conditions, temperature, speed and
liquid level when required.

The engine starting control logic shall provide electrically isolated contacts for electronic governor
control, electric fuel control, battery charger disconnect during cranking and common shutdown alarm
annunciation. All relays shall be the same as and interchangeable with, the relays specified in
Generator Sensing Panel section.
Engine Start/Stop Operation: The automatic engine control logic shall initiate operation of the engine
upon receipt of a signal from a contact which closes for engine run and opens for engine stop. Upon
start of the engine, the engine control logic shall automatically disconnect the starting motor and
prevent its reconnection until the engine has come to a complete rest.
If the engine fails to start after 4 adjustable cranking attempts (factory set at 10 seconds on and 10
seconds off, adjustable from 5 to 30 seconds) or if any protective device should operate while the
engine is running, the engine shall be disconnected from service and immediately stopped. The
engine control logic shall lock the failed set out of service and requires a manual reset. The engine
control logic shall include a provision for conversion to single cycle cranking, adjustable from 35 to
210 seconds.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 158/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Five Position Engine Control Switch - Operation

Stop/Reset - In this position, the engine shall not be capable of starting and/or running. If the engine
was shutdown due to the operation of a protective device, the shutdown malfunction shall be reset
when the switch is moved to this position. If the engine is running when the switch is moved to this
position, it shall immediately shut down.
Off/Cool down In this position, the engine shall shut down after a cool down period.
Automatic In this position, the engine control shall be in readiness for fully automatic operation upon
receipt of a start signal.
Test Off-line - When placed in this position, the engine shall start and run as if a start signal were
received except it shall not be connected to the bus unless a start signal is received. When returned
to the Automatic position, the engine will shut down.
Test On-Line - When placed in this position, the engine shall start, run and connect to the bus as if a
start signal were received. When returned to the Automatic position the circuit breaker will open and
the engine will run for its cool down period before shutting down.

Alarm and Status Indication

Visual and audible alarm and status indication shall be provided on each generator control section to
include readout and annunciation for:

FUNCTION MODE COLOR

Low Oil Pressure Pre-alarm Amber
Low Oil Pressure Shutdown Red
Storage tank fuel oil level - Amber
Storage tank fuel low level alarm - Red
High Water Temperature Pre-alarm Amber
High Water Temperature Shutdown Red
Over Crank Shutdown Red
Over Speed Shutdown Red
Circuit Breaker Trip Shutdown Red
Reverse Power Shutdown Red
Controls not in Automatic Flashing Red
Circuit Breaker Open Status Green
Circuit Breaker Closed Status Red
Engine Running Status White
Circuit Breaker Closed Failure Status Red
Control Voltage Failure Status Red
Auto Start Status White

A total of 24 spare lights shall be furnished.

Visual alarms - shall be resettable only after the fault condition has been corrected. The audible alarm
shall include a silencing circuit which after activation will permit audible annunciation of subsequent
failures.
Lamp test shall be an inherent feature of all door-mounted visual indicators.

Metering
Unless otherwise noted, all meters shall be industrial switchboard type, 114 mm square, 1%
accuracy. Provide the following meters for each engine generator control section:
 Ammeter 500 ampere scale.
 Voltmeter 600 volt scale.
 Kilowatt meter 500 kilowatt scale.
 Frequency meter 45-55 hertz scale.
 Running time meter - 5 digit non-reset type, 85 mm.
 Kilowatt - hour meter.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 159/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Ammeter/Voltmeter Phase Selector Switch

An ammeter/voltmeter phase selector switch having "off - 1- 2 - 3" positions to read line current and
line voltage shall be provided for the generator ammeter and voltmeter.

Current Transformers
Current transformers shall be furnished with V.A. burden ratings suitable to supply the metering,
protective devices and electronic governor without affecting their accuracy. Ratios shall be selected to
cause ammeter scale deflection to the top 25% of scale at the full load rating of the engine generator
when computed at 0.8 pf.

All current transformers shall have shorting type terminal blocks.

Potential Transformers
Potential transformers shall be provided in turns ratio and V.A. burden rating to be compatible with the
controls, metering and the electronic governor. Transformers shall have primary and secondary fuses.

Engine Governor, Generator Voltage Regulator and Miscellaneous Engine Generator Set Controls.

Engine Generator Set Controls. The switchgear manufacturer upon request, shall mount and wire all
electronic and electric controls associated with the engine generator set governor and/or voltage
regulator as described in the engine generator set specifications. These controls shall be furnished by
the engine generator set distributor to the switchgear manufacturer for mounting and wiring. The
controls may include, but not be limited to the following:

 Electronic control portion of governor.

 Motorized Voltage Adjust Potentiometer
 Cross Current Compensation Transformer.
 Isolation Transformers when required.

- Factors Affecting Generator Output Rating.

All electrical appliances have set conditions under which they function at optimum levels. Any
fluctuations in these conditions can cause the appliances to run at a lower efficiency. Power
generators are no exception to this. Generators are typically designed to run most efficiently at or
near sea level under standard conditions of temperature and pressure (STP). Any fluctuation from
STP conditions can impair generators and cause decreased output. Under extreme circumstances,
generators can cease to function entirely. For most applications, many of these factors are relatively
minimal unless the generator set is run at elevations over 5000 feet above sea level, or has ambient
temperatures that remain over 100 degrees Fahrenheit for a significant length of time. Special care
should be taken to compensate for these types of extremes and is discussed a bit further below.

Environmental Factors that Affect Generator Function

Ambient conditions of temperature are extremely crucial for proper ignition and functioning of a
generator. All generators, irrespective of the fuel that powers them, require adequate air for
combustion. Decreased air levels can lead to start-up failure. In diesel engines, air and fuel are
infused together. The compressed air becomes hot and when peak temperature and pressure is
achieved, diesel is injected, which then ignites under the given conditions. In generators using
gasoline, an air and fuel mixture is introduced at once using a carburetor and a spark is induced to
ignite the engine. However in both cases, adequate levels of air are required for proper start up and
operation.

Altitude:
In areas of high altitude, air pressure drops reducing the air density. This can create problems with
generator start up if not accounted for since air is crucial for ignition in any type of generator. Another
factor that gets affected is availability of ambient air to facilitate heat dissipation from the generator. A
lot of heat is created during the combustion process and needs to be dissipated into the environment
to reduce engine temperature. At high altitudes, due to the low air density, heat dissipation occurs at a
much slower rate than it would at sea levels, resulting in high engine temperatures for a sustained
period of time. The engine remains hot and overheating is a common problem in such cases.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 160/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Temperature:
High temperatures are also associated with lower air density and can cause similar ignition problems
due to inadequate air supply. This can burden the engine which pushes itself to deliver the power it is
designed to. However, due to inadequate oxygen levels available for combustion, it fails to do so. In
many such instances, the engine gets overheated and sometimes collapses altogether.

Humidity:
Humidity is the measure of water content in a given volume of air. In conditions of extreme humidity,
water vapor in the air displaces oxygen. Low oxygen levels impair ignition, since oxygen is the
element in air that is ignited in an engine for the burning of fuel.

Derating Generators
We have seen above how non-standard environment conditions can reduce generator power output.
In such cases, how does one guess the new output levels? A technique called "Derating" is employed
to determine the generator’s performance under new ambient conditions. Derating is defined by
Wikipedia as “the technique employed in power electrical and electronic devices wherein the devices
are operated at less than their rated maximum power dissipation”.

Derating a generator depends on the manufacturer of the unit. Different manufacturers design
generators using materials from different sources. Also, design developments are non-similar and so
is the technique in many cases. All these can contribute to overall generator efficiency. Therefore,
derating a generator is dependant on the manufacturing process. Different brands have different
derating factors for estimating generator output under non-standard ambient conditions.

Summary
In totality, it is best to use generators with the specifications they come with from the manufacturer at
conditions of STP. In non-standard conditions, it is advised to derate the generator as per the
manufacturer’s derating formula and operate the unit accordingly so as to avoid overburdening the
generator. Regular maintenance and repairs must be taken care of to enhance the life span of the
generator since a well maintained generator is a valuable investment that can save you from precious
losses in times of power failure. As is the case with any complex electrical equipment (like an
industrial generator set), a trained technician or experienced electrical contractor should always be
consulted prior to attempting any type of modifications, not only for safety and reliability, but to ensure
you are getting the best possible performance from your equipment

EXAMINATION
Verify site conditions as Section 16010.
Before ordering any materials / commencing work verify that building structure associated with the
system is within tolerance and take full account of shape configuration and material properties of the
structure.

PREPARATION
Provide concrete piers and plinths, as required.
HANDLING AND STORAGE
Deliver component parts to site, completely identified in accordance with shop and certified drawings
prepared for this work. Store in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, above ground, properly
protected from the weather and construction activities.
FABRICATION
All fabrication work shall be executed at the manufacturers’ works.

INSTALLATION
Before beginning installation in any area, examine all parts of the adjoining work into which applicable
work is to be placed. Should any conditions be found which would prevent the proper execution of
the work, installation shall not proceed in that area until such conditions are corrected by the
contractor.

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 161/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturers Specifications, approved Shop Drawings and
the Contract Documents.
The generator/engine set and exhaust silencer arrangement shall be physically sized to be installed
within the allocated spatial constraints as indicated on the layout drawing.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Provide field quality control as indicated in The Employer’s Requirements.

CLEANING
Cleaning installed work as indicated in the Employer’s Requirements.
Remove labels after Work is complete.
Remove concrete and paint splatters after Work is complete.
Replace any components that have had paint or surface finish damaged. Alternatively, touch up or
repaint in accordance with a methodology agreed with the Consultant
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

Protect work as indicated in The Employer’s Requirements.

STANDARD SPECIFICATION
This standard specification is intended to be used as a helpful indication of work within this section. It
is not necessarily comprehensive or complete and it is the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain and
complete the full works intended and as shown within the drawings, specification and Contract or
thereby implied.

END OF SUB-SECTION

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 162/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

SUB-SECTION 17320
ELECTRICAL VENDORS’ LIST

Specs Material Manufacturer Local Agent

Ref.
Schneider
ABB
MDBs/SMDBs/DBs/MCCs/
1 Hager
Changeover Panel/Isolators
L&T

-All Panel Builders must be authorized and approved by the Main Manufacturer.
-Assembled and Tested only by the above respective Authorized Local Agent.
ABB
Schneider
2 Capacitor Bank Nokian Capacitors
Comar
Lifasa
Electric Cables , wires and
Ducab (UAE)
3 Heat Resistant Cable (≥90°C)
BICC (UK)

SAUDI CABLE (KSA)

Alfanar
Riyadh Cables (S.A.)
Decoduct

PVC Conduits , PVC Flexible Marshall Tufflex

4
Conduits ,G.I. Box AND Fittings
Schneider

Rexton
Kopex

PVC Coated Flexible G.I. Adaptaflex

5
Conduits WM Interfa
Lappcable
SMARTr (Singapore)
6 G.I. Conduit and Fittings
Delta UAE
WM Interfa
Bonn Metal Industries (UAE)
Rexton
7 MK-Ega (UK)
PVC Cable Trunking /PVC Duct

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 163/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Decoduct (UAE)
Marshall Tufflex (UK)
Walsall
Britmac (UK)
Swifts (UK)
8 Metallic Cable Trunking Bonn Metal Industries (UAE)
Rexton
Delta UAE
Index industry expert (UAE)
DME Prolink
Belden (USA)
9
Telephone System TMT Globel (UK)
Legrand (France)
BICC (UK)
Swifts (UK)
Bonn Metal Industries (UAE)
Cable Trays and Ladders
10 Ductile Sections (UK)
Index Industry Expert (UAE) --
Delta UAE
General Electric (USA)
Relays for Remote GEC (UK)
11
Switching Merlin Gerin (France)
Hager (France)
MK
Legrand

12 BG (UK)
Wiring devices and accessories. Panasonic
RR Global
Crabtree
Scame (ITALY)
CEAG - Cooper

Orbik (UK)
Emergency system self-
13 Saft - Nife (France)
contained
JSB (UK)
Shield
Cignetics
Evax
EST
Voice Evacuation System
GENT
14 Cerberus (Switzerland)

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 164/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Simplex (USA)
Notifier -USA
Shield
Edwards (Canada)
Pirelli-FP200 (Gold)
Ducab
Fire Alarm Cables
15 Fire Tuf (UK)
(UL listed, as per Civil Defense
GST
approval)
URANUS (TURKEY)
Shield
Gent
Simplex
Edwards
Fire Alarm System
Honeywell
16 Shield
Esser
APT (UK
TMT-UK
17 Automatic System (Belgium)
Parking Barrier system
Federal APD (USA)
New gate (UK)
BFT
TMT-UK

Wisi (Germany)

Hirschmann (Germany)
MATV/Satellite receiving System
18 Bosch (Germany)
and Cables
Kathrein (Germany)
Philips (Holland)
Televis
Honeywell - USA
Belco - USA
CCTV System Securitex - USA
19
Access Control System TMT -UK
Sony -Japan
SYAC.TB- ITALY
Scame
20 Isolator ABB
Electra
Rexton

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 165/166 Electrical Installations
 P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Earthing Protection System / Furse (UK)

Lightning Protection System Kingsmile
22
/Surge Arrestors Manav Enterprises
Wallis (UK)

Perkins(UK)
Caterpillar (USA)
23 Standby Generator
Cummins (USA)
FG (UK)
Luceco (UK)

GEWISS (ITALY )

Light Grapltix (UK)

24 Indoor/Outdoor LED light

FELIX & VICTOR PTYLTD

(Australia).

Frater (SPAIN )

Vervisa - Italy

25 Audio/ Video Intercom system Videx - Italy

TMT

END OF SUB-SECTION

Design Center Architects & Engineers Consultants Page 166/166 Electrical Installations